![]() |
![]() |
![]() |
BIBLIOGRAPHYKA ////////// PREHISTORIKA
The
dawn of history
an
introduction to prehistoric study
by
C. F. KEARY
![]() |
PREFACE.
The advance of prehistoric
study has been during the last ten years exceptionally rapid; and, considering
upon how many subsidiary interests it touches, questions of politics, of social
life, of religion almost, the science of prehistoric archaeology might claim to
stand in rivalry with geology as the favorite child of this century; as much a
favorite of its declining years as geology was of its prime. But as yet, it will be
confessed, we have little popular literature upon the subject, and that for
want of it the general reader is left a good deal in arrear of the course of
discovery. His ideas of nationalities and kindredship among peoples is, it may
be guessed, still hazy. We still hear the Russians described as Tartars : and
the notion that we English are descendants of the lost Israelitish tribes finds
innumerable supporters. I am told that a society has been formed in London for
collecting proofs of the more than Ovidian metamorphosis. The reason of this
public indifference is very plain. Prehistoric science has not yet passed out
of that early stage when workers are too busy in the various branches of the
subject to spare much time for a comparison of the results of their labors; when,
one may say, fresh contributions are pouring in too fast to be placed upon
their proper shelves in the storehouse of our knowledge. In such a state of
things the reader who is not a specialist is under peculiar disadvantages for a
discovery of what has been done. He stands bewildered, like the sleeping
partner in a firm, to whom no one�though he is after all the true
beneficiary�explains the work which is passing before his eyes.
It will not be thought a misplaced object to attempt some such
explanation, and that is the task of the following chapters. And as at some
great triumph of mechanism and science�a manufactory, an observatory, an
ironclad,�a junior clerk or a young engineer is told off to accompany the
intelligent visitor and explain the workings of the machinery; or as, if the
simile serve better, in those cities which are sought for their treasures of
art and antiquity, the lower class of the population become self-constituted
into guides to beauties which they certainly neither helped to create nor keep
alive; so this book offers itself to the interested student as a guide over
some parts of the ground covered by prehistoric inquiry, without advancing
pretensions to stand beside the works of specialists in that field. The
peculiar objects kept in view have been, to put the reader in possession of (1)
the general results up to this time attained, the chief additions which
prehistoric science has made to the sum of our knowledge, even if this
knowledge can be given only in rough outline; (2) the method or mechanism of the
science, the way in which it pieces together its acquisitions, and argues upon
the facts it has ascertained; and (3) to put this information in a form which
might be attractive and suitable to the general reader.
The various labors of a crowd of specialists are needed to give
completeness to our knowledge of primitive man, and it is scarcely necessary to
say that there are a hundred questions which in such a short book as this have
been left untouched. The intention has been to present those features which can
best be combined to form a continuous panorama, and also to avoid, as far as
possible, the subjects most under controversy. No apology surely is needed for
the joint character of the work: as in every chapter the
conclusions of many different and sometimes contradictory writers had to be
examined and compared, and as these chapters, few as they are, spread over
various special fields of inquiry.
It is to be hoped that some readers to whom prehistoric study is a new
thing may be sufficiently interested in it to desire to continue their
researches. For the assistance of such, lists are given, at the end, of the
chief authorities consulted on the subject of each chapter, with some notes
upon questions of peculiar interest.
The vast extent of the field, the treasures of knowledge which have been
already gathered, and the harvest which is still in the ear, impress the
student more and more the deeper he advances into the study. Surely, if from
some higher sphere, beings of a purely spiritual nature�nourished, that is, not
by material meats and drinks, but by ideas�look down upon the lot of
man, they must be before everything amazed at the complaints of poverty which
rise up from every side. When every stone on which we tread can yield a
history, to follow up which is almost the work of a lifetime; when every word
we use is a thread leading back the mind through centuries of man's life on
earth; it must be confessed that, for riches of any but a material sort, for a
wealth of ideas, the mind's nourishment, there ought to be no lack.
CHAPTER II. The Second Stone Age [C. F. KEARY]
CHAPTER III. The Growth of Language [C. F. KEARY]
CHAPTER IV. Families of Language [C. F. KEARY]
CHAPTER V. The Nations of the Old Wokld [C. F. KEARY]
CHAPTER VI. Early Social Life [H. M. Keary]
CHAPTER VII. The Village Community [H. M.
Keary]
CHAPTER VIII. Religion [A. Keary]
CHAPTER IX. Akyan Religions [C. F. KEARY].
CHAPTER X. The Other World [C. F. KEARY]
CHAPTER XI. Mythologies and Folk Tales [C. F. KEARY]
CHAPTER XII. Picture Writing [A. Keary]
CHAPTER XIII. Phonetic Writing [A. Keary]
CHAPTER XIV. Conclusion [H. Keary and C. F. KEARY].
THE DAWN OF HISTORY.
CHAPTER
I.
the earliest traces of man.
When St. Paulinus came to preach Christianity
to the people of Northumbria, King Eadwine (so runs the legend) being minded to
hear him, and wishing that his people should do so too, called together a council
of his chief men and asked them whether they would attend to hear what the
saint had to tell; and one of the king�s thegns stood up and said, "Let us
certainly hear what this man knows, for it seems to me that the life of man is
like the flight of a sparrow through a large room, where you, King, are sitting
at supper in winter, whilst storms of rain and snow rage abroad. The sparrow, I
say, flying in at one door and straightway out again at another is, while
within, safe from the storm; but soon it vanishes out of sight into the
darkness whence it came. So the life of man appears for a short space; but of
what went before, or what is to follow, we are always ignorant". This wise
and true saying of the Saxon thegn holds good too for the human race as far as
its progress is revealed to us by history. We can watch this progress through a
brief interval�for the period over which real, continuous authentic history
extends; and beyond that is a twilight space, wherein, amid many fantastic
shapes of mere tradition or mythology, here and there an
object or an event stands out more clearly, lit up by a gleam from the sources
of more certain knowledge which we possess.
To draw with as much
accuracy as may be the outline of these shapes out of the past is the business
of the prehistoric student; and to assist him in his task, what has he? First,
he has the Bible narrative, wherein some of the chief events of the world�s
history are displayed, but at uncertain distances apart; then we have the
traditions preserved in other writings, in books, or on old temple stones�in
these the truth has generally to be cleared from a mist of allegory, or at
least of mythology. And, lastly, besides these conscious records of times gone
by, we have other dumb memorials, old buildings�cities or temples�whose makers
are long since forgotten, old tools or weapons, buried for thousands of years,
to come to light in our days; and again, old words, old beliefs, old customs,
old arts, old forms of civilization which have been unwittingly handed down to
us, can all, if we know the art to interpret their language, be made to tell us
histories of the antique world. It is, then, no uninteresting study by which we
learn how to make these silent records speak. �Of man's activity and attainment�,
finely says Carlyle, �the chief results are aeriform, mystic, and preserved in
tradition only: such are his Forms of Government, with the Authority they rest
on; his Customs or Fashions both of Cloth-habits and Soul-habits; much more his
collective stock of Handicrafts, the whole Faculty he has acquired of
manipulating nature�all these things, as indispensable and priceless as they
are, cannot in any way be fixed under lock and key, but must flit, spirit-like,
on impalpable vehicles from Father to Son; if you demand sight of them they are
nowhere to be met with. Visible Ploughmen and Hammermen there have been, even
from Cain and Tubalcain downwards; but where does your accumulated
Agricultural, Metallurgic and other Manufacturing skill he warehoused? It transmits
itself on the atmospheric air, on the sun's rays (by Hearing and by Vision); it
is a thing aeriform, impalpable, of quite spiritual sort�.
How many of these
intangible spiritual possessions must man have acquired before he has learned
the art of writing history, and so of keeping a record of what had gone before;
how much do we know that any individual race of men has learned before it
brings itself forward with distinctness in this way. For as a first condition
of all man must have learned to write, and writing, as we shall hereafter see,
is a slowly-developing art, which man acquired by ages of gradual experiment.
His language, too, must ere this have reached a state of considerable
cultivation, and it will be our object in the course of these papers to show
through what a long history of its own the language of any nation must go
before it becomes fit for the purposes of literature�through how many changes
it passes, and what a story it reveals to us by every change. And then, again,
before a nation can have a history it must be a nation, must have a national life to record; that is to
say, the people who compose it must have left the simple pastoral state which
belongs to the most primitive ages, must have drawn closer the loose bonds
which held men together under the conditions of a patriarchal society, and
constituted a more permanent system of society. Whether under the pressure of
hostile nations, or only from the growth of a higher conception of social life,
the nation has to rise from out a mere collection of tribes, until the head of
the family becomes the king�the rude tents grow into houses and temples, and
the pens of their sheepfolds into walled cities, like Corinth or Athens or
Rome. Such changes as these must be completed before history conies to be
written, and with such changes as these, and with a thousand others, changes
and growths in Art, in Poetry, in Manufactures, in Commerce, and in Laws, the
pre-historical student has to deal. On all these subjects we shall have
something to say.
Before, however, we
enter upon any one of these it is right that we remind the reader�and remind
him once for all�that our knowledge upon all these points is but partial and
uncertain, and never of such a character as will allow us to speak with
dogmatic assurance. Our information can necessarily never be direct; it can
only be built upon inferences of a higher or lower degree of probability. As,
however, it is a necessity of our minds that from the information which we
possess we must form an unbroken panorama, we shall do this freely and without
danger of harm, so long as we are ready to modify or enlarge it when more
knowledge is forthcoming. As the eye can in a moment supply the deficiencies of
some incompleted picture, a landscape of which it gets only a partial glance, or
a statue which has lost a feature, so the mind selects from its knowledge those
facts which form a continuous story, and� loses those which are known only as isolated fragments. Set a practised
and an unpractised draughtsman to draw a circle, and we may witness how
differently they go to work. The second never takes his pencil off the paper,
and produces his effect by one continuous line, which the eye has no choice
but at once to condemn as incomplete. The wiser artist proceeds by a number of
short consecutive strokes, splitting up, as it were, his divergence over the
whole length of the figure he is drawing, and so allows the eye, or perhaps one
should rather say the mind, by that faculty it has, to select the complete
figure which it can conceive more easily than express. No one of the artist's
strokes is the true fraction of a circle, but the result is infinitely more
satisfactory than if he had tried to make his pencil follow unswervingly the
curve he wished to trace. Or again, notice how a skillful draughtsman will
patch up by a number of small strokes any imperfect portion of a curve he is
drawing, and we have another like instance of this selective faculty of the eye
or of the mind. Just in the same way is it with memory; our ideas must be carried
on continuously, we cannot afford to remember spaces and blanks. Thus in the
Bible narrative, wherein, as has before been said, certain events of the
world's history are related with distinctness, but where as a rule nothing is
said of the times which intervened between them, we are wont to make very
insufficient allowance for these unmentioned times, and form for ourselves a
rather arbitrary picture of the real course of things, fitting two events close
on to one another which were really separated by long ages. To correct this
view, to enlarge the series of known facts concerning the early history of the
human race, comes in prehistoric inquiry; and again, to correct the picture
we now form, doubtless fresh information will continue to pour in. All this is
no reason why we should pronounce our picture to be untrue, it is only
incomplete: We must be always ready to enlarge it, and to fill in the outlines,
but still we can only remember the facts which we have already acquired, if we
look at them, not as fragments only, but as a complete whole.
In representing,
therefore, in the following chapters the advance of the human race in the
discovery of all those arts and faculties which go to make up civilization as a
continuous progress, it will not be necessary to pause and remind the reader in
every case that these steps of progress which seem to spread themselves out so
clearly before us have been made in an uncertain manner, sometimes rapidly,
sometimes very slowly and painfully, sometimes by immense strides, sometimes
by continual haltings and goings backwards and forwards. On the whole, our
history will be a history of events rather than a strictly chronological one,
just as the periods of geology are not measured by days and years, but by the
mutations through which our solid seeming earth has passed.
First we turn to what
must needs be our earliest inquiry�the search after the oldest traces of man
which have been found upon the earth. It has been said that one of the first
fruits of knowledge is to show us our own ignorance, and certainly in the early
history of the world and of man there is nothing which science points out so
clearly as the vast silent periods whereof until recently we had no idea. It is
difficult for us of the present age to remember how short a time it is since
all our certain knowledge touching the earth on which we live, lay around that
brief period of its existence during which it has come under the notice and the
care of man. When all we knew of Europe, and especially of our own islands,
belonged to the comparatively short time during which they have been known to
history, we had in truth much to wonder at in the political changes they have
undergone, and our imaginations could be busy with the contrast between the
unchanged features of our lands and seas and the ever-varying character of
those who dwelt upon or passed over them. It is interesting to think that on
such a river bank or on such a shore Caesar or Charlemagne have actually stood,
and that perhaps the grass or flowers or shells under their feet looked just
the same as they do now, that the waves beat upon the strand in the same
cadence, or the water flowed by with the same trickling sound. But when we open
the pages of geology, we have unrolled before us a history of the earth itself,
extending over periods compared with which the longest epoch of what is
commonly called history seems scarcely more than a day, and of mutations in the
face of nature so grand and awful that as we reflect upon them, forgetting for
an instant the enormous periods required to bring these changes about, they
sound like the fantastic visions of some seer, telling in allegorical language
the history of the creation and destruction of the world. Of such changes, not
the greatest, but the most interesting to the question we have at present in
hand, were those vicissitudes of climate which followed upon the time when the
formation of the crust of the earth had been practically completed. We learn of
a time when, in�stead of the temperate climate which now favors our country,
these islands, with the whole of the north of Europe, were wrapped in one
impenetrable sheet of ice. The tops of our mountains, as well as of those of
Scandinavia and the north of continental Europe, bear marks of the scraping of
this enormous glacier, which must have risen to a height of two or three
thousand feet. Not a single green thing, therefore, might be seen between our
latitudes and the pole, while the ice-sheet, passing along the floor of the
North Sea, united these islands with Scandinavia and spread far out into the
deep waters of the Atlantic. For thousands of years such a state of things
endured, but at last it slowly passed away. As century followed century the
glacier began to decrease in size. From being colder than that of any explored
portion of our hemisphere, the climate of northern Europe began to amend, until
at last a little land became visible, which was covered first with lichens,
then with thicker moss, and then with grass; then shrubs began to grow, and they
expanded into trees, and the trees into forests, while still the ice-sheet went
on decreasing, until now the glaciers remained only in the hills. Animals
returned from warmer climates to visit our shores. The birds and beasts and
fishes of the land and sea were not much different from those which now inhabit
there; the species were different, but the genera were for the most part the
same. Everything seemed to have been preparing for the coming of man, and it is
about this time that we find the earliest traces of his presence upon earth.
We may try and
imagine what was the appearance of the world, and especially of Europe�for it
is in Europe that most of these earliest traces of our race have as yet been
found, though all tradition and likelihood point out man's first home to have been
in Central Asia�when we suppose that man first appeared upon these western
shores. At this time the continent of Europe stood at a higher level than it
does now. The whole of the North Sea, even between Scotland and Denmark, is
not more than fifty fathoms, or three hundred feet deep, while the Irish Sea is
not more than sixty fathoms; and at this period undoubtedly the British isles,
besides being all joined together, formed part of the mainland, not by being
united to France only, but by the presence of dry land all the way from
Scotland to Denmark, over all that area now called the German Ocean. Our Thames
and our other eastern rivers were then but tributaries of one large stream,
which bore through this continent, and up into the northern seas, their waters
united with those of the Rhine, and perhaps of the Weser and the Elbe. The same
upheaval turned into land a portion of the Atlantic Ocean, extending from Spain
and Africa out as far as the Azores and the Canaries. The north of Africa was
joined on to this continent and to Spain, for the narrow straits of Gibraltar
had not yet been formed; but a great sea stood where we now have the Great
Sahara, and joined the Mediterranean and the Red Sea, while a great
Mediterranean Sea stood in Central Asia, and has left no more than traces in
the Caspian Sea and the Sea of Aral.
We have to look at
our maps to see the effect of these changes in the appearance of Europe; and
there were no doubt other internal changes in the appearances of the countries
themselves. The glaciers were not yet quite gone, and their melting gave rise
to enormous rivers which flowed from every hill. Our little river the Ouse, for
instance, which flows out through Norfolk into the Wash, was then probably many
miles broad. Vast forests grew upon the banks of the rivers, and have left
their traces in our peat formations, and in these forests roamed animals
unknown to us. Of these the most notable was the mammoth (Elephas primigenius, in the
language of the naturalists), a huge, maned elephant, whose skeleton and
gigantic tusks are conspicuous in some of our museums, and who has given his
name to this the earliest age of man's existence: it is called the Mammoth Age
of man. With the mammoth, too, lived other species of animals, which are either
now extinct, or have since been driven from our latitudes; the woolly
rhinoceros, the cave lion, the cave bear, the Lithuanian bison, the urus, the
reindeer, and the musk-ox. It is with the remains of these animals, iu the old beds
of these great rivers, that we find the earliest tools and weapons manufactured
by human hands.
Very simple and rude
are these drift implements, as they are called, from their being found buried
in the sand and shingle which were formed by river drifts. We who are so habituated
to the employment of metal, either in the manufacture or the composition of
every article which meets our eye, can scarcely realize that man lived long
ages on the earth before the metals and minerals, its hidden treasures, were
revealed to him. This pen I write with is of metal, or, were it a quill, it would still have
been shaped by the use of steel; the rags of which this paper is made up have
been first cut by metal knives, then bleached by the mineral chlorine, then
torn on a metal cylinder, then thrown into a vat, which was either itself of
metal, or had been shaped by metal tools, then drawn on a wire-cloth, &c,
and so in everything which is made we trace the paramount influence of man's
discoveries beneath the surface of the ground. But primitive man could profit
by no such inherited knowledge, and had only begun to acquire some powers which
he could transmit to his own descendants. For his tools he need look to the
surface of the earth only; and the hardest substances he could find were
stones. Man's first implements, therefore, were stone implements, and consequently
the earliest epoch of man's life, the epoch during which he was still ignorant
of the use of metals, is called the Stone Age. And it may be as well to say at
once that this age was of very great duration, and may be divided into two
distinct periods�the old stone (Palaeolithic) epoch, which is distinguished by
the fact that the stone implements are never polished, and the new stone
(Neolithic) period, also called the polished-stone age, of which we shall have
to speak later on.
At present we have
got no further than the old stone age implements, and of these the ones which
seem to be the earliest of all are those which are found in the river drifts.
These consist only of stones, generally flints, for had there been implements
of wood or bone, they would not have endured in that position. By the rudeness
and uniformity of their shapes, as contrasted even with the stone implements of
a later age in the world's history, they testify to the simplicity of those who
manufactured them. They have for the most part only two distinctive types; they
are either of a long, pear-shaped make, narrowed almost to a point at the thin
end, and adapted, we may suppose, for boring holes, while the broad end of the
pear was pressed against the palm of the hand; and secondly, of a sort of oval
form, having one side of the oval flat and fit to press against the hand or fit
into a cleft stick, and the other side sharpened to an edge, the whole form being
in fact that of an oval-shaped wedge, and the implement itself used probably
for all sorts of cutting and scraping. A variety of this last implement has two
cutting edges, and being also of rather a tongue-like shape, was called by the
French workmen langue-de-chat. Some
have supposed that stones of this last form were used, as similar ones are used
by the Esquimaux to this day, in cutting holes in the ice for the purpose of
fishing; we must not forget that during a great part at least of the early
stone age the conditions of life were those of arctic countries at the present
time.
We cannot determine
all the uses to which primitive man must have put his rude and ineffective
weapons; we can only wonder that with such he was able to maintain his
existence among the savage beasts by which he was surrounded; and we long to
form to ourselves some picture of the way in which he got the better of their
huge strength, as well as of his dwelling-place, his habits, and his
appearance. Rude as his weapons are, and showing no trace of improvement, it
seems as though man of the drift period must have lived through long ages of
the world's history. These implements are found associated with the remains of
the mammoth and the woolly rhinoceros, animals naturally belonging to the
arctic or semi-arctic climate which succeeded the glacial era; but like
implements are found, associated with the remains of the bones of the lion, the
tiger, and the hippopotamus, all of which, and the last especially, are rarely found
outside the torrid zone. This would imply that the drift implements lasted
through the change from a frigid to a torrid climate, and probably back again
to a cold temperate one. Still the age of the drift implements does not seem to
comprise the whole period of man's life before what is called the
polished-stone age begins. There is a remarkable series of discoveries made in
caves in various parts of Europe, which are of a more interesting character
than the drift remains, and appear to carry us farther down in the history of
man.
These caves are
natural caverns, generally formed in the limestone rocks, and at present the
most remarkable "finds" have been obtained from the caves of
Devonshire, of the Department of the Dordogne in France, from various caves in
Belgium, and from a very remarkable cavern in the Neanderthal, near
Dusseldorf, in Germany; but there is scarcely any country in Europe where some
caves containing human bones and weapons have not been opened. The rudest drift
implements seem older than almost any of those found iu caves; and, on the
whole, the cave-remains seem to give us a picture of man in a more civilized
condition. They show us more of his way of life, and a greater variety in his
implements, which are made, not of stone only, but of wood and bone as well. We
have various worked bone implements�harpoons, with many barbs, whereby, no
doubt, man slew the animals which afforded him. food and clothing. Some
implements of stone and bone which have been found in caves have been called
arrow-heads; but they are in all probability lance-heads, for it seems doubtful
whether these primitive men had made the great discovery of the use of the bow
and arrow. We may imagine that their lance or harpoon was their great weapon;
and a curious and close inquiry has discovered by the marks on some of the
animal bones which are found mixed up with the cave implements, that the sinews
had been cut from these bones, and used, it may be conjectured, as thongs for
the bone harpoons. Other implements of a more domestic character have been
found�bone awls, doubtless for piercing the animals' skins that they might be
sewn together with sinew-thread, and bone knives and needles.
What is still more
interesting than all these, we here find the rudiments of art. Some of the bone
implements, as well as some stones, are engraved, or even rudely sculptured,
generally with the representation of an animal. These drawings are singularly
faithful, and really give us a picture of the animals which were man's contemporaries
upon the earth; so that we have the most positive proof that man lived the contemporary
of animals long since extinct. The cave of La Madeleine, in the Dordogne, for
instance, contained a piece of a mammoth's tusk engraved with an outline of
that animal; and as the mammoth was probably not contemporaneous with man
during the latter part even of the old stone age, this gives an immense
antiquity to the first dawnings of art. How little did the scratcher of this
rough sketch�for it is not equal in skill to drawings which have been found in
other caves�dream of the interest his performance would excite thousands of
years after his death! Not the greatest painter of subsequent times, and
scarcely the greatest sculptor, can hope for so near an approach to immortality
for their works. Had man's bones been only found in juxtaposition with those of
the mammoth and his contemporary animals, this might possibly have been attributed
to chance disturbances of the soil, to the accumulation of river deposits, or
to many other accidental occurrences; or had the mammoth's bone only been found
worked by man, there was nothing positive to show that the animal had not been
long since extinct, and this a chance bone which had come into the hands of a
later inhabitant of the earth, just as it has since come into our hands; but
the actual drawing of this old-world, and as it sometimes almost seems
fabulous, animal, by one who actually saw him in real life, gives a strange
picture of the antiquity of our race, and withal a strange feeling of
fellowship with this stone-age man who drew so much in the same way as a clever
child among us might have drawn today.
It is well worth
while to pause a moment over these cave-drawings. They are of various degrees
of merit, for some are so skillful as to excite the admiration of artists and
the astonishment of archaeologists; and it is a curious fact that during ages
which succeeded those of the cave-dwellers, all through to the polished stone
period and the age of bronze� of which we shall have to speak anon�no such
ambitious imitative works of art seem to have been attempted. The workers of
these later times seem to have confined them�selves in their decorations to
certain arrangements of points and lines. The love of imitation is doubtless
one of the rudimentary feelings in the human mind; as we may see by watching
children. But, rudimentary as it is, it springs from the same root as the
highest promptings of the intellect�that is to say, from the wish to create�to fashion something actually
ourselves. This is sufficient to explain the origin of these carvings; yet we
need not suppose that when the art of making them was once known they were used
merely for amusement. Long afterwards we find such drawings and representations
looked upon as having some qualities of the things they represent; as, for
instance, where in a Saxon cavern at Masshow, in the Orkney islands, we find
the drawing of a dragon, which had been supposed to watch over the treasures
concealed within. Savages in the present day often think that part of them is
actually taken away when a drawing of them is made, and exactly a similar
feeling gave rise to the superstition so prevalent in the middle ages, that
witches and magicians used to make a figure in wax to imitate the one on whom
they wished to wreak their vengeance, and that all the pains inflicted upon
this waxen antitype were reproduced in the body of the victim. On such
confusion of ideas do all idolatries rest; so may we not, without too bold a
flight, imagine that some superstitious notions, touching the efficacy of these
drawings, was a spur to the industry of our first forerunners on the earth, and
contributed to their wonderfully acquired skill in their art? May they not
have thought that their representations gave them some power over the animals
they represented: that the lance-head carved with a mammoth would be efficient
against the mammoth's hide; that the harpoon containing the representation of
a deer or a fish was the weapon best adapted for transfixing either? However
this may be, we cannot deny the interest which attaches to the first dawnings
of art in the world. Nor is this interest confined altogether to its aesthetic
side�the mere beauty and value of art itself�great though this be. Not only does
drawing share that mysterious power of imparting intense pleasure which
belongs to every form of art, but it was likewise, after human speech, the
first discovered means of conveying an idea from one man to another. As we
shall come to see in a later chapter, the invention of drawing bore with it the
seeds of the invention of writing, the greatest step forward, in material
things at any rate, that man has ever made.
There is one other
fact to mention, and then the information which our cave discoveries can give
us concerning the life of man in those days is pretty nearly exhausted. Traces
of fires have been discovered in several caves, so that there can be no doubt
that man had made this important discovery also. It seems to us impossible to
imagine a time when men could have lived upon the earth without this all-useful
element, when they must have devoured their food uncooked, and only sheltered
themselves from the cold by the thickness of their clothing, or at night by
huddling together in close underground houses. We have certainly no proof that
man's existence was ever of such a sort, as this; but yet it is clear that the
art of making fires is one not discoverable at first sight. How long man took
to find out that method of ignition by friction of two sticks�the method
employed in different forms by all the less cultivated nations spread over the
globe, and one which we may therefore fairly take to be the most primitive and
natural�we shall never know. We have only the negative evidence that he had discovered
it at that primaeval time when he began to leave his remains within the caves.
Thus have we
completed the catalogue of facts upon which we may build up for ourselves some
representation of the life of man in the earliest ages of his existence upon
earth. It must be confessed that they are meagre enough. We should like some
further information which would help us to picture the man himself, his size,
his appearance, what race he most resembled of any of those which now inhabit
our globe. Unfortunately we have little that can assist us here. Human remains
have been found; on one or two occasions, a skeleton in tolerably complete
preservation, but not yet in sufficient numbers to allow us to draw any certain
conclusions, or even to hazard any very probable conjecture.
Among these
discoveries of human skeletons, none excited more interest at the time it was
made than the Neanderthal skeleton, so-called from the place in which it was
found. The discovery was made in 1857 by Dr. Fuhlrott of Elberfeld; and when
the skull and other parts of the skeleton were exhibited at a scientific
meeting at Bonn, in the same year, doubts were expressed as to the human
character of the remains. These doubts, which were soon dissipated, arose from
the very low type of the head, which was pronounced by many to be the most
ape-like skull that they had ever seen. The bones them�selves indicated a
person of much the same stature as a European of the present day, but with such
an unusual thickness in some of them as betokened a being of very extraordinary
strength. This discovery, had it been supported by others, might have seemed to
indicate a race of men of a type in every way inferior even to the savage
nations of our present globe. But it has not been so supported. On the contrary,
another skull found at Engis, near Liege, not more than seventy miles from the
cave of the Neanderthal, was proved after careful measurements not to differ
materially from the skulls of individuals of the European race; a fact which
prevents us from making any assertions respecting the primitive character in
race or physical conformation of these cave-dwellers. In fact, in a very
careful and elaborate paper upon the Engis and Neanderthal skulls, Professor
Huxley places an average skull of a modern native of Australia about half-way
between those of the Neanderthal and Engis caves, but he also says that after
going through a large collection of Australian skulls, he found it
possible to select from among these crania two (connected by all sorts of intermediate
gradations), the one of which should very nearly resemble the Engis skull,
while the other should somewhat less closely approximate to the Neanderthal
skull in form, size, and proportions. And yet as regards blood, customs,
or language, the natives of Southern and Western Australia are probably as pure
as any race of savages in existence. This shows us how difficult would be any
reasoning founded upon the insufficient data we possess. In fact, it would no
doubt be possible to find in Europe among persons of abnormal underdevelopment,
such as idiots, skulls of a formation which would match that of the
Neanderthal.
This class of
evidence is therefore merely negative. We certainly cannot pronounce that man
of the old stone age was of a lower type than low types of savages of the
present day; we cannot even say he was so undeveloped as the Lapps of modern
Europe; but in this negative evidence there is a certain amount of
satisfaction. We might be not unwilling to place on the level of the Esquimaux
or the Lapp the fashioners of the rudest of the stone implements, but the artists of the caves we may well
imagine to have attained a, higher development. And there is nothing at all
unreasonable or opposed to our experience of nature in supposing a race of
human beings to have flourished in Europe in these old times, to have been
possessed of a certain amount of civilization, but not to have advanced from
that towards any very great improvement before they were at last extinguished
by some other race with greater faculty of progress. As we shall come to see
later on, there is some reason for connecting man of the later stone age as
regards race with the Esquimaux or Lapp of today. Yet even if this be
admitted, we must look upon the latter rather as the dregs of the races they
represent. It is not always the best part of any particular race, whether of
men, of animals, or of plants, which lives the longest. Species which were once
flourishing are often only represented by stunted and inferior descendants, just
as the animals of the lizard class had their time of greatest development long
before the coming of man upon the earth. So we may imagine man spreading out at
various times from his first home in Central Asia. The earlier races to leave
this nursing-place did not, we may suppose, contain sufficient force to carry
them beyond a low level of culture, and gradually got pushed on one side by
more energetic people who came like a second wave from the com�mon source.
When, in the history of the world, we come to speak of races of whom we know
more, we shall see strong reasons to believe that this was the rule followed;
nay, it is even followed at the present day where European races are spreading
all over the world, and gradually absorbing or extinguishing inferior members
of the human family. It therefore seems, in our present state of ignorance,
most reasonable to look
upon Paleolithic man merely as we find him, without speculating whether he
gradually advanced to the use of better stone weapons, and at last to metals.
Taking then this race
as we find it, without speculating upon its immediate origin or future, we may
endeavor to gather some notion of man's way of life in these primitive times.
It was of the simplest. We may well suppose, for some proofs to the contrary
would otherwise most likely have been discovered, that his life was that of the
hunter, the earliest phase of human society, and that he had not yet learned to
till the ground, or keep domestic animals for his use. No bones of animals like
the sheep or dog are found, and therefore it seems probable he had not entered
upon the higher or shepherd phase of society. He had probably no fixed home, no
idea of national life, scarcely of any obligations beyond the circle of his
own family, in that larger sense in which the word "family" is
generally understood by savages. Some sort of family or tribe no doubt held
together, were it only for the sake of protecting themselves against the
attacks of their neighbors. For the rest, their time was spent, as the time of
other savages is spent, in fighting and hunting out of doors; within in
preserving their food and their skins, in elaborately manufacturing their implements
of stone and bone. In the inclement seasons they were crowded together in their
caves, perhaps for months together, as the Esquimaux are in winter, almost
without moving. As appears from the remains in the caves, they were in the
habit at such times of throwing the old bones and the offal of their food into
any corner (the Esquimaux do so to this day), without taking the smallest
trouble to obviate the unpleasant effects produced by the decay of all this
animal matter in an atmosphere naturally close. Through the long winter nights
they found time to perfect their skill in those wonderful bone carvings, and to
lay up a store of weapons which they afterwards� anticipating the rise of
commerce� exchanged with the inhabitants of some other cave for their peculiar manufacture; for in
one of the caves of the Dordogne we find the remains of what must have been a
regular manufactory of one sort of flint-knife or arrow�head, almost to the
exclusion of any other of the ordinary weapons, while another cave seems to
have been devoted as exclusively to the production of implements of bone.
Some people have
thought that they discovered in the traces of fires which had been sometimes
lighted before caves in which were found human skeletons, the indications of
sepulchral rites, and that these caves were used as burial-places. But these
suppositions are too vague and uncertain to be relied upon. On this interesting
subject of sepulchral rites we must forbear to say anything until we come to
speak of the second stone age. Our knowledge of the early stone-people must
close with the slight picture we have been able to form of their life; of their
death, of their rites of the dead, and the ideas concerning a future state
which these might indicate, we cannot speak.
This, then, is all we
know of man of the first stone age, and it is not probable that our knowledge will
ever be greatly increased. New finds of these stone implements are being made
almost every day, not in Europe only, though at present chiefly there, but in
many other parts of the globe. But the new discoveries closely resemble the
old, the same sort of implements recur again and again, and we only learn bv
them over how great a part of the globe this stage in our civilization
extended. Further information of this kind may change some of our theories
concerning the duration or the origin of this civilization, but it will not add
much to our knowledge of its nature. Yet it cannot be denied that the thought
of man's existence only, though we know little more than this, a contemporary
of the mammoth at the time which immediately succeeded the glacial period, or
perhaps we have at any rate something which may occupy our imaginations, and prevent them, as they
otherwise would do, as of old men's minds did, from leaping almost at a bound
from the creation to the flood, and from the flood to the time of Abraham.
CHAPTER II.
the second stone age.
Between the earlier and the
later stone age, between man of the drift period and man of the neolithic era,
occurs a vast blank which we cannot fill in. We hid adieu to the primitive
inhabitants of our earth while they are still the contemporaries of the mammoth
and woolly rhinoceros, or of the cave lion and the cave bear, and while the
very surface of the earth wears a different aspect from what it now wears. With
a changed condition of things, with a race of animals which differed not
essentially from those known to us, and with a settled conformation of our
lands and seas not again to he departed from, comes before us the second race
of man�man of the polished-stone age. We cannot account for the sudden break;
or, what is in truth the same thing, many different suggestions to account for
it have been made. Some have supposed that the palaeolithic men lived at a time
anterior to the last glacial era, for there were many glacial periods in
Europe, and were either exterminated altogether or driven thence to more
southern countries by the change in climate. Others have imagined that a new
and more cultivated race migrated into these countries, and at once introduced
the improved weapons of the later stone age; and lastly, others have looked
upon the first stone age as having existed before the deluge, and hold that the
second race of man, the descendants of Noah, began at once with a higher sort
of civilization. Two of these four theories, it will be seen, must suppose that
man somewhere went through the stages of improvement necessary to the
introduction of the newer sort of weapons, and they
therefore take it for granted that the graduated series of stone implements,
indicating a gradual progress from the old time to the newer, though they have
not yet been found, are to be discovered somewhere. The first and last theories
would seem to be more independent of this supposition, and therefore, as far as
our knowledge yet goes, to be more in accordance with the facts which we
possess. It is, however, by no means safe to affirm that the graduated series
of implements required to support the other suppositions will never be found.
Be this as it may,
with the second era begins the real continuous history of our race. However scanty
the marks of his tracks, we may feel sure that from this time forward man
passed on one unbroken journey of development and change through the forgotten
eras of the world's life down to the dawn of history. And taking his rudest
condition to be the most primitive, he first appears before us a fisher
depending for his chief nourishment upon the shell-fish of the coast. In the
north of Europe, that is to say, upon the shores of the Baltic, are found
numbers of mounds, some five or ten feet high, and in length as much,
sometimes, as a thousand feet, by one or two hundred in breadth. The mounds
consist for the most part of myriads of cast-away shells of oysters, mussels,
cockles, and other shell-fish; mixed up with these are many bones of birds and
quadrupeds, showing that these also served for food to the primitive dwellers
by the shell mounds. They are called in the present day kjokken-moddings,
kitchen-middens. They are, in truth, the refuse heaps of the earliest kitchens
which have smoked in these northern regions; for they are the remains of some
of the earliest among the polished-stone age inhabitants of Europe.
The raisers of the
Danish kitchen-middens were, we may judge, preeminently fishers; and not
fishers of that adventurous kind who seek their treasure in the depths of the
ocean. They lived chiefly upon those smaller fish and shell-fish which could be
caught without much difficulty or danger. But yet not only on these; for the
bones of some deep-sea fish have also been discovered, whence we know that the
mound-raisers were possessed of one very important discovery, in the germ at
least�the art of navigation. Among remains believed to be contemporary with
the shell-mounds are found rude canoes not built of planks like boats, but
merely hollowed out of the trunks of trees; sometimes they are quite straight
fore and aft, just as the trunk was when it was cut, some�times a little beveled
from below, like the stern of a boat of the present day; but we believe they
are never found rounded or pointed at the prow. That heart with oak and
bronze thrice bound, the man who first ventured to sea in the first
vessel, had therefore lived before this time. Whoever he was, we cannot, if we
think of it, refuse to endorse the praise bestowed upon him by the poet; it
required immense courage to venture out to sea on such a strange make-shift as
the first canoe must have been. Perhaps the earliest experiment was an
involuntary one, made by someone who was washed away upon a large log or felled
tree. Then arose the notion of venturing again a little way, then of hollowing
a seat in the middle of the trunk, until the primitive canoes, such as we find,
came into existence.
In these imperfect
vessels men gradually ventured further and further into the ocean; and, judging
of the extent of their voyages by the deep-sea remains, we may be certain that
their bravery was fatal to many. This is in all probability the history of the
discovery or rediscovery of the art of navigation among savage people
generally; in all cases does the canoe precede the regular boat, and though
Noah would seem to have possessed the art of shipbuilding in much greater
perfection, his art would most probably have died with him if, as was probably
the case, his descendants were long settled far inland. For it is a fact that
people rarely begin attempts at shipbuilding before they come to live near the
sea. As long as they can range freely on land, their rivers do not tempt them
to any dangerous experiments. But the vast plain of the sea is too important,
and makes too great an impression on their imagination for its charm to be long
withstood. Sooner or later, with much risk of life, men are sure to try and
explore its solitudes, and navigation takes its rise. This art of seafaring,
then, is amongst the most noticeable of the belongings of the fishermen of the
shell-mounds. Considering that they had none but rude stone implements, the
felling and hollowing of the trees must have been an affair of no small labor,
and very likely occupied a great deal of their time when they were not actually
seeking their food, even though the agency of fire supplemented the ineffectual
blow of the stone weapons. They must have used nets for their sea-fishing, made
probably of twisted bark or grass. And they were hunters as well as fishers,
for the remains of various animals have been discovered on the shell-mounds.
From these we see that the age of the post-glacial animals had by this time
quite passed away; no mammoth, woolly rhinoceros, or cave lion or bear is found:
even the rein�deer, which in palaeolithic days must have ranged over France and
Switzerland, has disappeared.
The fact is, the
climate is now much more temperate and uniform than in the first stone age.
Then the reindeer and the chamois, animals which belong naturally to regions of
ice and snow, freely traversed, in winter at least, the valleys or the plains
far towards the south of Europe. But as the climate changed, the first
was driven to the extreme north of Europe, and the second to the higher mountain
peaks. The only extinct species belonging to the shell-mounds is the wild bull (bos primigemus), which however
survived in Europe until quite historical times. He appears in great numbers,
as does the seal, now very rare, and the beaver, which is extinct in Denmark.
No remains of any domesticated animal are found, but the existence of tame dogs
is guessed at from the fact that the bones bear traces of the gnawing of canine
teeth, and from the absence of bones of young birds and of the softer bones of
animals generally. For it has been shown experimentally that just those
portions are absent from these skeletons which will be devoured when birds or
animals of the same species are given to dogs at this day. Dogs, therefore,
were domesticated by the stone-age men; so here again we can see the beginning
of a step in civilization which has been of incalculable benefit to man, the
taming of animals for his use. The ox, the sheep, the goat, were as yet
unknown; man was still in the hunter's condition, and had not advanced to the
shepherd state, only training for his use the dog, to assist him in pursuit of
the wild animals who supplied part of his food. He was, too, utterly devoid of
all agricultural knowledge. It is an established fact that men become hunters
before they become shepherds, and shepherds before they advance to the state of
tillers of the soil. Probably the domestication of the dog marks a sort of
transition state between the hunter and the shepherd. When that experiment has
been tried the notion must sooner or later spring up of training other animals,
and keeping them for use or food. With regard to the dogs themselves, it is a
curious fact that those of the stone age are smaller than those of the bronze
period, while the dogs of the bronze age are again smaller than those of the
age of iron. This is an illustration of the well-known fact that domestication
increases the size and improves the character of animals as training does that
of plants.
There is one other
negative fact which we gather from the bones of these refuse-heaps�no human
bones are mingled with them, so that we may conclude these men were not
cannibals. In fact, cannibalism is an extraordinary perversion of human nature,
arising it is difficult to say exactly how, and only showing itself among
particular people and under, peculiar conditions. There is no doubt that, among
a very large proportion of the savage nations which at present inhabit our
globe, cannibalism is practised, and of this fact many explanations have been
offered; but they are generally far�fetched and unsatisfactory; and it is
certainly not within our scope to discuss them here. How little natural
cannibalism is even to the most savage men is proved by the fact that man is
scarcely ever, except under urgent necessity, found to feed upon the flesh of
carnivorous or flesh-eating animals, and this alone, besides every instinct of
our nature, would be sufficient to prevent him from eating his fellow-men.
We have many proofs
of the great antiquity of the shell-mounds. Their position gives one. While
most of them are confined to the immediate neighborhood of the sea-shore, some
few are found at a distance of several miles inland. These exceptions may
always be referred to the presence of a stream which has gradually deposited its
mud at the place where it emptied itself into the sea, or to some other cause
fitted for the extension of the coast line; so that these miles of new coast
have come into existence after the shell-mounds were raised. On the other hand,
there are no mounds upon those parts of the coast which border on the Western
Ocean. But it is just here that, owing to a gradual depression of the land at
the rate of two or three inches in a century the waves are gradually eating
away the shore. This is what happens on every sea-coast. Almost all over the
world there is a small but constant movement of the solid crust of the earth,
which is, in fact, only a crust over the molten mass within. Sometimes, and in
some places, the imprisoned mass makes itself felt, in violent upheavals, in
sudden cracks of the inclosing surface, which we call earthquakes and
volcanoes; but oftener its effect is slight and almost unnoticed. This
interchange of state between the kingdoms of the land and of the ocean helps to
show us the time which has passed between the making of the kitchen-middens and
our own days. There seems little doubt that all along the coast of the North
Sea, as well as on that of the Baltic, these mounds once stood; but by the
gradual undermining of the cliffs the former have all been swept way, while the
latter have, as it appears, been moved a little inland; and we have seen that
when there was another cause present to form land between the kitchen-middens
and the sea, the distance has often been increased to several miles.
There is another and
still stronger proof of the antiquity of the shell-mounds. If we examine the
shells themselves, we find that they all belong to still living species, and
they are all exactly similar to such as might be found in the ocean at the present
day. But it happens that this is not now the case with the shells of the same
fish belonging to the Baltic Sea. For the waters of this sea are brackish, and
not salt; so that the shell-fish which dwell in it do not attain half their
natural size. The oyster, too, will not live at all in the Baltic, except near
its entrance, where, whenever the wind blows from the north-west, a strong
current of salt ocean water is poured in. Yet the oyster-shells are especially
abundant in the kitchen-middens. From all this we gather that, at the time of
the making of these mounds, there must have been free communication between the
ocean and the Baltic Sea. In all probability, in fact, there were a number of
such passages through the peninsula of Jutland, which was consequently at that
time an archipelago.
As ages passed on the
descendants of these solitary fisher�men spread themselves over Europe, and
improving in their way of life and mastery over mechanical arts, found themselves
no longer constrained to trust for their livelihood to the spoils of the
sea-shallows. They made lances and axes (headed with stone), and perfected the
use of the bow and arrow until they became masters of the game of the forest.
And then, after a while, man grew out of this hunter stage and domesticated
other animals besides the dog: oxen, pigs, and geese. No longer occupied solely
by the search for his daily food he raised mighty tombs�huge mounds of earth
inclosing a narrow grave�to the departed great men of his race; and he reared
up those enormous masses of stone called cromlechs or dolmens�such as we see at
Stonehenge�as
altars to his gods.
The great tombs of
earth�which have their fellows not in Europe only, but over the greater part of
the world�are the special and characteristic features of the stone age. The
raisers of the kitchen-middens may have preceded the men who built the tombs;
for their mode of life was as we should say the most primitive: but they were
confined to a corner of Europe. The tomb-builders formed one of a mighty
brotherhood of men linked together by the characteristics of a common
civilization. These sepulchres called in England tumuli or barrows are hills of
earth from one to as much as four hundred feet long, by a breadth and height of
from thirty to fifty feet. They are either chambered or unchambered; that is,
they are either raised over a small vault made of stone (with perhaps a sort of
vestibule or entrance chamber), or else a mere hollow has been excavated within
the mound. In these recesses repose the bodies of the dead, some great
chieftain or hero�the father of his people, who came to be regarded after his
death with almost the veneration of a god. Beside the dead were placed various
implements and utensils, left there to do him honor or service, to assist him
upon the journey to that undiscovered country whither he was bound; the best of
sharpened knives or spear-heads, some jars of their rude pottery, once filled
with food and drink, porridge, rough cakes and beer. And may be a
wife or two, and some captives of the last battle were sacrificed to his shade,
that he might not go quite unattended into that other world. The
last ceremony was not always, but it must have been often, enacted. Out of
thirty-two stone age barrows excavated in Wiltshire, seventeen contained only
one skeleton, and the rest various numbers, from two to an indefinite number;
and, in one case at least, all the skulls save one have been found cleft as by a stone hatchet.
At the door of the
mound or in an entrance chamber many bones have been discovered, the traces of
a funeral feast, the wake or watch kept on the evening of the burial. Likely
enough if the chief were almost deified after death, the funeral feast would
become periodical. It would be considered canny and of good omen that the
elders of the tribe should meet there at times in solemn conclave, on the eve
of a warlike expedition or whenever the watchful care of the dead hero might
avail his descendants. From the remains of these feasts, and from the relics of
the tombs, we have the means of forming some idea of man's acquirements at this
time. His implements are improvements upon those of the stone age; in all
respects, that is, save in this one, that he had now no barbed weapons; whereas
we remember that in the caves barbed harpoons are frequently met with. Nor,
again, had he the artistic talent of the cave-dwellers: no traces of New
Stone-age drawings have come to light. For the rest, his implements and weapons
may be divided into a few distinctive classes:�
1. Hammers, hatchets,
tomahawks, or chisels, an instrument made of a heavy piece of stone brought to
a sharp cutting edge at one end, and at the other rounded or flat, so as to
serve the double purpose of a hammer and an axe. When these are of an elongated
form they are called celts or chisels. 2. Arrow and spear-heads, which differ
in size but not much in form, both being long and narrow in shape, often
closely resembling the leaf of the laurel or the bay, sometimes of a diamond
shape, but more often having the lateral corners nearest to the end which
fitted into the shaft. Viewed edgeways, they also appear to taper towards
either end, for while one point was designed to pierce the victim, the other
was fitted into a cleft handle, and bound into it with cord or sinew.
Implements have been discovered still fitted into their handles. 3. The stone knives, which have
generally two cutting edges, and when this is the case do not greatly differ
from the spear-heads, though they are commonly less pointed than the latter. A few
hone implements have been found in the tumuli, a pin, a chisel, and a knife or
so; but they are very rare, they are never carved, and have not one-quarter of
the interest which belongs to the bone implements of the caves. Finally, we
must not omit to say that in Anhalt, in Germany, a large stone has been found
which seems to have served the purpose of a plough. For there can be little
doubt that if some of the tumuli belong to a time before the use of
domesticated animals�save the dog�they last down to a time when man not only
had tame oxen, pigs, goats, and geese, but also sowed and planted,
and lived the life of an agricultural race; nor will it be said that such an
advance was extraordinary when we say that the minimum duration of the age of
polished stone was probably two thousand years.
Other relics from the
mounds, not less interesting than the weapons, are their vessels of pottery;
for here we see the earliest traces of another art. This pottery is of a black
color, curiously mixed with powdered shells, perhaps to strengthen the clay,
perhaps for ornament. Its pottery belongs to the latter portion of this age of
stone, a period distinguished not only by the use of domestic animals, but also
by the growth of cereals. We have said that bones of cattle, swine, and in one
case of a goose, have been found among the refuse of the funeral feasts. But
man was still a hunter, as he is to this day, though he had found other means
of support besides the wild game; and we also find the bones of the red-deer and
the wild bull, both of which supplied him with food. Wolves' teeth too have
been found pierced, so as to be strung into a necklace; for personal adornment
formed, in those days as now, part of the interest of life. Jet beads have been
discovered in large numbers, and even some of amber, which seems to have been
brought from the Baltic to these countries and as far south as Switzerland; and
it is known that during the last portion of what is, nevertheless, still the
stone period, the most precious metal of all, gold, was used for ornament. Gold
is the one metal which is frequently found on the surface of the ground, and
therefore it was naturally the first to come under the eye of man.
Their religion
probably consisted in part of the worship of the dead, so that the very tombs
themselves, and not the cromlechs only, were a sort of temples. And yet they
had the deepest dread of the reappearance of the departed upon earth�of his
ghost. To prevent his walking they adopted a strange practical form
of exorcism. They strewed the ground at the grave's mouth with sharp stones or
broken pieces of pottery, as though a ghost could have his feet cut, and by
fear of that be kept from returning to his old haunts. For ages and ages after
the days of the mound-builders the same custom lived on of which we here see
the rise. The same ceremony�turned now to an unmeaning rite�was used for the
graves of those, such as murderers or suicides, who might be expected to sleep
uneasily in their narrow house. This is the custom which is referred to in the
speech of the priest to Laertes. Ophelia had died under such suspicion of
suicide, that it was a stretch of their rule, he says, to grant her Christian
burial.
"And but the great command o'ersways our order,
She should in ground unsanctified have lodged
To the last trumpet: for charitable prayers,
Shards, flints and pebbles, should be thrown on her."
The body of him for
whom the mound was built was not buried in the centre, but at one end, and that
commonly the east, for in most cases the barrows lie east and west. It is never
stretched out flat, but lies or sits in a crouched attitude, the head brought
down upon the breast, and the knees raised up to meet the chin. So that the
dead man was left facing towards the west�the going down of the sun. There
cannot but be some significance in this. The daily death of the sun has, in all
ages and to all people, spoken of man's own death, his western course has
seemed to tell of that last journey upon which all are bent. So that the resting
place of the soul is nearly always imagined to lie westward in the home of the
setting sun. For the rest, there seems little doubt
that the barrows represent nothing else�though upon a large scale�than the
dwelling home of the time, and that the greater part of their funeral rites are
very literal and unsymbolical. The Esquimaux and Lapps of one day dwell in huts
no more commodious than the small chambers of the barrows, and exceedingly like
them in shape; only they keep them warm by heaping up over them not earth but
snow. In these they sit squatting in an attitude, not unlike that of the
skeleton of the tumuli. Of the human remains the skulls are small and round,
and have a prominent ridge over the sockets of the eyes, showing that the
ancient race was of small stature with round heads and overhanging eyebrows: in
short, they bore a considerable resemblance to the modern Laplanders,
We are still,
however, left in darkness about that part of the stone age thought which has
left the grandest traces, and of which we should so much have wished to be
informed; I mean the religion. Besides the tumuli we have those enormous piles
of stone called cromlechs, or dolmens, and sometimes miscalled Druid Circles�such is the
well-known Stonehenge; these were their temples or sacred places. Each
arrangement is generally a simple archway, made by placing one enormous block
upon two others; and these arches are sometimes arranged in circles, as at
Stonehenge, sometimes in long colonnades, as at Carnac in Brittany. Lesser dolmens
have been found in most European countries; and there can be little doubt that
they possessed a religious character. As a rule, the grave-mounds are built
upon elevations com�manding a considerable prospect, and it is rare to find two
within sight. Yet over Salisbury Plain, and the part about Stonehenge, they are
much more numerous, as many as a hundred and fifty having been discovered in
this neighborhood, as though it were a desired privilege to be buried within
such hallowed ground. Of the worship which these stone altars commemorate we
know absolutely nothing. There seems to be no reasonable doubt that they belong
to the period we are describing. The name Druid Circles, which has been
sometimes given them, is an absurd anachronism, for, as we shall have occasion
to see later on, the ancestors of the Kelts (or Celts), to whom the Druidical
religion belonged, were at this time still living on the banks of the Oxus in
Central Asia. Thus, though we must continue to wonder how these people could
ever have raised such enormous stones as altars of their religion, the nature
of that religion itself is hidden from us.
The relics of the
tombs are the truest representatives of the stone age, for these tombs
show their summits in every land, and the characteristic features of the
remains found in them are the same in each. They have arisen during the
greatest extension of the stone age races, before any other people had come to
dispute their territory, and express their fullest development, as the
shell-mounds do their germ. We now pass to another series of stone age remains
which must have been contemporary with their latter years, and have been
gradually absorbed into the age of bronze. These remains come from the
lake-dwellings. But let it not be supposed that these lake-dwellings extended
over a short period. A variety of separate pieces of evidence enforce upon us
the conclusion that the stone age in Europe endured for at least two thousand
years. Even the latter portion of that epoch will allow a cycle vast enough for
the lives of the lake-dwellers; for the dwellings did not come to an end at the
end of the age of stone, they only began in it. They were seen by Roman eyes
almost as late as the beginning of our own era.
For at least two
thousand years, then, we may say, the men who lived in the country of the Swiss
lakes, and those of Northern Italy, adopted the apparently inexplicable custom
of making their dwellings, not upon the solid ground, but upon platforms
constructed with infinite trouble above the waters of the lake. And the way
they set about it was in this wise: Having chosen their spot�if attainable, a
sunny shore protected as much as possible from storms, and having a lake-bottom
of a soft and sandy nature�they proceeded to drive in piles, composed of
tree-stems taken from the neighboring forests, from four to eight inches in breadth.
These piles had to be felled, and afterwards sharpened, either by fire or a
stone axe, then driven in from a raft by the use of ponderous stone mallets;
and when we have said that in one instance the number of piles of a lake
village has been estimated at from 40,000 to 50,000, the enormous labor of the
process will be apparent. This task finished, the piles were levelled at a
certain height above the water, and a platform of boards was fastened on with
pegs. On the platform were erected huts, probably square or oblong iu shape,
not more than twenty feet or so in length, adapted however for the use of a
single family, and generally furnished, it would appear, with a hearth-stone
and a corn-crusher apiece. The huts were made of wattle-work, coated on both
sides with clay. Stalls were provided for the cattle, and a bridge of from only
ten or twelve to as much as a hundred yards in length led back to the mainland.
Over this the cattle must have been driven every day, at least in summer, to
pasture on the bank; and no doubt the village community separated for the
various occupations of fishing, for hunting, for agriculture, and for tending
the cattle. As may be imagined, these wooden villages were in peculiar danger
from fire, and a very large number have suffered destruction in this way, a
circumstance fortunate for modern science, for many things which had been
partially burnt before falling into the lake have, by the coating of charcoal
formed round them, been made impervious to the corroding influence of the
water. Thus we have preserved the very grain itself, and their loaves or cakes
of crushed but not ground meal. The grains are of various kinds of wheat and
barley, oats, and millet.
It may be wondered
for what object the enormous trouble of erecting these lake-dwellings could
have been undertaken; and the only answer which can be given is, that it was to
protect their inhabitants from their enemies. Whether each village formed a
separate tribe and made war upon its neigh�bors, or whether the lake-dwellers
were a peaceful race fleeing from more savage people of the mainland, is
uncertain. There is nothing which leads us to suppose they were of a warlike
character, and as far as the arts of peace go they had advanced considerably
upon the men of the tumuli. More especially do the woven cloths, sometimes
worked with simple but not inartistic patterns, excite our admiration.
Ornaments of amber are frequent, and amber must have been brought from the
Baltic; while in one settlement, believed to be of the stone age, the presence
of a glass bead would seem to imply a commerce with Egypt, the only country in
which the traces of glass manufacture at this remote period have been found.
It is believed by good authorities, that the stone age in Europe came to an end
about two thousand years before Christ, or at a time nearly that of Abraham,
and its shortest duration as we saw must also be considered to be two thousand
years.
These men of the
lakes stand in no degree behind the mound-builders for the material elements of
civilization. Nay, they are in some respects before them. Their life seems to
have been more confined and simple than that which was going on in other parts
of Europe. Its very peacefulness and simplicity gave men the opportunity for
perfecting some of their arts. Thus their agriculture was more careful and more
extended than that of the men of the tumuli. Their cattle would appear to have
been numerous; all were stall-fed upon the island home, or if in the morning
driven out to pasture over the long bridge to the mainland, they were brought
home again at night. To agriculture had been added the special art of
gardening, for these men cultivated fruit-trees; and they spun hemp and flax,
and even constructed�it is believed �some sort of loom for weaving cloth. Yet
for all that, if in these respects they were superior to the men of the tumuli,
their life was probably more petty and narrow than the others. There must have
been some grandeur in the ideas of men who could have built such enormous tombs
and raise those wondrous piles of altar-stones. If the first were made in honor
of their chiefs, the existence of such chiefs implies their power of expanding
into a wide social life; so too the immense labor which the raising of the
cromlechs demanded argues strong if not the most elevated religious ideas. And
it has been often and truly remarked that these two elements of progress,
social and religious life, are always intimately associated. It is in the
common worship more than in the common language that we find the beginning of
nationalities. It was so in Greece. The city life grew up around the temple of
a particular tutelary deity, and the associations of cities arose from their
association in the worship at some common shrine. The common nationality of the
Hellenes was kept alive more than anything in the quadrennial games in honor of
the Olympian Zeus, just as the special citizenship of Athens found expression
in the peculiar worship of the virgin goddess Athene. So we may well argue from
the great stone remains, that man had even then attained some progress in civil
government. They show us the extended conditions of tribal government: but
the lake-dwellers only give us a picture of the simplest and narrowest form of
the village community. It is with them a complete condition of social
equality; there is no appearance of any grade of rank; no hut on these islands
is found the larger or better supplied or more cared for than the rest. A
condition of things not unlike that which we find in Switzerland at the present
day; one favorable to happiness and contentment, to improvement in the simpler
arts, but not to wide views of life, or to any great or general progress.
From our various
sources of knowledge, then, we gain a slight but not uninteresting picture of
man's life in the New Stone Age, and of his slow progress along the road
towards civilization. We begin with the hunters and fishers of the
shell-mounds, a race of men who may be compared almost exactly with the Lapps
and Esquimaux of the present day� men without any organization or policy, with
no rudiment of art save that of navigation, and almost without an object in
life except of supporting the immediate wants of existence. Not indeed that we
need suppose them, any more than the Esquimaux or Lapps, without either a
religion or such germs of a literature as consist in traditional tales, passed
on from father to son. Such seeds of moral and intellectual life are to be found
among the rudest savages.
And as time passes on
they improve, passing from the hunter state to that of the pastoral, and from the pastoral to the agricultural; with all the other growths, arts,
and religious and social life, which have been pointed out and which two
thousand years or so might well produce.
Then came the
discovery of metal; and what is called the Bronze Age�the age before iron was
found�supervened upon the age of stone. In some countries the discovery was
natural, and one age followed upon the other in gradual sequence. But in Europe
it was not so. The men of the bronze age were a new race sallying out of the
East to dispossess the older inhabitants, and if in some places the bronze men
and the stone men seem to have gone on for a time side by side, the general
character of the change is that of a sudden break. Therefore we do not now
proceed to speak of the characteristic civilization of the bronze age. As will
be seen hereafter, the bringers of the new weapons belonged to a race concerning
whom we have much ampler means of information than is possessed for the first
inhabitants of these lands; and we are spared the necessity of drawing all our
knowledge from a scrutiny of their arms or tombs. But before we can satisfactorily
show who were the successors of the stone-age men in Europe, and whence they
came, we must turn aside towards another inquiry, viz., into the origin of
language.
CHAPTER III.
THE GROWTH OF LANGUAGE.
We have looked at man fashioning the first implements and weapons and
houses which were ever made; we now turn aside and ask what were the first of
those immaterial instruments, those “aeriform, mystic” legacies which were
handed down and gradually improved from the time of the earliest inhabitants of
our globe? Foremost among these, long anterior to the “metallurgy and other
manufacturing skill”, comes language.
With us, to whom thought and speech are so bound together as to be almost
inseparable, the idea that language is an instrument which through long ages
has been slowly improved to its present perfection, seems difficult of credit.
We think of early man having the same ideas and expressing them as readily as
we do now; but this is not the case. Not, indeed, that we have any reason to
believe that there was a time when man had no language at all, but it seems
certain that long ages were necessary before this instrument could be wrought
to the fineness in which we find it, and to which in all the languages we are
likely to become acquainted with, we are accustomed. A rude iron knife or
spear-head seems a simple and natural thing to make. But we know that before it
could be made iron had to be discovered, and the art of extracting iron from
the ore; and, as a matter of fact, we know that thousands of years passed
before the iron spearhead was a possibility, thousands of years spent in
slowly improving the weapons of stone, and passing on from them to the weapons
of bronze. So, too, with language; simple as it seems at first sight to fit the
word on to the idea, and early as we ourselves learn this art, a little thought
about what language is will show us how much we owe to the ages which have gone
before.
To begin with, then, let us try and consider what language really is.
The first thing which it is very important we should realize is that writing
has nothing: to do with the formation of language; for writing is a
comparatively late invention, and came long after languages had gone through
the chief stages of their growth, and was never meant for any other purpose
than to convey to the eye the idea of sound. Language itself belongs to sound
only, and appeals to no other sense than the sense of hearing. This everybody
will agree to at once, for it is no more than saying that people who cannot
read or write have still a language; and, of course, three or four centuries
ago there were comparatively few individuals among all the inhabitants of Europe
who could write; even now there are hundreds of languages in the world which
have never been committed to writing. The observation would indeed be scarce
worth the making, but for the necessity of a precaution against thinking at all
of the look of words and not of their
sound. And now, say we take any word and ask ourselves what exact relationship
it holds with the thought for which it stands. “Book”—no sooner have we
pronounced the word than an idea more
or less distinct comes into our mind. The thought and the sound seem
inseparable, and we cannot remember the time when they were not so. Yet the
connection between the thought and the sound is not necessary. In fact, a sound
which generally comes connected with one idea may—if we are engaged at the time
upon a language not our own—enter our minds, bringing with it an idea quite
unconnected with the first. Share and chère, feel and viel, are
examples in point; and the same thing is shown by the numerous sounds in our
language which have two or more quite distinct meanings, as for example—ware and were, and (with most people) where too; and rite and right, and wright are pronounced precisely alike;
therefore there can be no reason why one sound should convey one idea more than
another. In other words, the idea and the sound have an arbitrary, not a
natural connection. We have been taught to make the sound “book” for the idea book, but had we been brought up by
French parents the sound “livre” would have seemed the natural one to make. So
that this wondrous faculty of speech has, like those other faculties of which
Carlyle speaks, been handed down on impalpable vehicles of sound through the
ages. Never, perhaps, since the time of our first parents has one person from
among the countless millions who have been born had to invent for himself a way
of expressing his thoughts in words. This is alone a strange thing enough.
Impossible as it is to imagine ourselves without speech, we may ask the
question—What should we do if we were ever left in such a predicament? Should
we have any guide in fitting the
sound on to the idea? Share and chère, feel and viel—among these
unconnected notions is there any reason why we should wed our speech to one
rather than another? Clearly there is no reason. Yet in the case which we imagined
of a number of rational beings who had to invent a language for the first time,
if they are ever to come to an understanding at all there must be some common
impulse which makes more than one choose the same sound for a particular idea.
How, for instance, we may ask, was it with our first parents? They have passed
on to all their descendants for ever the idea of conveying thought by sound,
and all the great changes which have since come into the languages of the world
have been gradual and, so to say, natural. But this first invention of the idea
of speech is of quite another character.
Here we are brought to the threshold of that impenetrable mystery, “the
beginning of things”, and here we must pause. We recognize this faculty of
speech as a thing mysterious, unaccountable, belonging to that supernatural
being, man. There must have been and must be in us a something which causes our
mouth to echo the thought of the heart; and originally this echo must have been
spontaneous and natural, the same for all alike. Now it is a mere matter of
tradition and instruction, the sound we use for the idea; but at first the two
must have had some subtle necessary connection, or how could one of our first
parents have known or guessed what the other wished to say? Just as every metal
has its peculiar ring, it is as though each impression on the mind rang out its
peculiar word from the tongue. Or was it like the faint tremulous sound which
glasses give when music is played near? The outward object or the inward thought
called out a sort of mimicry, a distant echo—not like, hut yet born of the
other—on the lips. These earliest sounds may perhaps still sometimes be
detected. In the sound flo or flu, which in an immense number of
languages stands connected with the idea of flowing and of rivers, do we not
recognize some attempt to catch the smooth yet rushing sound of water? And
again, in the sound gra or gri, which is largely associated with
the notion of grinding, cutting, or scraping, there is surely something of this
in the guttural harshness of the letters, which make the tongue grate, as it
were, against the roof of the mouth. And if we see reason to think that these
primitive sounds are not always the closest possible imitations of the things
they should express, we need not be surprised, since we notice the same fact
with regard to our other ways of conveying ideas. In expressive actions, we
only half imitate the motion we intend should be followed. We say “go”, and
dart out our hand, half to show that the person is to go in the direction we
point out, or that he is to keep away from us; and half, again, with the object
of expressing to him rapid motion by the quickness of our own movement. So with
the first words. The names of animals, for instance, did not attempt to mimic
the sound which the animal makes—as children call a dog a “bow-wow”, and a lamb
a “baa”—but they were, as we have said, something like echoes upon the tongue
of the combined effects the animal produced to sight and hearing.
We may suppose the first created man to have immediately, by this quick,
spontaneous faculty of his, found words for every object which met his eye and
reached his ear, as Adam is described naming each one of the animals among whom
he lived; but even when furnished with a long vocabulary to represent things
and belongings of things (which we call attributes or adjectives) and motions
of every sort, he would still want a number of other words which could not by
any possibility spring directly from the picture formed in his mind. All
languages are full of words which by themselves do not and cannot awaken definite
thoughts in us. All adverbs, conjunctions, prepositions, particles, belong to
this class. To, as, but, when, do not
as mere words and taken by themselves convey any meaning; but adjectives,
verbs, and substantives, hard, beat, hand,
do convey an idea when taken quite alone. So that after the first man had got
his list of sounds which were real echoes of his thought, he had to get another
series of sounds which were echoes of nothing by themselves, but were useful
for joining the others together, showing the connection in which they stood one
to another.
This, then, was the second stage of language, the making of what we may
call the meaningless words, for they
are meaningless when taken quite alone. This second stage was probably a much
slower one than the first. The making of meaning sounds might have gone on with
any degree of rapidity, provided man started with the word-making faculty,
within. But there seems reason to believe that every meaningless word has
arisen out of some word which once belonged to the real “echo” class; that to, for instance, with, by, and, have descended from older roots (now lost), which if
placed alone would once have conveyed as much idea to the mind as pen, ink, paper, do to us. It is
impossible to show what all our meaningless words have come from; and we have
not even the intention of bringing forward all the reasons on which this opinion
is grounded—it would be too wearisome. But we may notice one or two instances
of how even at the present day this process of changing meaning into
meaningless words is still going on. Take first the word even, which we used a moment ago. “Even at the present day”. Here even is an adverb, quite meaningless
when used alone, at least as an adverb; but if we see it alone it becomes
another word, an adjective, a meaning word, bringing before us the idea of two
things hanging level. “Even if” is nonsense as an idea with nothing to follow it, but “even weights” is a perfectly
clear and definite notion, and each of the separate words even and weights give us
clear and definite notions too. It is the same with just, which is both adverb
and adjective. “Just as” brings no thought into the mind, but “just man” and just and man separately or together, do. While or whilst are meaningless; but ‘a
while’, or ‘to while’—to loiter—are full of meaning. In each case the
meaningless word came from the meaning word, and was first used as a sort of
metaphor, and then the metaphorical part was lost sight of. The English not is meaningless, and just as much so
are the French pas and point in the sense of not; but in the sense of footstep, or point, they have meaning enough. Originally il ne veut pas meant, metaphorically, “he does not wish a step of
your wishes”, “he does not go a footstep with you in your wish”; il ne veut point, “he does not go a
point with you in your wish”. Nowadays all this metaphorical meaning is gone,
except to the eye of the grammarian. People recognize that il ne veut point is rather stronger than il ne veut pas, but it never occurs to them to wonder why.
There are so many of these curious examples that one is tempted to go on
choosing instances; but we confine ourselves to one more. Our word yes is a word which by itself is quite
incapable of calling up a picture in our minds, but the word is or “it is”, though the idea it
conveys is very abstract, and, so to say, intangible—as compared, for instance,
with such verbs as move, beat—nevertheless belongs to the meaning
class. Now it happens that the Latin language used the word est “it is” where we should now use the
word “yes”; and it still further happens that our yes is probably the same as
the German es, and was used in the
same sense of it is as well. Instead of the meaningless word “yes” the Romans
used the word est “it is”, and our
own ancestors expressed the same idea by saying “it”. Still more. It is well
known that French is in the main a descendant from the Latin, not the Latin of
Rome, but the corrupter Latin which was spoken in Gaul. Now these
Latin-speaking Gauls did not, for some reason, say est “it is” for yes, as the Romans did; but they used a pronoun,
either ille, “he”, or hoc, “this”. When, therefore, a Gaul
wanted to say ‘yes’, he nodded, and said he or else this, meaning “he is so”, or
“this is so”. As it happens the Gauls of the north said ille, and those of the south said hoc, and these words gradually got corrupted into two meaningless
words, oui and oc. And, as is well known, the people in the south of France were
especially distinguished by using the word oc instead of oui for “yes”, so that
their “dialect” got to be called the langue
d’oc, and this word Languedoc gave the name to a province of France. But
long before that time, we may be sure, both the people of the langue d’oui and those of the langue d’oc had forgotten that their words for “yes” once meant “he”
and “this”.
We can from these instances pretty well guess the way in which the
second vocabulary of meaningless words was formed. Man must have begun speaking
always in a metaphorical way. Instead of saying “on the rock”, or “under the
rock”, he perhaps said “head of rock” and “foot of rock”, and the words he used
for head and foot may have got corrupted and changed; so that the older form
might remain for the meaningless words on, under, and a newer form come to be
used for head and foot. Just as the Frenchman never knows that his oui and il are both sprung from the same Latin ille. Nor, again, does the ordinary German recognize in his gewiss, “certainly”,' the same word as
his past participle gewissen, ‘known’;
nor the ordinary Englishman reflect that the adverb “ago” is derived from “agone”,
an old past participle of the verb “to go”.
When people first began using sounds to express ideas, it would seem
that a single sound was used to express each separate idea. Or, putting it
differently, we may say that the earliest words were words of one syllable
only. As man must have been in want of an enormous number of these simple
sounds, he soon began ringing as many changes as possible upon each, so that
with every sound went a whole family of others which were very like it, and
meant to stand for ideas similar to the idea expressed by the first sound. Now
the most important part of every sound, as far as the meaning goes, are the
consonants which compose it, and even at the present day, if we keep the
consonants of any word the same, and alter the vowel or diphthong, we get a
fresh meaning closely connected with the first (fly, flee, swing, swung, &c.). It was in this way that a great
many words arose connected into a class by the consonants remaining unaltered and
connected together also by the thread of a common idea. As in “swing”, “swung”,
“swang”, we have three different ideas expressing different tenses or times in
which the action of swinging took place, and at the same time we have the
central idea of swinging connected with the consonants sw-ng: just so, if in
some primitive language the consonants f-l expressed the central idea of
flowing, “flo” might have stood for the verb “to flow”, “flu” for the
substantive, river, and “fla” for some adjective or attribute common to flowing
water, bright perhaps, or soft.
Even with quite modern and cultivated languages—which are not, of
course, the best for studying the early history of human speech—we may trace
the way in which the consonants remain the same, or slightly changed, while the
vowels alter, as when we recognize the German knecht in our knight, raum in our room; or, again, the Italian padre in the French père, tavola in table, &c.
Such comparisons as these show us that English and German, French and Italian,
are closely connected. But where the connection between languages is very
distant, and the farther we have to go back, the more have we to divide our
words into their composing syllables so that we are going backwards towards the
root-sounds of language, and these as we have said, are single syllables, of
which the most constant parts are the consonants. Here our knowledge stops. Of
all the changes which were rung upon any particular arrangement of letters, “f-l”
say, we cannot possibly determine which was the first, “flo”, “flu”, “fla”, or
any other. What we actually find in any language, the most primitive even, is
the existence of these root consonant-sounds expressing some general idea, the
idea of flowing, or whatever it may be. Probably, as we have said, this ringing
the changes upon a particular sound may have gone on with any degree of rapidity,
have been almost simultaneous with the power of speaking itself, which power
was, we know, simultaneous with the creation of man. So that we may practically
speak of man as starting with these root sounds, which would express not a
particular, but a general idea. Sometimes it is not at all easy to trace the
connection between the different words which have been formed from one of these
general roots. From a root, which in Sanskrit appears in its most ancient form,
as mâ, “to measure”, we get words in
Greek and Latin which mean “to think”, and from the same root comes our “man”,
the person who measures, who compares, i.e., who thinks, also our moon, which
means “the measurer”, because the moon helps to measure out the time, the months. So, too, our crab is from the word creep, and means the animal that creeps.
But why this name should have been given to crab rather than to ant and beetle
it is impossible to say.
Thus equipped with his fixed root and the various words formed out of
it, man had enough material to begin all the elaborate languages which the
world has known. And he continued his work something in this fashion. As
generation followed generation the pronunciation of words was changed, as is constantly
being done at the present day. Our grandmothers pronounced “Rome”, room, and “brooch”,
as it was spelt, and not as we pronounce it—“broach”. And let it be remembered,
before writing was invented, there was nothing but the pronunciation to fix the
word, and a new pronunciation was really a new word. When there was no spelling
to fix a word, these changes of pronunciation were very rapid and frequent, so
that not only would each generation have a different set of words from their
fathers, but probably each tribe would be partly unintelligible to its
neighboring tribes, just as a Somersetshire man is to a great extent
unintelligible to a man out of Yorkshire. The first result of these changes
would be the springing up of a number of “meaningless” words. “Head of rock”
and “foot of rock” would sink to equivalents of “over” and “under”, when of two
names for head and foot one became obsolete as a noun, and was only used
adverbially. What had originally meant, metaphorically, head of rock and foot
of rock might come to be used for over and under the rock when new words had
arisen for head and foot, in exactly the same way that the word ago has become a “meaningless” word to
the Englishman of today.
The next step was the joining of words together. In one way this process
may have begun very early. Two “meaning” words, as soon as formed, might be
joined together to form a third idea; just as we have “anthill”, which is a
different thing from either “ant” or “hill”. But there are other ways of
joining words more important in the history of language than this. There is the
joining on of the “meaningless” words. Although we always put the meaningless qualifying word before the chief
word, and say “on the rock”, or “under the rock”, it is more natural to man, as
is shown by all languages, to put the principal idea first, and say “rock on”,
“rock under”, the idea rock being of
course the chief idea, the part of the rock, or position in relation to the
rock, coming after. So the first step towards grammar was the getting a number
of meaningless words, and joining them on to the substantive, “rock”, “rock-by”,
“rock-in”, “rock-to”, &c. So with the verb. The essential idea in the verb
is the action itself, the next idea is the time or person in which the action
takes place; and the natural thing for man to do is to make the words follow
that order. The joining process would give us from love, the idea of loving, “love-I”, “love-thou”, “love-he”, &c,
and for the imperfect “love-was-I”, “love-was-thou”, “love-was-he”, “love-was-we”,
“love-was-ye”, “love-was-they”, for perfect “love-have-I”, “love-have-thou”, “love-have-he”,
&c. Of course, these are merely illustrations, but they make the mode of
this early joining process clearer than if we had chosen a language where that
process is actually found in its purity, and then translated the forms into
their English equivalents.
We have now arrived at a stage in the formation of language where both meaning and meaningless words have been introduced, and where words have been
made up out of combinations of the two. We see at once that with regard to
meaningless words the use of them would naturally be fixed very much by
tradition and custom, and whereas there might be a great many words standing
for ant and hill, and therefore a
great many ways of saying ant-hill, for the meaningless words, such as under and on, there would probably be only one word. The reason of this is
very plain. While all the separate synonyms for hill, expressed different ways in which it struck the mind, either
as being high, or large, or steep, or what not, for under and on being
meaningless words not producing any picture in the mind, only one word apiece could very well be used. While under and on
were meaning words, meaning, perhaps, as we imagined, head of, or foot of,
there would be plenty of synonyms for them; but only one out of all these would
be handed down in their meaningless forms. It is important to remember this,
because this accounts for all the grammars of all languages. As a matter of
fact, every one of those grammatical terminations which we know so well in
Latin and Greek, and German, was originally nothing else than meaningless words
added on to modify the words which still retained their meaning. We saw before,
that it was much more natural for people to say “rock-on” or “hand-in” than “on
the rock” or “in the hand”—though, of course, our arrangement of the words
seems the most reasonable to us—because rock and hand were the most important
ideas and came first into the mind, while on, in, &c, were only subsidiary
ideas depending upon the important ones. If we stop at rock or hand without
adding on and in, we have still got something definite upon which our thoughts
can rest, but we could not possibly stop at on and in alone, and have any idea in
our minds at all. It is plain enough therefore that, though we say “on the rock”,
we must have the idea of all the three words in our mind before we begin the
phrase, and therefore that our words do not follow the natural order of our
ideas; whereas rock-on, hand-in, show the ideas just in the way they come into
the mind. It is a fact that all case-endings arose from adding on meaningless
words to the end of the word, the noun or pronoun. Das Weib, des Weib-es, dem Weib-e; hom-o, hominis, homini: the
meanings of case-endings such as these cannot, it is true, he discovered now, for
they came into existence long before such languages as German or Latin were
spoken, and their meanings were lost sight of in ages which passed before
history. But that time when the terminations which are meaningless now had a meaning,
and the period of transition between this state and the state of a language
which is full of grammatical changes inexplicable to those who use them, form
distinct epochs in the history of every language. It is just the same with
verb-endings as with the case-endings —ich
bin, du bist, really express the I and thou twice over, as the pronouns
exist though hidden and lost sight of in the -n and -st of the verb.
In the case of verbs, indeed, we may without going far give some idea of how
these endings may be detected. We may say at once that Sanskrit, Persian,
Greek, Latin, French, Italian, Spanish, German, English, Norse, Gaelic, Welsh,
Lithuanian, Russian, and other Slavonic languages are all connected together in
various degrees of relationship, all descended from one common ancestor, some
being close cousins, and some very distant. Now in Sanskrit “I am” is thus
declined:—
as-mi I am. ‘s-mas we are.
a-si thou art. ‘s-tha ye are.
as-ti he is. ‘s-anti they are.
By separating the root from the ending in this way we may the more
easily detect the additions to the root, and their meanings. As is the root expressing the idea of
being, existing; mi is from a root meaning I (preserved in me, Greek and Lat. me, moi,
m[ich], &c); so we get as-mi,
am-I, or I am. Then we may trace this through a number of languages connected
with the Sanskrit. The important part of as-mi,
the consonants, are preserved in the Latin sum,
I am, from which, by some further changes, come the French suis, the Italian sono :
the same word appears in our a-m, and
in the Greek eimi (Doric esmi), I am. Next, coming to the second
word, we see one of the s’s cut out,
and we get a-si, in which the a is the root, and the si the addition signifying thou. To this addition correspond the
final s’s in the Latin es, French es—tu es, and the Greek eis (Doric essi). So, again, as-ti, the ti expresses he, and this corresponds to the Latin est, French est, the Greek esti, the
German ist; in the English the
expressive t has been lost. We will
not continue the comparison of each word; it will be sufficient if we place
side by side the same tense in Sanskrit and in Latin, and give those who do not
know Latin an opportunity of recognizing for themselves tire tense in its
changed form in French or Italian:—
English. Sanskrit. Latin.
I am as-mi sum.
thou art a-si es.
he is as-ti est.
we are ‘s-mas sumus.
ye are ‘s-tha estis.
they are ‘s-anti sunt.
The plural of the added portion we see contains the letters m-s, and if we split these up again we
get the separate roots mi and si, so that mas means most literally “I”, and “thou”, and hence “we”. In the
second person the Latin has preserved an older form than the Sanskrit; the
proper root consonants for the addition part of the second person plural,
combining the ideas thou and he, from which, ye. The third person plural cannot
be so easily explained.
It will be seen that in the English almost all likeness to the Sanskrit
terminations has been lost. Our verb “to be” is very irregular, being, in fact,
a mixture of several distinct verbs. The Saxon had the verb beó contracted from beom (here we have at any rate the m ending for I), I am, byst, thou art, bydh, he is, and the same appear in the German bin, bist. It is, of course, very difficult to trace the remains of
the meaningless additions in such advanced languages as ours, or even as
Sanskrit, Latin, and Greek. Nevertheless, the reader may find it not
uninteresting to trace in the Latin through most of the tenses of verbs these
endings—m, for I, the first person; s, for thou, the second person; t, for he, the third person; m-s, for I and thou, we; st, for ye, thou and he, ye; nt, for they. And the same reader must
be content to take on trust the fact that other additions corresponding to
different tenses can also be shown or reasonably guessed to have been words
expressive by themselves of the idea which belongs to the particular tense; so
that where we have such a tense as
amabam I was loving.
amabas thou wast loving.
amabat, &c. he was loving.
we may recognize the meanings of the component parts thus:—
ama-ba-m love-was-I.
ama-ba-s love-was-thou.
ama-ba-t love-was-he.
Of course, really to show the way in which these meaningless additions
have been made and come to be amalgamated with the root, we should have to take
examples from a great number of languages in different stages of development.
But we have thought it easier, for mere explanation, to take only such
languages as were likely to be familiar to the reader, and even to supplement
these examples with imaginary ones—like “rock-on”, “love-was-I”, &c.—in
English. For our object has been at first merely to give an intelligible
account of how language has been formed, of the different stages it has passed
through, and to leave to a future time the question as to which languages of
the globe have passed through all these stages, and which have gone part of
their way in the formation of a perfect language. Between the state of a
language in which the meaning of all the separate parts of a word are
recognized and that state where they are entirely lost, there is an immense
gap, that indeed which separates the most from the least advanced languages of
the world.
Every language that is now spoken on the globe has gone through the
stage of forming meaningless words, and is therefore possessed of words of both
classes. They no longer say “head-of-rock” or “foot-of-rock”, but “rock-on” and
“rock-under”. But there are still known languages in which every syllable is a
word and where grammar properly speaking does not exist. For grammar, if we
come to consider it exactly, is the explanation of the meaning of those added
syllables or letters which have lost all natural meaning of their own. If each
part of the word were as clear and as intelligible as “rock-on” we should have
no need of a grammar at all. A language of this sort is called a monosyllabic
language, not because the people only speak in monosyllables, but because each
word, however compound, can be split up into monosyllables which have a
distinctly recognizable meaning. “Ant-hill-on” or “love-was-I”, are like the
wards of such a language.
The next stage of growth is where the meaning of the added parts has
been lost sight of, except when it is connected with the word which it
modifies; but where the essential word has a distinct idea by itself, and
without the help of any addition. Suppose, for instance, through ages of change
the “was-I” in our imaginary example got corrupted into “wasi”, where wasi had no meaning by itself, but was
used to express the first person of the past tense. The first person past of
love would be “love-wasi”, of move “move-wasi”, and so on, “wasi"” no
longer having a meaning by itself, but “love” and “move” by themselves being
perfectly understandable. A language in this stage is said to be in the
agglutinative stage, because certain grammatical endings (like wasi) are merely as it were glued on to
a root to change its meaning, while the root itself remains quite unaffected,
and means neither less nor more than it did before.
But, as ages pass on, the root and the addition get so closely combined
that neither of them alone has a distinct meaning, and the language arrives at
its third stage. It is not difficult to find examples of a language in this
condition, for such is the case with all the languages by which we are
surrounded. All the tongues which the majority of us are likely to study,
almost all those which have any literature at all, have arrived at this last
stage, which is called the inflexional. For instance, though we were able to
separate “asmi” into two parts—“as” and “mi”—one expressing the idea of being,
the other the person “I”, this distinction is the refinement of the grammarian,
and would never have been recognized by an ordinary speaker of Sanskrit, for
whom “asmi” simply meant “I am”, without distinction of parts. In our “am” the
grammarian recognizes that the “a” expresses existence, and the “m” expresses
I; but so completely have we lost sight of this, that we repeat the “I” before
the verb. Just the same in Latin. No Roman could have recognized in the “s” of sum “am” and in the “m” “I”; for him sum meant simply and purely “I am”. “I”
was no more separable in his eyes than the French êtes (Latin estis) in vous êtes, is separable into a root “es”,
contracted in the French into “ê”, meaning are, and an addition “tes”
signifying you. This, then, is the
last stage upon which language enters. It is called inflexional, because the
different grammatical changes are not now denoted by a mere addition to an
intelligible word, but by a change in the word itself. The root may indeed
remain and be recognizable in its purity, but very frequently it is
unrecognizable, so that the different case or tense endings can no longer be
looked upon as additions, but as changes. Take almost any Latin substantive,
and we see this: homo, a man, the
genitive is formed, not by adding something to homo, but by changing homo into hominis, or, if we please,
adding something to the root hom—which
has in itself no meaning.
Thus, to recapitulate, we discover first two stages which language went
through before it presents itself in any form known to us: what we call the
meaning words came into existence, and then out of these were gradually formed
the meaningless words.
These stages were in the main passed through before any known language
came into existence, for there is no tongue which is not composed in part of
words from the meaningless class: though at the same time it is a process which
is still going on, as where even and just the adjectives become even and just the adverbs, or where the French substantives pas and point take a like change of meaning. Then after the meaningless
words have been acquired come the three other stages which go to the making of
the grammar of a language, stages which can be traced in actual living
languages, and which have been called the monosyllabic, the agglutinative, and
the inflexional stage. With the last of these the history of the growth of
language comes to an end. It happens indeed, sometimes, that a language which
has arrived at the inflexional stage may in time come to drop nearly all its
inflexions. This has been the case with English and French. Both are descended
from languages which had elaborate grammars—the Saxon and the Latin; but both,
from a mixture of languages and other causes, have come to drop almost all their
grammatical forms. We show our grammar only in a few changes in our ordinary
verbs—the past tense and the past participle, use, used; buy, bought, &c.; in other variations in our auxiliary verb,
and by changes in our pronouns—I, me, ye,
you, who, whom, &c.; and by the “’s” and “s” of the possessive case and
of the plural, and by the comparison of adjectives. The French preserve their
grammar to some extent in their pronouns, their adjectives, and in their verbs.
But these are cases of decay, and do not find any place in the history of the
growth of language.
From this we pass on to examine where the growth of language has been
fully achieved, where it has remained only stunted and imperfect.
CHAPTER IV.
FAMILIES OF LANGUAGE
Let us recall for a moment the conclusion of the last chapter, and what
was said of the different stages of growth through which a language must pass
before it arrives at such a condition as that in which are all the tongues with
which most of us are likely to be familiar. We found that there were first two
very early stages when what may be called the bones of a language were formed,
namely, the acquisition first of the meaning words, those words which standing
alone bring a definite idea into the mind, as pen, ink, paper; secondly, of the meaningless words, which, like to, for, and, produce no idea in the
mind when taken quite alone. And we saw that while the first class of words may
have rapidly sprung into existence one after another, the meaningless words
could only have gradually come into use, as one by one they fell out of the
rank of the meaning class. Again, after this skeleton of language had been got
together, there were three other stages, we said, which went to make up the
grammar of language. The first, the monosyllabic stage, where any word of the
language may be divided into monosyllables, each having a distinct meaning ;
the second, the agglutinative stage, where the root, that is to say the part of
the word which expresses the essential idea, always remains distinct from the
additions that modify it; and thirdly, the inflexional stage, where the root
and the inflexions have got so interwoven as to be no longer distinguishable.
Of course, really to understand what these three conditions are like,
the reader would have to be acquainted with some language in each of the three;
but it is sufficient if we get clearly into our heads that there are these
stages of language-growth, and that, further, each one of all the languages' of
the world may be said to be in one of the three. Our opportunities of tracing
the history of languages being so limited, we have no recorded instance of a
language passing out of one stage into another; but when we examine into these
states they so clearly wear the appearance of stages that there seems every reason to believe that a monosyllabic
language might in time develop into an agglutinative, and again from that stage
into an inflexional, language, if nothing
stopped its growth.
But what, we may ask, are the causes which put a stop to the free growth
and development of language? One of these causes is the invention of writing.
Language itself is of course spoken language, speech, and as such is subject to
no laws save those which belong to our organs of speaking and hearing. No
sooner is the word spoken than it is gone, and lives only in the memory; and
thus speech, though it may last for centuries, dies, as it were, and comes to
life again every hour. It is with language as it is with those national songs
and ballads which among nations that have no writing take the place of books
and histories. The same poem or the same tale passes from mouth to mouth almost
unchanged for hundreds of years, and yet at no moment is it visible and
tangible, nor for the most part of the time audible even, but for these
centuries lives on in men’s memories only. So Homer’s ballads must have passed
for several hundred years from mouth to mouth; and, stranger still, stories
which were first told somewhere by the banks of the Oxus or the Jaxartes by
distant ancestors of ours, are told to this very day, little altered, by
peasants in remote districts of England and Scotland. But to return to
language. It is very clear that so long as language remains speech and speech
only, it is subject to just so many variations as in the course of a generation
or two men may have introduced into their habits of speaking. Why these
variations arise it is perhaps not quite easy to understand; but everyone knows
that they do arise, that from age to age, from generation to generation, not
only are new words being constantly introduced, and others which once served
well enough dropped out of use, but constant changes are going on in the
pronunciation of words. Nay, if left to itself a language would not remain quite
the same in two different districts; as we know, for instance, that the
language of common people does, differ very much in different counties, so that
what with varieties of pronunciation, and what with the use of really peculiar
words, the inhabitants of one county are scarcely intelligible to the
inhabitants of another. The influence which keeps a language together and tends
to make the changes as few as possible is that of writing. When once writing
has been invented it is clear that language no longer depends upon the memory
only, no longer has such a seemingly precarious tenure of life as it had when
it was no more than speech. The writing remains a sure mark against the changes
of time. Although our written words are but the symbols of sound, they are symbols
so clear that the recollection of the sound springs up in our minds the moment
the written word comes before our eyes. So it is that there are hundreds of
words in the English language which we should many of us not use once in a
lifetime, which are yet perfectly familiar to us. All old-fashioned words which
belong to the literary language, and
are never used now in common life, would have been forgotten long ago except
for writing. So too the fact that those provincialisms which make the peasants
of different counties almost mutually unintelligible do not affect the
intercourse of educated people, is owing to the existence of a written
language.
We see therefore the power which writing has of binding together speech
and preventing it from slipping into dialects, of keeping the language rich by
preserving words which in common everyday life are apt to be forgotten. But
writing may also have a disastrous effect upon an unformed language by checking
changes which tend to development, and this is just what has happened in the
case of Chinese. We know what a strange people the Chinese are, and how they
seemed to have stopped growing just at one particular point, and, with all the
machinery, so to speak, ready to make them a great people, how they have
remained forever a stunted, undeveloped race, devoid of greatness in any form.
Their character is reflected very accurately in their language. While this was
still in the first of our three stages—the monosyllabic—the Chinese invented
writing, and from that time the language almost ceased to develop, so that it
is the best specimen we have of a language in this state. Speaking quite
strictly, the ancient Chinese is the only monosyllabic language. Modern
Chinese, Burmese, Siamese, and Thibetan are so nearly monosyllabic that they
cannot be considered to have got fairly into the agglutinative stage, and
perhaps they never will.
As a matter of fact, then, it is writing which has preserved for us a
language in the monosyllabic stage, and perhaps nothing but writing could have
prevented such a language from in time becoming agglutinative. Other causes are
at work to prevent an agglutinative language becoming inflexional. It is not in
this case so easy to say what the hindering causes are: but perhaps, if we look
at the difference between the last two classes of language, we get some idea.
An inflexional language has quite lost the memory of the real meaning of its
inflexions—or at least the real reason of them. We could give no reason why we
should not use bought in the place of buy, art in the place of am, whom in the place of who—no other reason save that we have
always been taught to use the words in the position they take in our speech.
But there was once a time when the changes only existed in the form of additions
having a distinct meaning. Even in agglutinative languages these additions have
a distinct meaning as additions, or in other words, if we were using an
agglutinative language we should be able always to distinguish the addition
from the root, and so should understand the precise effect of the former in
modifying the latter. To understand the use of words in an agglutinative
language a great deal less of tradition and memory would be required than are
wanted to preserve an inflected language. This really is the same as saying
that for the inflected language we must have a much more constant use, and this
again implies a greater intellectual life, a closer bond of union among the
people who speak it, than exists among those who speak agglutinative languages.
Or we may look at it another way, and say that the cause of the mixing up of
the root and its addition came at first from a desire to shorten the word and
to save time—a desire which was natural to people who spoke much and had much
intercourse: and we guess from these considerations that the people who use the
agglutinative languages are people who have not what is called a close and
active national life. This is exactly the case. If the one or two monosyllabic
languages belong to peoples who have, as it were, developed too quickly, the
agglutinative languages distinguish a vast section of the human race whose
natural condition is a very unformed one, who are for the most part nomadic
races without fixed homes, or laws, or states. They live a tribal existence,
each man having little intercourse save with those of his immediate
neighborhood, using no large public assemblies, which might take the place of
literature, in obliging men to have a common language and a united national
life. Therefore the different dialects and tongues which belong to the
agglutinative class are almost endless; and it is not our intention to weary
the reader by even a bare list of them. But we may glance at the chief heads
into which these multifarious languages maybe grouped, and the geographical
position of those who speak them. These include all those peoples of Central
Asia whom in common language we are wont to speak of as Tartars, but whom it
would be more correct to describe as belonging to the Turkic or Mongol class, and
of whom so many different branches—the Huns, who emigrated from the borders of
China to Europe; the Mongols or Moghuls, who conquered Persia and Hindustan;
and lastly, the Osmanlees, or Ottomans, who invaded Europe and founded the
Turkish Empire—are the most distinguished (and most infamous) in history.
Another large class of agglutinative languages belongs to the natives of the
vast region of Siberia, from the Ural mountains to the far east. Another great
class, corresponding to these, the Finnish, once spread across the whole of
what is now European Russia and North Scandinavia, but has been gradually
driven to the extreme north by the Russians and Scandinavians. Lastly, a third
division is formed by those languages which belonged to the original inhabitants
of Hindustan before the greater part of the country was occupied by the Hindus.
These languages are spoken of as the Dravidian class. The natural condition of
these various nations or peoples is, as we have said, a nomadic state, though
individual nations have risen to considerable civilization. And as in very
early times ancestors of ours who belonged to a race speaking an inflexional
language bestowed upon some part of these nomadic people the appellation Tura, which means “the swiftness of a
horse”, from their constantly moving from place to place, the word Turanian has
been applied to all these various peoples, and the agglutinative languages are
spoken of generally as Turanian tongues.
And now we come to the last—the most important body of languages—the
inflexional, and we see that for it have been left all the more important
nations and languages of the world. Almost all the “historic” people, living or
dead, almost all the more civilized among nations, come under this our last
division: the ancient Egyptians, Chaldeans, Assyrians, Persians, Greeks, and
Romans, as well as the modern Hindus and the native Persians, and almost all
the inhabitants of Europe, with the countless colonies which these last have
spread over the surface of the globe. Inflexional languages are separated into
two main divisions or families,
inside each of which the languages are held by a tie of relationship. Just as
people are of the same family when they recognize their descent from a common
ancestor, so languages belong to one family when they can show clear signs that
they have grown out of one parent tongue. We may be sure that we are all the
children of the first pair, and we may know in the same way that all languages
must have grown and changed out of the first speech. But the traces of
parentage and relationship are in both cases buried in oblivion; it is only
when we come much farther down in the history of the world that we can really
see the marks of distinct kinship in the tongues of nations, separated by
thousands of miles, different in color, in habits, in civilization, and quite
unconscious of any common fatherhood.
Now as to the way in which this kinship among languages may be detected.
Among some languages there is such a close relationship that even an unskilled
eye can discover it. When we see, for instance, such likenesses as exist in
English and German between the very commonest words of life—kann and can, soll and shall, muss and must, ist and is, gut and good, hart and hard, mann and man, für and for, together with an innumerable number
of verbs, adjectives, substantives, prepositions, &c, which differ but
slightly one from another—we may feel sure either that the English once spoke
German, that the Germans once spoke English, or that English and German have
both become a little altered from a lost language which was spoken by the
ancestors of the present inhabitants of England and Deutschland. As a matter of
fact the last is the case. English and German are brother languages, neither is
the parent of the other. Now having our attention once called to this
relationship, we might, any of us who know English and German, at once set
about making a long list of words which are common to the two languages; and it
would not be a bad amusement for any reader just to turn over the leaves of a
dictionary and note how many German words (especially of the common sort) they
find that have a corresponding one in English. The first thing we begin to see
is the fact which was insisted on in the last chapter, that the consonants
form, as it were, the bones of a word, and that changes of vowel are
comparatively unimportant provided these remain unaltered. The next thing we
see is that even the consonants do not generally remain the same, but that in
place of one such letter in one language, another of a sound very like it
appears in the other language.
For instance, we soon begin to notice that “t” in German is often
represented by “d” in English, as tag becomes day; tochter, daughter; breit, broad; traum, dream; reiten, ride;
but sometimes by “th” in English, as vater becomes father; mutter, mother. Again, “d” in German is often equal to “th” in
English, as dorf, thorpe; feder, feather;
dreschen, thrash; drangen, throng; das, that. Now there is a certain
likeness common to these three sounds, “t”, “d” and” th”, as any one’s ear will
tell him if he say te, de, the. As a
matter of fact they are all pronounced with the tongue pressed against the
teeth, only in rather different places; and in the case of the last sound, the, with a breath or aspirate sent
between the teeth at the same time. So we see that, these letters being really
so much alike in sound, there is nothing at all extraordinary in one sound
becoming exchanged for another in the two languages. We learn, therefore, to
look beyond the mere appearance of the word, to weigh, so to speak, the sounds
against each other, and to detect likenesses which might perhaps otherwise have
escaped us. For instance, if we see that “ch” in German is often represented by
“gh” in English—in such words as tochter,
daughter; knecht, knight; möchte, might; lachen, laugh,—we have no
difficulty in now seeing how exactly durch corresponds to our “through”, the position of the vowels being a matter of
comparatively small account. So our power of comparison continually increases,
though some knowledge of several languages is necessary before we can establish
satisfactory rules or proceed with at all sure steps.
When we have acquired this knowledge there are few things more
interesting than noting the changes which words undergo in the different
tongues, and learning how to detect the same word under various disguises. The
interest is very great sometimes, for instance, in the case of proper names.
The smaller family—or, as we have used the word family to express a large class
of languages, let us say the branch to which English and German belong—is
called the Teutonic branch. To it belonged nearly all those barbarian nations
who, towards the fall of the Roman empire, began the invasion of her
territories, and ended by carving out of them most of the various states and
kingdoms of modern Europe. The best test we have of the nationalities of these
peoples, the best proof that they were connected by language with each other
and with the modern Teutonic nations, is to be found in their proper names. We
have, for instance, among the Vandals such names as Hilderic, Genseric, and the
like; we compare them at once with Theodoric and Alaric, which were names of
famous Goths. Then as the Gothic language has been preserved we recognize the
termination rik or riks in Gothic, meaning a “king”, and
connected with the German reich, and
also with the Latin rex—Alaric
becomes al-rik, “all-king”, universal
king. In Theodoric we recognize the Gothic thiuda-rik,
“king of the people”. Again, this Gothic word thiuda is really the same as the German deutsch, or as “Dutch”, of which also “Teutonic” is only a
Latinized form. In the same way the Hilda-rik in Gothic is “king of battles”;
and having got this word from the Vandals we have not much difficulty in
recognizing Childeric, the name of a Frankish king, as the same word. This
change teaches us to turn “ch” of
Frankish names into “h”, so that instead of Chlovis we first get Hlovis, which
is only a softened form of Hludvig, or Hludwig, the modern Ludwig, our Louis. Hlud is known to have meant “famous” and wig a “warrior”, so that Ludwig means
famous warrior. The same verb “wig” seems to appear in the word Merovingian, a
latinized form of Meer-wig, which would mean sea-warrior.
These instances show us the kind of results we obtain by a comparison of languages. In the case of these names,
for instance, we have got enough to show a very close relationship amongst the
Vandals, the Goths, and the Franks, and had we time many more instances might
have been chosen to support this conclusion. Here, of course, we have been confining
ourselves to one small branch of a large family. The road, the farther we go,
is beset with greater difficulties and dangers of mistake, and the student can
do little unless he is guided by fixed rules, which we should have to follow,
supposing we were able to carry on our inquiries into many and distant
languages. Those words which we have instanced as being common to us and to
German, we have both got by inheritance from an earlier language. Yet there are
in English hundreds of words which are not acquired by inheritance from other
languages, but merely by adoption; hundreds of words have been taken directly
from the Latin, or from the Latin through the French, or from the Greek, and not
derived from any early language which was the parent of the Latin, Greek, and
English. How shall we distinguish between these classes of words? In the first
place, the simpler words are almost sure to be inherited, because people, in
however rude a state they were, could never have done without words to express
such everyday ideas as to have, to be, to
laugh, to make, to kill—I, thou, to, for, and; whereas they might have done
well enough without words such as government,
literature, sensation, expression, words which express either things which
were quite out of the way of these primitive people, or commonish ideas in a
somewhat grand and abstract form. Our first rule, therefore, must be to choose
the commoner class of words, or generally speaking, those words which are
pretty sure never to have fallen out of use, and which therefore must have been
handed down from father to son.
There is another rule—that those languages must be classed together
which have like grammatical forms. This is the rule of especial importance in
distinguishing a complete family of languages. For when once a language has got
into the inflected stage, though it may hereafter lose or greatly modify nearly
all its inflections, it never either sinks back into the agglutinative stage,
or adopts the grammatical forms of another language which is also in the
inflected condition. These are the general rules, therefore, upon which we go.
We look first for the grammatical forms and then for the simple roots, and
according to the resemblance or want of resemblance between them we decide
whether two tongues have any relationship, and whether that relationship is
near or distant.
Now it has in this way been found out that all inflected languages
belong to one of two families called the Semitic and the Aryan. Let us begin
with the Semitic. This word, which is only a Latinized way of saying Shemite,
is given to the nations who are supposed to be descended from Shem, the second
son of Noah. The nations who have spoken languages belonging to this Semitic
family have been those who appear so much in Old Testament history, and who
played a mighty part in the world while our own ancestors were still wandering-
tribes, and at an age when darkness still obscured the doings of the Greeks and
Romans. Foremost among all in point of age and fame stand the Egyptians, the
earliest of whose recorded kings, Menes, is believed to date back as far as
5000 B.C. Next in antiquity come the Chaldaeans, who have left behind them
great monuments in the ancient cities Erech and Ur, and their successors the
Assyrians and Babylonians. Abraham himself, we know, was a Chaldaean, and from
him descended the Hebrew nation, who were destined to shed the highest honor on
the Semitic race. Yet, so great may be the degeneration of some races and the
rise of others, so great may be the divisions which thus spring up between
peoples who were once akin, it is also true that all those people, whom the
Children of Israel were specially commanded to fight against and even to
exterminate—the Canaanites, the Moabites, and the Edomites—were likewise of
Semitic family. The Phoenicians are another race from the same stock who have
made their mark in the world. We know how, coming first from the coasts of Tyre
and Sidon, they led the way in the art of navigation, sent colonies to various
parts of the world, and foremost among these founded Carthage, the rival and
almost the destroyer of Rome. Our list of celebrated Semitic races must close
with the Arabs, the founders of Mohammedanism, the conquerors at whose name all
Europe used to tremble, whose kingdoms once extended in an unbroken line from
Spain to the banks of the Indus.
Such a list gives no mean place to the Semitic family of nations; but
those of the Aryan stock are perhaps even more conspicuous. This family (which
is sometimes called Japhetic, or descendants of Japhet) includes the Hindus and
Persians among Asiatic nations, and almost all the peoples of Europe. It may
seem strange that we English should be related not only to the Germans and
Dutch and Scandinavians, but to the Russians, French, Spanish, Romans, and
Greeks as well; stranger still that we can claim kinship with such distant
peoples as the Persians and Hindus. Yet such is the case, and the way in which
all these different nations once formed a single people, speaking one language,
and their subsequent dispersion over the different parts of the world in which
we now find them, affords one of the most interesting inquiries within the
range of prehistoric study. What seems actually to have been the case is this :
In distant ages, somewhere about the rivers Oxus and Jaxartes, and on the north
of that mountainous range called the Hindoo-Koosh, dwelt the ancestors of all
the nations we have enumerated, forming at this time a single and united
people, simple and primitive in their way of life, but yet having enough of a
common national life to preserve a common language. They called themselves
Aryas or Aryans, a word which, in its very earliest sense, seems to have meant
those who move upwards, or straight; and hence, probably, came to stand for the
noble race as compared with other races on whom, of course, they would look
down.
How long these Aryans had lived united in this their early home it is,
of course, impossible to say; but as the tribes and families increased in
numbers, a separation would naturally take place. Large associations of clans
would move into more distant districts, the connection between the various
bodies which made up the nation would be less close, their dialects would begin
to vary, and thus the seeds of new nations and languages would be sown. The
beginning of such a separation was a distinction which arose between a part of
the Aryan nation, who stayed at the foot of the Hindoo-Koosh and mountains, and
in all the fertile valleys which lie there, and another part which advanced
farther into the plain; This latter received the name Yavanas, which seems to have meant the protectors, and was probably
given to them because they stood as a sort of foreguard between the Aryans, who
still dwelt under the shadow of the mountains, and the foreign nations of the
plains. And now, their area being enlarged, they began to get still more
separated from each other; while at the same time, as their numbers increased,
the space wherein they dwelt became too small for them who had out of one
formed many different peoples. Then began a series of migrations, in which the
collection of tribes who spoke one language and formed one people started off
to seek their fortune in new lands, and thus for ever broke off association
with their kindred and their old Aryan home. One by one the different nations
among the Yavanas (the protectors)
were infected with this new spirit of adventure, and though they took different
routes, they all travelled westward, and arrived in Europe at last.
A not improbable reason has been suggested for these migrations. It is
known that, in spite of the immense volume of water which the Volga is daily
pouring into it, the Caspian Sea is gradually drying up, and it has been
conjectured as highly probable that hundreds of years ago the Caspian was not
only joined to the Sea of Aral, but extended over a large district which is now
sandy desert. The slow shrinking in its bed of this sea would, by decreasing
the rainfall, turn what was once a fertile country into a desert; and if we
suppose this result taking place while the Aryan nations were gradually
increasing in numbers, the effect would be to drive them, in despair of finding
subsistence in the ever-narrowing fertile tract between the desert and the
mountains, to seek for new homes elsewhere. This, at any rate, is what they
did. First among them, in all probability, started the Kelts or Celts, who,
travelling perhaps to the south of the Caspian and the north of the Black Sea,
found their way to Europe, and spread far on to the extreme west. At one time
it is most likely that the greater part of Europe was inhabited by Kelts, who
either exterminated or partly mingled with the stone-age men whom they found
there. As far as we know of their actual extension in historic times, however,
we find this Keltic family living in the north of Italy, in Switzerland, over
all the continent of Europe west of the Rhine, and in the British Isles. For
the Gauls, who then inhabited the northern part of continental Europe west of
the Rhine, the ancient Britons, and probably the Iberians, the ancient
inhabitants of Spain, belonged to this family. The Highland Scotch, who belong
to the old blood, call themselves Gaels, and their language Gaelic, which is
moreover so like the old Irish language that a Highlander could make himself
understood in Ireland; perhaps he might do so in Wales, where the inhabitants
are likewise Kelts. This word Gael is practically the same as Gaul. In the
earliest times of the Roman republic the Gauls, as we know, inhabited all the
north of Italy, and used often to make successful incursions down the very
centre of the peninsula. Beyond the Alps they extended right up into Belgium,
which formed part of ancient Gaul. So much for the Celts.
Another of the great families who left the Aryan home was the Pelasgic,
or the Graeco-Italic. These, journeying along first southwards and then to the
west, passed through Asia Minor, on to the countries of Greece and Italy, and
in time separated into those two great peoples, the Greeks (or Hellenes, as
they came to call themselves) and the Romans. How little did these rival
nations deem that they had once been brothers and travelled together in search
of new homes! AH recollection of these early journeyings were lost to the
Greeks and Romans, who, when we find them in historic times, had invented quite
different stories to account for their origin.
Next we come to two other great families of nations who seem to have
taken the game route at first, and perhaps began their travels together as the
Greeks and Romans did. These are the Teutons and the Slaves. They seem to have
travelled by the north of the Caspian and Black Sea, extending over all the
south of Russia, and down to the borders of Greece; then gradually to have
pushed on to Europe, ousting the Kelts from the eastern portion, until we find
them in the historical period threatening the borders of the Roman empire on
the Rhine and the Danube. Probably the Teutons pushed on most to the west, and
left the Slaves behind. For of the nations who from the beginning of the fifth
century of our era began the final invasion and dismemberment of the Roman
empire, the majority seem to have been Teuton. We have already said what are
the nations which compose the Teutonic, or be it, for the words are the same,
the Deutsch, or Dutch family. They are the Scandinavians—that is to say, the
inhabitants of Sweden, Norway, Denmark and Iceland, the English, the Dutch and
Flemings (most of the old Keltic inhabitants of Belgium had been driven out
subsequently by Teutonic invaders), and the Germans. Lastly, we come to the
Slavonians (Slaves), about whom we have been hearing a good deal in the papers
lately. This name has no etymological connection, as is sometimes ignorantly
said, with our word slave, which has dropped out a c between the s and the l. The word Slave comes from slowan,
which in old Slavonian meant to speak, and was given by the Slavonians to
themselves as the people who could speak, in opposition to other nations whom,
as they were not able to understand them, they were pleased to consider as
dumb. The Greek word barbaroi (whence
our “barbarians”) arose, in obedience to a like prejudice, only from an
imitation of babbling such as is made by saying “bar-bar-bar”. The Slavons probably
never got farther westward than Bohemia and the north-east of Germany : the
greater part of modern Prussia was inhabited by Slaves till about the
thirteenth or fourteenth centuries. But they spread northward, driving before
them the Turanian Lapps and Fins, and southward over all those Turkish
provinces about which there is now so much dispute, and again westward into
Poland and Bohemia. At the present day the inhabitants of Russia, Poland,
Livonia, Lithuania, Bohemia, and most of the South Danubian provinces speak
different dialects of the Slavonian tongue.
After he has thus classed the different families of nations, another
mine of almost infinite wealth is open to the researches of the philologist—a
mine too which has at present been only broached. He soon learns the laws
governing the changes of sound from one tongue into another. We have noticed
some of these experimental laws in the simple relationships as between English
and German, where “tag” becomes “day”, “dorf” “Thorpe”, and the like; and all
relationships of language are answerable to similar rules. There are laws for
the change of sound from Sanskrit into the primitive forms of Greek, Latin,
German, English, &c, just as there are laws of change between the first two
or the last two. So we soon learn to recognize a word in one language which
reappears in altered guise in another. And it may be well guessed how valuable
such knowledge may be made. If the word signify some common object, a weapon, a
tool, an animal, a house, it is not over-likely that it will have changed from
the time when it was first employed : the words of present employment, we know,
have little tendency to change. So that the time when this word was first used
is in all probability the time when the thing was first known to primitive man;
and if the word is common to the whole Aryan family, or if it is peculiar to a
portion only, then the thing was known or unknown before the separation of the
Aryan folk. It might well have happened that when the migrations began our
ancestors were still like the stone-age men of the shell-mounds, still in the
hunter condition; that they knew nothing of domesticated animals, or of
pastures and husbandmen: or it might be again that they had left the pastoral
state long behind, and that all their ideas associated themselves with
agriculture, with the division of the land, and with the recurring seasons for
planting. But language shows us that they had at most only begun some attempts
at cultivation, as a supplement to their natural means of livelihood, their
flocks and herds: for among the words common to the whole Aryan race there are
scarcely any connected with farming, whereas they are redolent of the herd, the
cattle-fold, the herdsman, the milking-time. Even the word daughter, which
corresponds to the Greek thugatêr and
the Sanskrit duhitar, means in the
last language “the milker”, and that seems to throw back the practice of milking
to a vastly remote antiquity.
On the other hand, the various Indo-European branches have different
names for the plough, one name for the German races, another for the
Graeco-Italic, and for the Sanskrit. And though aratrum has a clear connection with a Sanskrit root ar, it is not absolutely certain that it
ever had in this language the sense of ploughing, and not merely of wounding,
whence came the expression for ploughing as of wounding the earth.
Or say we wish to form some notion of the social life of the Aryans. Had
they extended ideas of tribal government? Had they kings, or were they held
together only by the units of family life? Our answer would come from an
examination of their common word for “king”. If they have no common word, then
we may guess that the title and office of kingship arose among the separate
Aryan people and received a name from each. Or is it that their common word for
king had first some simpler signification, “father”, perhaps, showing that
among the Aryan folk the social bond was still confined within the real or imaginary
boundary of the family? But in fact we do find a common word for king in
several of the languages which has no subsidiary meaning less than that of directing,
or keeping straight. This is the Latin rex,
the Gothic riks, Sanskrit rig, &c, and its earliest
ascertainable meaning was “the director”. The Aryans then, even in those days,
acknowledged as supreme some director chosen (probably) from out of the tribe,
a chief to lead their common warlike or migratory expeditions.
These are but illustrations of the method upon which all conclusions
touching these our ancestors are founded, and the manner of our knowledge
concerning them; far better obtained than merely by gazing upon the instruments
which have fallen from their hands, or the monuments they might have raised to
commemorate the dead. It is in fact just the difference between Shakespeare’s
statute in Westminster Abbey and that “livelong monument” whereof Milton spoke.
By perfecting beyond the power of any other race the wonderfully complex
faculty of speech the Aryans secured that their memory should be handed on the
more certainly, and with far greater completeness, than by records left
palpable to men’s eyes and hands. Many of their secret thoughts might be unlocked
by the same key. Already the same means are being used to give us glimpses of
their religious ideas. For the names of the common Aryan gods can be arrived at
by just the same comparative method: it may well happen that a name which is
only a proper name in one language, can in another be traced to a root which
unravels its original meaning. It is as with the word daughter. Here the
Sanskrit root seems to unravel the hidden—the lost, and so hidden—meaning in
the Greek or English words. So with a god, the meaning, hidden in the name from
those who used it in prayer or praise, becomes revealed to us by the divining
rod of our science.
And it is true, nevertheless, that the mine of wealth thus opened has as
yet been but cursorily explored. There are far more and greater fish in this
sea than ever came out of it. A strictly scientific method might be found for
classifying and tracing the changes which words undergo. Sometimes a word is
found greatly modified; sometimes it survives almost intact between the
different tongues. There must be some reason for this.
The question might be answered by means of an elaborate classification
under the head of the alterations which words have experienced, and such a
comparative vocabulary would lead to the solution of infinite questions
concerning the growth of nations. We should be able to look almost into the
minds of people long ago, better than we can examine the minds of contemporary
races in a lower mental condition, and see what ideas took a strong hold upon
them, what things they treated as realities, what metaphorically, and how large
for them was the empire of imagination. Then there is the boundless region of
proper names, both those of persons and geographical names. These last in every
country bear a certain witness to the races who have passed through that
country, and show—roughly at least—the order of their appearance there. The
older geographical names are those of natural features, rivers, mountains,
lakes, which have been never absent from the scene; the newer names are given
to the works of man. In our own country it is so. The names of our rivers
(Thames, Ouse, Severn, Wye) are Keltic, i.e. British; those of our towns are Teutonic, Saxon, or Norse. Some few Roman names
linger on, as in the name and termination “Chester”; but this, as meaning a
place of strength, shows us clearly the reason of its survival. Every European
country has changed hands, as ours has done; nay, every country in the world.
So here again we have promise of plenty of work for the philologist in
compiling a “Glossary of Proper Names” with etymologies.
Lastly, let it not be forgotten that a great part of all that has been
done for the Aryan can be done likewise for the Semitic languages—a field
scarcely yet turned by the plough; and the reader will confess the debt the
world is likely some day to owe to Comparative Philology.
CHAPTER
V.
the nation's of the old
world.
"When we try and gather
into one view the results of our inquiries upon the kindreds and nations of the
old world, it must be confessed we are struck rather by the extent of our
ignorance than of our knowledge. For all the light we are able to shed, the
movements and the passage of the various races in this pre-historic time appear
to the eye of the mind most like the movement of great hosts of men seen dimly
through a mist. Or shall we say that we are in the position of persons living
upon some one of many great military high�ways, while before their eyes"
pass continually bodies of troops in doubtful progress to and fro, affording to
them, where they stand, no indication of the order of battle or plan of the
campaign ? Still, to men in such a position there would be more or less of
intelligence possible in the way in which they watched the steps of those who
passed before them ; and we, too, though we cannot attempt really to follow the
track of mankind down from the earliest times, may yet gather some idea of the
changing positions which from age to age have been occupied by the larger
divisions of our race.
In the Bible
narrative continuous history begins, at the earliest, not before the time of
Abraham. In the earlier chap�ters of Genesis we find only scattered notices of
individuals who dwelt in one particular corner of the world, nothing to
indicate the general distribution of races, or the continuous lapse of time. It
is, moreover, a fact that, owing partly to the associations of childhood, we
are apt, by a too literal interpretation, to rob the narrative of some part of
its historical value. Here, proper names, which we might be inclined to take
for the names of single individuals, often stand for whole races, and sometimes
for the countries which gave their names to the people dwelling in them. "
Son of," too, must not be taken in its most literal meaning, but in the
wider, and in old languages the perfectly natural, sense of " descended
from." When nations kept the idea of a common ancestor before their minds,
in a way to which we of the present day are quite unfamiliar, it was very
customary to describe any one person of that people as the " son of "
the common ancestor. Thus a Greek who wished to bring before his hearers the
common nationality of the Greek people�the Hellenes�would speak of them as heing
the sons of Hellen, of the ^Eolians or Ionians as sons of ^Eolus or Ion. In
another way, again, an Athenian or Theban might speak of his countrymen as sons
of Athens or of Thebes. Such language among any ancient people is not poetical
or hyperholical language, but the usual speech of every day. So it is with the
Bible narrative, the earlier events are passed rapidly over. And if the remains
of the stone ages lift a little the veil which hides man's earliest doings upon
earth, it must be confessed that the light which these can shed is but slight
and partial. We catch sight of a portion of the human race making their rude
implements of stone and bone, living in caves as hunters and fishers, without
domestic animals and without agriculture, hut not without faculties which raise
them far ahove the level of the heasts by which they are surrounded. Yet of
these early men we may say we know not whence they come or whither they go. We
cannot tell whether the picture which we are able to form cf man of the earliest
time�of the first stone age�is a general or a partial picture; whether it
represents the majority of his fellow-creatures, or only a particular race
strayed from the first home of man.
We must therefore
content ourselves to resign the hope of anything like a review of man's life
since the beginning. Before we see him clearly, he had probably spread far and
wide over the earth, and already separated into the four most important
divisions of the race. In the present day, man may be divided into four or five
main divisions. The black, white, red, and yellow races of mankind are so named
from the colors of their skins, but have each many other pecu�liarities of form
and feature. The black race may again be divided into the negroes of Africa and
those of Australia, for these are of quite separate types. These last, the two
black races, are the least interesting people to be found over the face of the
globe, for there is nothing to show that from the very earliest ages to which
we can reascend they were not living just the same savage lives they are living
now. Therefore, as they seem to have gone through no changes, and have never,
until quite recent days, come into contact with historical peoples, they do not
fall within the limit of our inquiry. For similar reasons we may dismiss the
red race which peoples the whole continent of America, saving the extreme
north. Not that these have never changed or attained to any sort of
civilization, for we do find the traces of a certain primitive culture among
them, but because we have no means of con�necting this civilization with the
history of that part of the world which has had a history.
We are therefore left
to deal with the two remaining classes, the yellow and the white. The oldest,
that is to say apparently the least changed, of these is the yellow race, and
perhaps their most typical representatives are the Chinese. The type is a
sufficiently familiar one. " The skull of the yellow race is rounded in
form. The oval of the head is larger than with Europeans. The cheek-bones are
very projecting; the cheeks rise towards the temples, so that the outer corners
of the eyes are elevated; the eyelids seem half closed. The forehead is flat
above the eyes. The bridge of the nose is flat, the chin short, the cars dispro�portionately
large and projecting from the head. The color of the skin is generally yellow,
and in some branches turns to brown. There is little hair on the body; beard is
rare. The hair of the head is coarse, and, like the eyes, almost always
black."1 In the present day the different families of the globe
have gone through the changes which time and variety of climate slowly bring
about in all; and the yellow race have not escaped these influences. While some
of its members have, by a mixture with white races or by gradual improvement,
reached a type not easily distin�guishable from the European, others have, by
the effect of climate, approached more nearly to the characteristics of the
black family. We may, however, still class these divergent types under the head
of the yellow race which we consequently find extending over a vast portion of
our globe. Round the North Pole the Esquimaux, the Lapps, and the Finns form a
belt of people belonging to this division of mankind. Over all Northern and
Central Asia the various tribes of Mongolian or Turanian race inhabiting the
plains of Siberia and of Tartary, the Thibetans, the Chinese, Siamese, and
other kindred peoples of Eastern Asia, are members of this yellow family. From
the Malay peninsula the same race has spread southward, passing from land to
land over the countless isles which cover the South Pacific, until they have
reached the islands which lie around the Australian continent. A wide tract of
land, stretching from Greenland in a curved line, through North America and
China, downwards to the southern portion of Van Diemen's Land or New Zealand,
and again westward from China through Tartary or Siberia, up to Lapland in the
north of Europe.
From the results of
the previous chapter we see that to the yellow race must be attributed all
those peoples of Europe and Asia which speak either monosyllabic or
agglutinative languages, and therefore that for the white race are left the
inflected tongues. These, it will be remembered, we divided into two great
families, the Semitic and the Aryan or Japhetic. We thus see that from the
earliest times to which we are able to point we have living in Europe and Asia
these three divisions of the human family, whom we may look npon as the
descendants of Ham, Shem, and Japhet. What relationship the other excluded
races of mankind, the black and red, bear to the Hamites, Shemites, and
Japhetites, is a question as yet too undecided for discussion here. Beyond the
pure Shemites, that is in the north of Africa and. on the shores of the Red Sea
and Persian Gulf, lived in earliest ages a race whom it is difficult to
classify under any of these heads. They may have been formed by an admixture of
Shemites with the real negroes, or from a like admixture with the Turanian
races. A partially Turanian origin we may be pretty sure they had. These people
are called in the Bible Cush'ites, and formed the stock from which the Egyptian
and Chaldaean nations were mainly formed.
But though from the
earliest times there were probably in Asia these three divisions of mankind,
their relative position and importance was very different from what it is now.
Every year the Turanian races are shrinking and dwindling before the
descendants of Japhet. At the moment at which I write it is the Aryan Slaves
who are endeavoring to push the Mongolian Turks from their last foothold in
Europe;1 and great as is the space which the Turanian people now
occupy over the face of the globe, there is reason to believe that in early pre�historic
times they were still more widely extended. In all probability the men of the
polished-stone age in Europe and Asia were of this yellow-skinned Mongolian
type. We know that the human remains of this period seem to have come from a
round-skulled people; and this roundness of the skull is one of the chief marks
of the Mongolians as distinguished from the white races of mankind. We know too
that the earliest inhabitants of India belonged -to a Turanian, and therefore
to a yellow, race; and that Turanians mingled with one of the oldest historical
Semitic peoples, and helped to produce the civilization of the Chaldasans. And
as, more�over, we find in various parts of Asia traces of a civilization
similar to that of Europe during the latter part of the polished-stone age, it
seems not unreasonable, in casting our eye back upon the remotest antiquity on
which research sheds any light, to suppose an early widespread Turanian or
Mongolian family extending over the greater part of Europe and Asia. These
Turanians were in various stages of civilization or barbarism, from the rude
condition of the hunters and fishers of the Danish shell-mounds to a higher
state reigning in Central and Southern Asia, and similar to that which was
afterwards attained towards the end of the polished-stone age in Europe. The earliest
home of these pure Turanians was probably a region lying some�where to the east
of Lake Aral. " There," says a writer from whom we have already
quoted, " from very remote antiquity they had possessed a peculiar
civilization, characterized by gross Sabeism, peculiarly materialistic
tendencies, and com�plete want of moral elevation; but at the same time, by an
extraordinary development in some branches of knowledge, �great progress in material culture in some
respects, while in others they remained in an entirely rudimentary state. This
strange and incomplete civilization exercised over great part of Asia an
absolute preponderance, lasting, according to the historian Justin, 1500
years."
As regards its
pre-historic remains, we know that this civilization, or half-civilization, was
especially distinguished by the raising of enormous grave-mounds and
altar-stones, and it must have been characterized by strong, if not by the most
elevated, religious ideas, and by a peculiar reverence paid to the dead. Now it
is by characteristics very similar to these that the civilization of Egypt is
distinguished, and Egypt, of all nations which have possessed a history, is the
oldest. '
Are we not justified,
therefore, in considering this Egyptian civilization, which is in some sort the
dawn of history in the world, as the continuation�the improvement, no doubt,
but still the continuation�of the half-civilization of the age of stone, a
culture handed on from the Turanian to the Cushite peoples ? "\V e may
look upon this very primitive form of culture as spreading first through Asia,
and later on outwards to the west. Four thousand and five thousand years before
Christ are the dates disputed over as those of Menes, the first re�corded King
of Egypt. And Egypt even at this early time seems to have emerged from the age
of stone and been possessed, at any rate, of bronze. The second date, 4000 b.c., probably
marks the beginning of the more extended stone-age life of Europe. It was
therefore with this early culture as it has been with subsequent completed
civilizations,
" Nosque ubi
primus equis Oriens afflavit auhelis Illic sera rubens ascendit luniina
Vesper."
The Egyptian
civilization which (for us) begins with Menes, say 4000 b.c., reaches its zenith under the
third and fourth dynasty, under the builders of thepyramids some eight hundred
or a thousand years afterwards. Then in its full strength the Egyptian life
rises out of the past like a giant peak, or like its own pyramids out of the
sandy plains. It is cold and rigid, like a mass of granite, but it is so great
that it seems to defy all efforts of time. Even when the Egyptians first come
before us everything seems to point them out as a
people already old, whether it be their enormous tombs and temples, their elabo�rately
ordered social life, or their complicated religious system, with its long
mysterious ritual. For all this, the Egyptian life and thought present two
elements of character which may well spring from the union of two distinct
nationalities. Its enormous tombs and temples and its excessive care for the
bodies of the dead�f or what are the pyramids but exaggerations of the
stone-age grave-mounds and the temples, but improvements upon the megalithic
dolmens ?�recall the era of stone-age culture. The evident remains of an early
animal worship show a descent from a low form of religion, such a religion as
we find among Turanian or African races. But with them co-existed some much
grander features. The Egyptians were intellectual in the highest degree,�in the
highest degree then known to the world; and, unlike the stone-age men,
succeeded in other than merely mechanical arts. In astronomy they were rivalled
by but one nation, the Chaldaeans; in painting and sculpture they were at the
head of the world, and were as nearly the inventors of history as of writing
itself,�not quite of
either, as will be seen hereafter. Mixed too with their animal worship were
some lofty religious conceptions sketching not only beyond it�the animal worship�but beyond
that " natural," poly�theism which was the earliest creed of our own
ancestors the Aryans; and a noble hope and ambition for the future of the soul.
Were these higher facts due to the influx of Semitic blood ? It seems likely,
when we remember how from the same race came a chosen people to whom the world
is indebted for all that is greatest in religious thought.
During the fourth and
fifth dynasties, or some three or four thousand years before Christ, Egypt and
the Egyptians do, as we have said, rise up distinctly out of the region of mere
conjecture. Three or four thousand years before Christ�five or six thousand
years ago: this is no small distauce through which toff lookback to the.place where the first mountain-peak of
history appears in view. What was doing in the other unseen regions round this
mountain ? Or, in plainer language, what was the life of the other peoples of
the world at this time ? Perhaps in two places upon the globe and no more might
then have been found a civilization at all comparable with that of Egypt. These
places are the Tigro-Euphrates valley and China.
The kingdom of the
Chakkeans lay in the lower regions of the Tigris and Euphrates, where these
rivers approach their streams to one another and to the Persian Gulf. The land
through which the rivers flow is a broad alluvial plain, lying like Egypt
closely encompassed by sandy desert, so as to form the second oasis (Egypt
being the first), whieh breaks the monotonous belt of waste land stretching
south-west and north-east, across the whole of our older hemisphere. It was
natural that these two fruitful plains�rivalling each other in productiveness
of soil � should be the earliest hotbeds for unfolding the germs of
civilization planted by Turanian men.
It is here, in the
Tigro-Euphrates basin, that the Bible places the earliest history of the human
race. " And it came to pass that as they journeyed from the East they
found a plain in the land of Shinar; and they dwelt there."�Genesis xi. 2. Here too
is placed the building of Babel, and the subsequent dispersion of the human
family. The oldest monuments of the country show it inhabited by a mixed people
speaking a language Semitic in form, but Cushite and also Turanian in
vocabulary. Here therefore the Turanian element was more marked than upon the
banks of the Nile.
The civilization was
also later than in Egypt. The earliest chronicles upon which we can place
reliance begin about 2234 B.C., with Nimrod "the son of Cush," i.e. of Cushite or Ethio�pian
race. This was not many hundred years before the time of Abraham. The cities
which he built were, says the Bible, Erech and Ur (the present Warka and
Mugheir), Accad and Calneh, of all which some monumental remains are still
left. After a while the reigning family of Nimrod gave place�whether through
conquest or not we do not know�to another, still of the same race, coming from Elam,
a neighbor coun�try including part of the mountainous country north of the
Tigro-Euphrates basin; and this country was incorporated with older Chaldiea.
The accession of strength thus gained to his crown induced one of the kings of
the Elamitic line, Kudurla-gomer (Chedorlaomer) by name, to aspire towards a
wider em�pire. He sent his armies against the Semitic nations on his west, who
were now beginning to settle down in cities, and to enjoy their share of the
civilization of Egypt and Chaldaja. These he subdued, but after sixteen years
they rebelled; and it was after a second expedition to punish their
recalcitrancy, wherein he had conquered the kings of Sodom and Gomorrah, and
had among
the prisoners taken Lot, the nephew of Abraham, that Chedorlaomer was pursued
and defeated by the patriarch. " And when Abraham heard that his brother
was taken captive, he armed his trained servants, born in his own house, three
hundred and eighteen, and pursued them unto Dan. And he divided himself against
them, he and his servauts, by night, and smote them, and pursued them unto
Hobah, which is on the left hand of Damascus. And he brought back all the
goods, and also brought again his brother Lot, and his goods, and the women
also, and the people."�Gen. xiv.
The conquest of a
powerful Chaldsean king by a handful of wandering Semites seems extraordinary,
and might have sounded a note of warning to the ear of the Chaldasans. Their
kingdom was destined soon to be overthrown by another Semitic people. After a
duration of about half a thousand years for the Elamite kingdom, and some seven
hundred years since the time of Nimrod, the Chaldsean dynasty was overthrown
and succeeded by an Arabian one, that is, by a race of nomadic Shemites from
the Arabian plains; and after two hundred and forty-five years they in their
turn succumbed to another more powerful people of the same race, the Assyrians.
The empire thus founded upon the ruins of the old Chaldsean was one of the
greatest of the ancient world, as we well know from the records which meet us
in the Bible. Politically it may be said to have balanced the power of Egypt.
But the stability of this monarchy rested upon a basis much less firm than that
of Egypt; the southern portion�the old Chaldsea�of which Babylon was the
capital, was always ready for revolt, and after about seven hundred years the
Babylonians and Medes succeeded in overthrowing their former conquerors. All
this belongs to history�or at least to chronicle�and is therefore scarcely a
part of our present inquiry.
The Chinese profess to extend their
lists of dynasties seven, eight, or even ten thousand years backward, but there
is nothing on which to rest such extravagant pretensions. Their earliest known
book is believed to date from the twelfth century before Christ. It i?
therefore not probable that they possessed the art of writing more than fifteen
hundred years before our era, and before writing is invented there can be no
reliable history. The best record of early times then is to be found in the popular songs of a country, and of
these China possessed a considerable number, which were collected into a book�the
Book of Odes�by their sage Confucius.1 The picture which these odes
present is of a society so very different from that of the time from which
their earliest book �the Book of Changes�dates, that we cannot refuse to credit
it with a high antiquity. From the songs we learn that before China coalesced
into the monarchy which has lasted so many years, its inhabitants lived in a
sort of feudal state, governed by a number of petty princes and lords. The
pastoral life which distinguished the surrounding Turanian nations had already
been exchanged for a settled agricultural one, to which houses, and all the
civilization which these 'mply> had long been familiar. For the
rest, their life seems to have been then, as now, a simple, slow-moving one,
but not devoid of piety and domestic affection. This, then, is the third
civilization which may- have existed in the world when the pyramids were being
built. It seems to be remote alike from the half-civilization of the other
Mongolian people of the stone age, and from the mixed Turauian-Semitic civi�lizations
of Egypt and Ohaldasa. To these three may we add a fourth, and believe in the
great antiquity of the highest civilization of the red race ? The trace of an early civiliza�tion in Mexico and
Peru, bearing many remarkable points of resemblance to the civilization of
Chaldeea, is undoubted; but there is nothing to show that the identity in some
of their features extended to an identity in their respective epochs.
A greater destiny,
though a more tardy development, awaited the pure Semitic and Japhetic races.
Among the former we might notice many nations which started into life during
the thousand years following that date of 3000 b.c., which we have taken as our
starting-point. Most conspicuous among these stand the Phoenicians, who, either
in their early home upon the sea-coast of Syria, or in their second home, the
sea itself, or in one of their countless colonies, came into contact with
almost every one of the great nations of antiquity, from the Egyptians, the
Assyrians, and the Israelites, to the Greeks and Romans. But it is upon the
life and history of the nomadic Shemites, and among them of one chosen people,
that our thoughts chiefly rest. Among the prouder citied nations which
inhabited the plains of the Tigris and Euphrates, from the Mediterranean to the
Caspian Sea, dwelt a numerous people, more or less nomadic in their habits,
under the patriarchal form of government which belonged to their mode of life.
Among such a people the chief of one particular family or clan was called by
God to escape from the influence of the idolatrous nations around, and to live
that vagrant pastoral life which was in such an age most fitted for the needs
of purity and religious contemplation. It is as something like a wandering
Bedouin chieftain that we must picture Abraham, while we watch him, now joining
with some small city king ao-ainst another, now driven by famine to travel with
his flocks and herds as far as Egypt. Then again he returns, and settles in the
fertile valley of the Jordan, where Lot leaves him, and, seduced by the
luxuries of a town life, quits his flocks and herds and settles in Sodom, till
driven out again by the destruction of that city. And all through we are not
now reading dry dynastic lists, but the very life and thought of that old time.1 To us�whose lives are so unsimple�the mere picture of this simple nomadic life
of early days would have an interest and a charm; but it has a double charm and
interest viewed by the light of the high destiny to which Abraham and his
descendants were called. Plying the homely, slighted shepherd's trade, these people�for
all their glorious destiny�lived poor and despised beside the rich monarchies
of Egypt or Chaldaea; one more example, if one more were needed, how wide apart
lie the empires of spiritual and of material things.
Up to very late times
the Children of Israel bore many of the characteristics of a nomadic people. It
was as a nation of shepherds that they were excluded from the national life of
Egypt. For long years after their departure thence they led a wandering life,
and though when they entered Palestine they found cities ready for their
occupation�for the nations which they dispossessed were for the most part
settled people, builders of cities�and inhabited them, and, growing corn and
wine, settled partly into an agricultural life, yet the chief wealth of the
nation still probably consisted in their flocks, and the greater portion of the
people still dwelt in tents. This was, perhaps, especially the case with the
people of the north, for even so late as the separation, when the ten tribes
determined to free themselves from the tyranny of Rehoboam, we know how
Jeroboam cried out, "To your tents, oh Israel." " So Israel
departed unto their tents " the narrative continues. After the separation
we are told that Jeroboam built several cities in his own dominions. The
history of the Israelites generally may be summed up as the constant expression
and the ultimate triumph of a wish to exchange their simple life and theocratic
government for one which might place them more on a level with their neighbor
states. At first it is their religion which they wish to change, whether for
the gorgeous ritual of Egypt or for the vicious creeds of Asiatic nations; and
after a while, madly forgetful of the tyrannies of a Ramses or a
Tiglath-Pileser, they desire a king to reign over them in order that they may
"take their place" among the other Oriental monarchies. Still their
first two kings have rather the character of military leaders, the monarchy not
having become hereditary; the second, the warrior-poet, the greatest of Israel's
sons, was himself in the beginning no more than a simple shepherd. But under
his son Solomon the monarchical government becomes assured, the country attains
(like Rome under Augustus) the summit of its splendor and power, and then
enters upon its career of slow and sad decline.
Xow let us turn to
the Japhetic people�the Aryans. It is curious that the date of three thousand
years before Christ, from which we started in our glance over the world, should
also be considered about that of the separation of the Aryan people. Till that
time they had continued to live�since when we know not�in their early home near
the Oxus and Jaxartes, and we are able by the help of comparative philology to
gain some little picture of their life at the time immediately preceding the
separation. For taking a word out of one of the Aryan languages and making
allowance for the changed form which it would wear in the other tongues, if we
find the same word with the same meaning reappearing in all the languages of
the family, we may fairly assume that the thing for which it stands was known to the old Aryans before
the separation. And' if again we find a word which runs through all the
European lauguages, but is not found in the Sanskrit and Persian, we guess that
in this case the thing was known only to the Yavanas, the first separating body
of younger Aryans, from whom it will be remembered'all the European branches
are descended. Thus we get a very interesting list of words, and the means of
drawing a picture of the life of our primaeval ancestors. The earliest appear�ance
of the Aryans is as a pastoral people, for words derived from the pastoral life
have left the deepest traces on their language. Daughter, we saw, meant
originally "the milker"; the name of money, and of booty, in many
Aryan languages is derived from that of cattle;1 words which have
since come to mean lord or prince originally meant the guardian of the cattle;2 and others which have expanded into words for district or country, or even for
the whole earth, meant at first simply the pasturage. So not without reason did
we say that the king had grown out of the head of the family, and the pens of
their sheepfolds expanded iuto walled cities. But though a pastoral, they do
not seem to have been a nomadic race, and in this respect they differed from
the Shemites of the same period, and from the Turanians, by whom they were
surrounded. For the Turanian civilization had pretty well departed from Asia by that time, and having taught
its lessons to Egypt and Chaldasa, lived on, if at all, in Europe only. There
it faded before the advance of the Kelts and other Aryan people, who came
bringing with them the use of bronze weapons and the civilization which
belonged to the bronze age. The stone age lingered in the lake dwellings of
Switzerland, as we thought, till about two thousand years before Christ, and it
may be that this date, which is also nearly that of Abraham, represents within
a few hundred years the entry of the Aryans into Europe. The Greeks are
generally believed to have appeared in Greece, or at least in Asia Minor, about
the nineteenth century before our era, and they were probably preceded by the
Latin branch of the Pelasgic family, as well as by the Kelts in the north of
Europe. So that the period of one thousand years which intervened between our
starting-point and the call of Abraham, the starting-point of the Hebrew
history, and which saw the growth and change of many great Asiatic monarchies,
must for the Japhetites be only darkly filled up by the gradual separation of
the different nations, and their unknown life between this separation and the
time when they again become known to history.
The general result
then of our inquiries into the grouping of nations of the world in pre-historic
times may be sketched in rough outline. At a very early date, say 4000 or 5000 b.c., arose
an extensive Turanian half-civilization, which, flourishing probably in
Southern Asia, spread in time to India and China upon one side, on the other
side to Europe. This was through�out, so far as we can tell, a stone age, and
was especially distinguished by the raising- of great tombs and grave-mounds.
This civilization was communicated to the Egyptians and Chaldaeans, a mixed
people�Semite, Turanian, Ethiopian� who were not strangers to the use of
metals. As early as 3000 years before our era the civilization of Egypt had
attained its full growth, and had probably even then a con�siderable past. Chaldea
too and China were both advanced out of their primitive state; possibly so also were Peru and
Mexico. But the pure Semite people, the ancestors of the Jews, and the Aryans,
were still pastoral races, the one by the banks of the Tigris and Euphrates,
the other by the banks of the Jaxartes and the Oxus. The first of these
continued pastoral and nomadic for hundreds of years, but about this time the
Western Aryans separated from those of the East, and soon after added some use
of agriculture to their shepherd life. Then between 3000 and 2000 b.c. came the
separation of the various peoples of the Western Aryans and their migration
towards Europe, where they began to appear at the latter date. After all the
Western Aryans had left the East, the older Aryans seem to have lived on for
some little time together, and at last to have separated into the nations of
Iranians and Hindus, the first migrating southward, and the second crossing the
Hindoo-Koosh and descending into the plains of the Indus and the Ganges. Thence
they drove away or exterminated most of the older Turanian inhabitants, as
their brethren had a short time before done to the Turanians whom they found in
Europe. Such were the doings of the different kindreds and nations and
languages of the old world in times long before history.
We have seen, so far, that the early traces
of man's existence point to a gradual improvement in the state of his
civilization, to the acquirement of fresh knowledge, and the practice of fresh
arts. The rude stone implements of the early drift-period are replaced by the
more carefully manufactured ones of the polished-stone age, and these again are
succeeded by implements of bronze and of iron. By degrees also the arts of
domesticating animals and of tilling the land are learnt; and by degrees the
art of writing is developed from the early pictorial rock-sculptures. Now, in
order that each step in this process of civilization should be preserved for
the benefit of the next generation, and that the people of each period should
start from the vantage-ground obtained by their pre�decessors, there must have
been frequent intercommunication between the different individuals who lived at
the same time; so that the discovery or improvement of each one should be made
known to others, and become part of the common stock of human knowledge. In the
very earliest times, then, men probably lived collected together in societies
of greater or less extent. We know that this is the case now with all savage
tribes; and as in many respects the early races of the drift-beds seem to have
resembled some now existing savage tribes in their mode of life, employing, to
a certain extent, the same implements, and living on the same sort of food,
this adds to the probability of their gregariousness. The fact, too, that .the
stone implements of the drift-period have generally been found collee ted near
together in particular places, indicates these
places as the sites of early settlements. Beyond this, however, we can say very
little of the social state of these drift-bed people. No trace of any
burial-ground or tomb of so great an antiquity has yet been found, and all that
we can say of them with any certainty is, that their life must have been very
rude and primitive. Although they were collected together in groups, these
groups could not have been large, and they must have been generally situated at
a considerable distance from each other, for the only means for support for the
men of that time was derived from hunting and fishing. Now it requires a very
large space of land to support a man who lives entirely by hunting; and this
must have been more particularly the case in those times when the weapons used
by the huntsman were so rude that it is difficult for us now to understand how
he could ever have succeeded in obtaining an adequate supply of food by such
means. Supposing that the same extent of territory were required for the
support of a man in those times as was required in Australia by the native
population, the whole of Europe could only have supported about 76,000
inhabitants, or about one person to every 4,000 now in existence.
The earliest traces
of anything like fixed settlements which have beeu found are the "
kitchen-middens.'" The extent of some of these clearly shows that they
mark the dwelling-places of considerable numbers of people collected together.
But here only the rudest sort of civilization could have existed, and the bonds
of society must have been as primitive and simple as they are among savage
tribes at the present time, who support existence in much the same way as the
shell-mound people did. In order that social customs should attain any
development, the means of existence must be sufficiently abundant and easily
procurable to permit some time to be devoted to the accumulation of
superfluities, or of supplies not immediately required for use. But the life of
the primitive hunter and fisher is so precarious and arduous, that he has
rarely either the opportunity or the will for any other employ�ment than the
supply of his immediate wants. The very uncertainty of that supply seems rather
to create recklessness than providence, and the successful chase is generally
followed by a period of idleness and gluttony, till exhaustion of sup�plies
once more compels to activity. That the shell-mound people were subject to such
fluctuation of supply we may gather from the fact that bones of foxes and other
carnivorous animals are frequently found in those mounds; and as these animals
are rarely eaten by human beings, except under the pressure of necessity, we
may conclude that the shell-mound people were driven to support existence by
this means, through their ill-success in fishing and hunting, and their want of
any accumulation of stores to supply deficiencies.
The next token of
social improvement that is observable is in the tumuli or grave-mounds, which
may be referred to a period somewhat later than that of the shell-mounds. These
contain indications that the people who constructed them possessed some
important elements necessary to their social progress. They had a certain
amount of time to spare after providing for their daily wants, and they did not
spend that time exclusively in idleness. The erection of these mounds must have
been a work of considerable labor, and they often contain highly-finished
implements and ornaments, which must have been put there for the use of the
dead. They are evidences that no little honor was sometimes shown to the dead;
so that some sort of religion must have existed amongst the people who
constructed them. The importance of this element in early society is evident if
we inquire further for whom and by whom these mounds were erected. Now they are
not sufficiently numerous, and are far too' laborious in their construction, to
have been the ordinary tombs of the common people. They were probably tombs
erected for chiefs or captains of tribes to whom the tribes were anxious to pay
especial honor. We do not know at all how- these separate tribes or clans came
into existence, and what bonds united their members together; but so soon as we
find a tribe erecting monuments in honor of its chiefs, we may conclude that it
has attained a certain amount of compactness and solidity in its internal
relations. Amongst an uneducated people there is probably no stronger tie than
that of a common faith, or a common subject of reverence. It is impossible not
to believe then that the people who made these great, and in some cases
elaborately constructed tombs, would continue ever after to regard them as in
some sort consecrated to the great chiefs who were buried under them. Each
tribe would have its own specially sacred tombs, and perhaps we may here see a
germ of that ancestor-worship which may be traced in every variety of religious
belief.
It has been supposed
by some that a certain amount of com�merce or barter existed in the later stone
age. The reason for thi s opinion is that implements of stone are frequently
found in localities where the stone of which they are made is not native. At
Presigny le Grand, in France, there exists a great quantity of a particular
kind of flint which seems to have been very convenient for the manufacture of
implements; for the fields there are covered with flint-flakes and chips which
have been evidently knocked off in the process of chipping out the knives, and
arrowheads, and hatchets which the stone-age men were so fond of. Now implements
made of this particular kind of flint arc found in various localities, some of
which are at a great distance from Presigny; and it has therefore been supposed
that Presigny was a sort of manufactory for flint weapons which were bartered
to neighboring tribes, and by them again perhaps to others further off; and so
these weapons gradually got dispersed. But it is also possible that the tribes
of the interior, who would subsist almost exclusively by hunting, and would
therefore be of a more wandering disposition than those on the sea-coast, may
have paid occa�sional visits to this flint reservoir for the purpose of
supplying themselves with weapons of a superior quality, just as the American
Indians are said to go to the quarry of Coteau des Prairies on account of the
particular kind of stone which is found there.
In any case, any
system of barter which was carried on at that time was of a very primitive
kind, and not of frequent enough occurrence to produce any important effects on
the social condition of the people. That that condition had already advanced to
some extent from its original rudeness, shows us that there existed, at all
events, some capacity for improvement among the tribes which then inhabited
Europe; but, when we compare them with modern tribes of savages, whose apparent
condition is much the same as theirs was, and who do not seem to have made any
advance for a long period, or, so far as we can judge, to be capable of making
any advance by their own unassisted efforts, we cannot but conclude that the
stone-age people, if left to themselves, would only have emerged out of
barbarism by very slow degrees. Now we know that, about the time when bronze
implements first began to be used, some very important changes also occurred in
the manners and customs of the inhabitants of Europe. A custom of burning the
dead supersedes then the older one of burial; domestic animals of various sorts
seem to have been introduced, and the bronze implements themselves show, both
in the elaborateness of their workmanship and the variety of their designs,
that a great change had come over European civilization. The greatness and
completeness of this change, the fact that there are no traces of those
intermediate steps which we should naturally expect to find in the development
of the arts, denote that this change was due to some invading population which
brought with it the arts that had been perfected in its earlier home; and other
circumstances point to the East as that earlier home from which this wave of civilization
advanced. Language has taught us that at various times there have been large
influxes of Aryan populations into Europe. To the first of these Aryan invaders
probably was due the introduction of bronze into Europe, together with the
various social changes which appear to have accompanied its earliest use. To
trace then the rise and progress of the social system which the Aryans had
adopted previous to their appearance in Europe, we must go to their old Asiatic
home, and see if anv of the steps by which this system had sprung up, or any
indications of its nature, may be extracted from the records of antiquity.
Hitherto scarcely any
attempt has been made to discover or investigate pre-historic monuments in the
East. We can no longer therefore appeal to the records of early tombs or
temples, to the indications of early seats of population; but though as yet
this key to Aryan history has not been made available, we have another guide
ready to take us by the hand, and show us what sort of lives our ancestors used
to lead in their far-off Eastern home. That guide is the science of Language,
which can teach us a great deal about this if we will listen to its lessons : a
rich mine of knowledge which has as yet been only partially explored, but one
from which every day new information is being obtained about the habits and
customs of the men of pre-historic times.
All that we know at
present of the Aryan race indicates that its social organization originated in
a group which is usually called the Patriarchal Family, the members of which
were all related to each other either by blood or marriage. At the head of the
family was the patriarch, the eldest male descendant of its founder. The other
members, consisting of all the remaining males descended on the father's side
from the original ancestor, and their wives, and such of the females also descended on the father's side
from the same ancestor as ay ere still unmarried. To show more clearly exactly Avhat people Avere members of a patriarchal family, we will trace such a family for a couple of generations
from the original founder. Suppose then the original founder married, and with
several children, both sons and daughters.
All the sons would continue members of this family. The daughters would only
continue members until they married, when they Avould'eease to be members of the family of their birth, and
become members of their respective husbands' families. So when the sons of the
founder married, their wives would
become members of the family; and such of their children as were sons would be members, and such as were daughters would be members only until they married; and so on
through succeeding generations. On the founder's
death he would be succeeded as patriarch by his eldest son. On the eldest son's death, he would be succeeded by hix eldest son, if he had a son; and if not, then by his
next brother. The patriarchal family also included in its circle, in later times at all events, slaves and other people, who, although perhaps not really relations at all, were adopted into the
household, assumed the family name, and were looked upon for all purposes as if
its actual members. This little group of individuals seems originally to have existed entirely indepen�dent
of any external authority. It
supported itself by its own industry, and recognized no other law or authority than its own. The
only source of authority within this little state was the patriarch, who was originally regarded, not only
as the owner of all the property of which the family was possessed,
but also as having unlimited power over the different individuals of which it was composed. All the members lived together, under the same roof, or
within the same enclosure. No
member could say that an}' single
thing was his own property. Everything belonged to the family, and every member was responsible to the patriarch
for his actions.
Although originally
the power of the patriarch may have been almost absolute over the other members
of the family, it must very early have become modified and
controlled by the growth of various customs. Indeed, in trying to picture to ourselves
these early times, when as yet no regular notions of law had arisen, it is
important to remember how great a force was possessed by custom. Even now, when
we dis�tinguish pretty clearly between law and custom, we still feel the great
coercive and restraining powers of the latter in all the affairs of life. But
when no exact notions of law had been formed, it seemed an almost irresistible
argument in favor of a particular action that it had always been performed
before. There would thus spring up in a household certain rules of conduct for
the different members, certain fixed limits to their respective family duties.
Before any individual would be commanded by the patriarch to do any particular
duty, it would come to be inquired whether it was customary for such a duty to
be assigned to such an individual. Before the patriarch inflicted any
punishment on a member of the family, it would come to be inquired whether and
in what manner it had been customary to punish the particular act complained
of. Many things would tend to increase this regard for custom. The obvious
advantages resulting from regularity and certainty in the ordering of the
family life would soon be felt, and thus a public opinion in favor of custom
would be created. Ancestor-worship too, which plays so conspicuous a part in
early Aryan civilization, acted, no doubt, as a powerful strengthener of the
force of custom, as is indicated by the fact that in man}' nations the traditionary
originator of their laws is some powerful ancestor to whom the nation is
accustomed to pay an especial reverence.
Resulting from this
development of custom into law in the early family life of the Aryans, we find
that special duties soon became assigned to persons occupying particular
positions. To the young men of the household were assigned the more active
outdoor employments; to the maidens the milking of the cows; to the elder Women
other household duties. And the importance of knowing what the customs were
also gave rise to the family council, or " sabh& " as it is
called in Sanskrit, which consisted of the elders of the family, the "
sabhocita," presided overbythe "sabhapati," or president of the
assembly. The importance attached to the decisions of this council was so
great, that the " sabya," or decrees of tha " sabha," came
to be used simply to express law or custom. It is probable therefore that this
assembly regulated to a great extent the customs and laws of the family in its
internal management and also superintended any negotiations carried on with
other families. To complete our picture of the patriarchal family, we have the
traditions of three distinct customs affecting its internal economy. Two of
these, the maintenance of the sacred house-fire, and the marriage ceremony,
probably date back to a very remote period; and the third, the custom of
adoption, though of later development, may be regarded, in its origin at least,
as primitive. Fire is itself so wonderful in its appearance and effects, so
good a servant, so terrible a master, that we cannot feel any surprise at its
having attracted a great deal of attention in early times. The traces of
fire-worship are so widely spread over the earth that there is scarcely a
single race whose traditions are entirely devoid of tham. But the sacred
house-fire of the Aryans is interesting to us chiefly in its connection with
other family customs in which it played an important part. This fire, which was
perpetually kept burning on the family hearth, seems to have been regarded, in
some sort, as a living family deity, who watched over and assisted the
particular family to which it belonged. It was by its aid that the food of the
family was cooked, and from it was ignited the sacrifice or the funeral pyre.
It was the centre of the family life; the hearth on which it burned was in the
midst of the dwelling, and no stranger was admitted into its presence. When the
members of the family met together to partake of their meals, a part was always
first offered to the fire by whose aid they were prepared; the patriarch acted
as officiating priest in this as in every other family ceremony; and to the
patriarch's wife was confided the especial charge of keeping the fire supplied
with fuel.
By marriage, as we
have seen, a woman became a member of her husband's family. She ceased to be
any longer a member of the household in which she was born, for the family life
was so isolated that it would have been impossible to belong at once to two
different families. So we find that the marriage ceremony chiefly consisted in
an expression of this change of family by the wife. In general, however, it was
preceded by a treaty between the two families, a formal offer of marriage made
by the intending husband's family on his behalf, together with a gift to the
bride's family, which was regarded as the price paid for the bride. If all
preliminary matters went forward favorably, then, on the day fixed for the
marriage, the different members of the bridegroom's family -went to the household
of the bride and demanded her. After some orthodox delay, in which the bride
was expected to express unwillingness to go, she was formally given up to those
who demanded her, the patriarch of her household solemnly dismissing her from
it and giving up all authority, over her. She was then borne in triumph to the
bridegroom's house; and, on entering it, was carried over the threshold, so as
not to touch it with her feet; thus expressing that her entry within the house
was not that of a mere guest or stranger. She was then, before the house-fire,
solemnly admitted into her husband's family, and as a worshipper at the family
altar.
This ceremony was
subject to a great many variations amongst the different Aryan races; but in
every one of them some trace of it is to be found, and always apparently
intended to express the same idea, the change of the bride's family. Adoption,
which in later times became extremely common among the Romans�the race which
seems in Europe to have preserved most faithfully the old Aryan family type
�originated in a sort of extension of the same theory that admitted of the
wife's entry into her husband's family, as almost all the details of the
ceremony of adoption are copied from that of marriage. Cases must have occurred
pretty often where a man might be placed in such a position as to be without a
family. He may have become alienated from his own kindred by the commission of
some crime, or all his relatives may have died from natural causes or been
killed in war. In the condition in which society was then, such a man would be
in a peculiarly unenviable position. There would be no one in whom he could
trust, no one who would be the least interested in or bound to protect him.
Thus wandering as an outlaw, without means of defence from enemies, and unable
to protect his ^possessions if he chanced to have any, or to obtain means of
subsistence if he had none, he would "be very desirous of becoming a
member of some other family, in order that he might find in it the assistance and
support necessary for his own welfare. It might also sometimes happen, that
owing to a want of male descendants some house might be in danger of
extinction. Now the extinction of a family was a matter of peculiar dread to
its members. Connected with the worship of the hearth was the worship of the
ancestors of the family. It was the duty of each patriarch to offer sacrifices on
stated occasions to the departed spirits of his ancestors; and it was
considered as a matter of the utmost importance that these sacrifices should be
kept up, in order to insure the happiness of those departed spirits after
death. So important indeed was this held to be, that it was reckoned as one of
the chief duties which each patriarch had to perform, and the family property
was regarded as especially dedicated to this object in priority to every other.
It would therefore be the ehief care of each head of a household to leave male
descend�ants, in order that the offerings for his own and his ancestor's
benefit might be continued after his death. The only person, however, capable
of performing these rites was a member of the same family, one who joined in
the same worship by the same household fire: so if all the males of a family
were to die out, these rights must of necessity cease.
Now the marriage
ceremony had already supplied a precedent for introducing members into a house
who were not born in it. It was very natural, then, that this principle should
be extended to the introduction of males when there was any danger of the male
line becoming extinct. This was done by the ceremony of adoption, which was in
many respects similar to that of marriage, being a formal renunciation of the
person adopted by the patriarch of his original family, in case he was a member
of one, and a formal acceptance and admission into the new family of his
adoption, of which he was thenceforward regarded as a regular member. This
ceremony exhibits in a very marked manner the leading peculiarity of the
patriarchal household. We see how completely isolated, in theory, such a group
was from the rest of the world; having its own distinct worship, in which no
one but its own members were permitted to share, reverencing its own ancestors
only, who might receive worship from none but their descendants. So jealously was
this separation of families guarded, that it was impossible for a man or woman
at the same time to worship at two family shrines. Though showing this
isolation in the strongest light, adoption is nevertheless a mark of decay in
the patriarchal family. It is an artificial grafting on the original simple
stock; and however carefully men may have shut their eyes at first to its
artificial nature, it must have had a gradual tendency to undermine the
reverence paid to the principle of blood relationship.
Before we consider,
however, the causes of decay of this form of society, which we shall do in the
next chapter, there are some other indications of their manner of livelihood
which will help us to understand the social condition of these Aryan
patriarchal families. We have seen that with the introduction of bronze into
Europe, certain other changes took place in the manner of men's lives. One of
these is the domestication of animals. It is true that domestic animals were
not altogether unknown before the bronze age in Europe: but until that time
this custom had not attained any great extension. In remains of settlements
whose age is supposed to be before the introduction of bronze, by far the
larger number of animals' bones found are those belonging to wild species,
while those belonging to tame species are comparatively rare. This shows that
the principal part of the food of those people who lived before the bronze age
was obtained by hunting. After the introduction of bronze, however, exactly the
reverse is the case. In these later remains the bones of domestic animals
become much more common, while those of wild animals are comparatively rare, which
shows what an important revolution had taken place in men's habits.
It must also be
remembered that many remains supposed to belong to the later stone age may, in
fact, belong to societies that existed during the bronze age, but who had not
yet adopted the use of bronze, or else from their situ�ation were unable to
obtain any. As vet so little is known of how this metal was obtained at that
time, that it is impossible to say what situations would be least favorable for
obtaining it; but considering that tin, of which bronze is partly composed, is
only found in a very few places, the wonder is rather that bronze weapons are
found so generally amongst the different remains scattered over Europe, than
that they should be absent from some of them. More�over, the races that
inhabited Europe before the Aryans came there would afterwards remain collected
together in settle�ments, surrounded by the invading population, for a consider�able
length of time before they would either be exterminated or absorbed by the more
civilized race. These aborigines would adopt such of the arts and customs of
the Aryans as were most within their reach. The increased population and the
greater cultivation of the land which followed the Aryan invasion would make it
more difficult to obtain food from hunting, and the aborigines would therefore
be compelled to adopt domestication of animals as a means of support, which
they would have little difficulty in doing, as they would be able to obtain a
stock to start from, either by raids on their neighbors' herds or, perhaps, by
barter. But the manufacture of bronze weapons, being a much more complicated affair
than the rearing of cattle, would take a much longer time to ac�quire. This
perhaps may account for the remains found in the lake-dwellings, some of which
show a considerable degree of social advance, but an entire ignorance of the
use of bronze, while in the later ones bronze weapons are also found. We may
then regard the domestication of animals as one of the customs introduced into
Europe by the Aryans, and as prac�tised by them in their Asiatic home. It was
on their flocks and herds that they chiefly depended for subsistence, and the
importance of the chase as a means of livelihood was very much less with them
than it was with the old hunter-tribes that formed the earlier population of
Europe. This in itself was a great advance in civilization. It implied a
regular in�dustry, and the possession of cattle was not only a guarantee
against want, but an inducement to a more regular and orderly mode of living.
There are no lessons
so important to uncivilized nations as those of providence and industry, and
the pastoral life re�quired and encouraged both these qualities. It was
necessary to store up at one time of year food to support the cattle during
another time; to preserve a sufficient number of animals to keep the stock
replenished. The cows too had to be milked at regular times, and every night
the flocks and herds had to be collected into pens to protect them from beasts
of prey, and every morning to be led out again to the pasture. All this shows
the existence of a more organized and methodical life than is possible in a
hunter-tribe. The pastoral life, more�over, seems to be one particularly suited
to the patriarchal type of society. Each little community is capable of
supplying its own wants, and is also compelled to maintain a certain degree of isolation.
The necessity of having a considerable extent of country for their pasturage
would prevent different families from living very near each other. In its
simplest state, too, the pastoral life is a nomadic one; so that the only
social connection which can exist among such a people is one of kinship, for
having no fixed homes they can have no settled neighbors or fellow-countrymen.
The importance attached to cattle in this stage of civilization is evidenced by
the frequent use of words in their origin relating to cattle, in all the Aryan
languages, to express many of the ordinary inci�dents of life. Not only do
cattle occupy a prominent place in Aryan mythology, but titles of honor, the
names for divisions of the day, for the divisions of land, for property, for
money, and many other words, all attest by their derivation how prominent a
position cattle occupied with the early Aryans. The patriarch is called in
Sanskrit " lord of the cattle," the morning is " the calling of
the cattle," the even�ing " the milking time." The Latin word
for money, pecimia, and
our English word "fee"both come from the Aryan name for cattle. In
Anglo-Saxon movable property is called " cwic-feoh," or living
cattle, while immovable property, such as houses and land, is called "
dead cattle." And so we find the same word constantly cropping up in all
the Aryan languages, to remind us that in the pastoral life cattle are the
great interest and source of wealth of the community, and the principal means
of exchange employed in such commerce as is there carried on.
The commerce between
different tribes or families seems to have been conducted at certain
meeting-places agreed upon, and which were situated in the boundary-land or
neutral territory between the different settlements. Almost habitually at war
with each other, or at best only pre�serving an armed and watchful quiet,�each
side ready at a moment's notice to seize on any favorable opportunity for the
commencement of active hostilities,�regular friendly intercourse was impossible.
So that when they wished for their mutual advantage to enter into amicable
relations, it was necessary to establish some sort of special agreement for
that purpose. It is probable, then, that when they found the advantages which
could be derived from commercial exchanges, certain places were agreed upon as
neutral territory where these exchanges might take place. Such places of
exchange would naturally be fixed upon as would be equally convenient to both
parties; and their mutual jealousy would prevent one tribe from permitting the
free entrance within its own limits of members of other tribes. Places, too,
would be chosen so as to be within reach of three or four different tribes; and
thus the place of exchange, the market-place, would be fixed in that border-land
to which no tribe laid any special claim.
So we see that to
commerce was due the first amicable relations of one tribe to another, and
perhaps our market crosses may owe their origin to some remains of the old
ideas connected with assemblies where men first learnt to look upon men of
different tribes as brothers in a common humanity.
It took a long time,
however, to mitigate that feeling of hostility which seems to have existed in
early times between different communities. Even when they condescended to
barter with each other they did not forget the difference between the friend
and the foe. In the Senchus Jlor, a
book compiled by the old Irish or " Brehon " lawyers, this difference
between dealing with a friend and a stranger is rather curiously indi�cated in
considering the rent of land. " The three rents," says the Great Hook of the Law, as it is called, " are rack rent (or the extreme rent)
from a person of a strange tribe, a fair rent from one of the tribe (that is
one's own tribe), and the stipulated rent, which is paid equally by the tribe
and the strange tribe." This distinction is generally recognized in all
early communities. In dealing with a man of his own tribe, the individual was
held bound in honor not to take any unfair advantage, to take only such a
price, to exact only such a value in exchange, as he was legitimately entitled
to. It was quite otherwise, however, in dealings with' members of other tribes.
Then the highest value possible might justly be ob�tained for any article; so
that dealings at markets which consisted of exchanges between different tribes,
came to mean a particular sort of trading, where the highest price possible was
obtained for anything sold. It is probable that this cast, to a certain extent,
a slur upon those who habitually devoted themselves to this kind of trading.
Though it was recognized as just to exact as high .a price as possible from the
stranger, still the person who did so was looked upon to a certain extent as
guilty of a disreputable action; viewed, in fact, much in the same light as
usurious money lenders are viewed nowadays. They were people, who did not
offend against the laws of their times, but who sailed so near the wind as to
be tainted, as it were, with fraud. Indeed, our word "monger," which
simply means "dealer," comes from a root which, in Sanskrit, means
"to deceive;" so commerce and cheating seem to have been early
united, and we must therefore not be surprised if they are not entirely
divorced in popular estimation even in our own time.
Now "mark,"
which, as we know, means a boundary or border-land, comes from a root which
means " the chase," or "wild animals." So "mark"
originally meant the place of the chase, or where wild animals lived. This gives
us some sort of notion of these early settlements, whose in-dwellers carried on
their commerce with each other in this primitive fashion. They were little
spots of cleared or cultivated land, surrounded by a sort of jungle or primeval
forest inhabited only by wild beasts. It was in such wild places as these that
the first markets used to be held. Here under the spreading branches of the
trees, at some spot agreed upon be�forehand,�some open glade, perhaps, which
would be chosen because a neighboring stream afforded means of refreshment, �the
fierce distrustful men would meet to take a passing glimpse at the blessings of
peace. These wild border-lands which intervene also explain to us how it was
that so great an isolation continued to be maintained between the different
settlements. If their pasture-lands had bordered on each other immediately, if
the herds of one tribe had grazed by the herds of another, there must have been
much more intercom�munion and mutual trust than appears to have existed.
The value of cattle,
however, does not consist only in the food and skins which they provide. Oxen
have from a very early time been employed for purposes of agriculture; and we
find among the names derived from cattle many suggesting that they must have
been put to this use at the time when those names arose. Thus the Greeks spoke
of the evening as " boulutos," or the time for the unyoking of oxen;
and the same idea is expressed in the old German word for evening " abant
" (abend), or the unbinding. This then is the next stage in social
progress: when agriculture becomes the usual employment of man. With the
advance of this stage begins the decay of the patriarchal life, which, as we
shall see in the next chapter, gradually disappears and gives place to fresh
social combinations. Though we have hitherto spoken only of the patriarchal
life amongst the Aryans, it was still more characteristic of the Semitic race.
They were essentially pastoral and nomadic in their habits, and they seem to
have continued to lead a purely pastoral life much longer than the Aryans did.
In the Old Testament we learn how Abraham and Lot had to separate because their
flocks were too extensive to feed together; and how Abraham wandered about with
his flocks and herds, his family and servants, dwellers in tents, leading a
simple patriarchal life, much as the Arabs of the present day do. Long after
the neighboring people had settled in towns, these Semitic tribes continued to
wander over the intervening plains, depending for food and clothing only on
their sheep and cattle and camels. 7
CHAPTER
VII
the tillage community.
So long as people
continued to lead a wandering shepherd life, the institution of the patriarchal
family afforded a sufficient and satisfactory basis for such cordial union as
was possible. It was a conditiun of society in which the relations of the
different members to each other were extremely simple and confined within very
narrow boundaries; but the habits of life prevented the existence of any very
complicated social order, and at the same time gave a peculiar force and endur�ance
to those customs and ties which did exist. For while the different tribes had
no settled dwelling-places, the only cohesion possible was that produced by the
personal relations of the different members to each other. Those beyond the limits
of the tribe or household could have no permanent connection with it. They were
simply " strangers," friends or enemies, as circumstances might
determine, having no common interests, connected by no abiding link, with those
who were not members of the same community. When a family became so numerous
that it was necessary for its members to separate, the new family, formed under
the influence of this pressure, would at first remember the parent stock with
reverence, and perhaps regard the patriarch of the elder branch as entitled to
some sort of obedience from, and possessing some indefinite kind of power over,
it after separa�tion. It would however soon wander away and lose all connec�tion
with its relatives, forgetting perhaps in the course of time whence it had
sprung, or inventing a pedigree more pleasing to the
vanity of its members. But when men began to learn to till the soil, by degrees
they had to abandon their nomadic life, and to have for a time fixed
dwelling-places, in order that they might guard their crops, and gather, in the
time of harvest, the fruits of their labor. Cattle were no longer the only
means of subsistence, nor sufficiency of pasture the only limit to migration. A
part of their wealth was, for a time, bound up in the land which they had
tilled and sowed, and to obtain that wealth they must remain in the
neighborhood of the cultivated soil. Thus a new relationship arose between
different families. They began to have neighbors; dwellers on and cultivators
of the land bordering- their own; so that common interests sprang up between
those who had hitherto had nothing in common, new ties began to connect
together those who had had formerly no fixed relations.
The adoption of
agriculture changed likewise the relation of men to the land on which they
dwelt. Hitherto the tracts of pasture over which the herdsman had driven his
flocks and cattle had been as unappropriated as the open sea, as free as the
air which he breathed. He neither claimed any property in the land himself, nor
acknowledged any title thereto in another. He had spent no labor on it, had
done nothing to improve its fertility; and his only right as against others to
any locality was that of his temporary sojourn there. But when agriculture
began to require the expenditure of labor on the land, and its inclosure, so as
to protect the crops which had been sown, a new distinct idea of the possession
of these inclosed pieces of land began to arise, so that a man was no longer
simply the member of a particular family. He had acquired new rights and
attributes, for which the patriarchal economy had made no provision. He was the
inhabitant of a particular locality, the owner and cultivator of a particular
piece of land. The effect of this change was necessarily to weaken the household
tie which bound men together, by introducing new relations between them. The
great strength of that early bond had consisted in its being the only one which
the state of society rendered possible; and its force was greatly augmented hy
the isolation in which the different nomadic groups habitually lived. The
adoption of a more permanent settlement thus tended in two ways to facilitate
the introduction of a new social organization. By increasing the intercourse,
and rendering more permanent the connection between different families, it
destroyed their isolation, and therefore weakened the autocratic power of their
chiefs; and at the same time, by introducing new interests into the life of the
members of a family, and new relations between different families, it required
the adoption of regulations sometimes necessarily opposed to the principles of
patriarchal rule. We must remember, however, that the change from a nomadic to
a settled state took place very gradually, some peoples being influenced by it
much more slowly than others. Agriculture may be practised to a certain extent
by those who lead a more or less wandering life, as is the case with the Tartar
tribes, who grow buckwheat, which only takes two or three months for its
production; so that at the end of that time they are able to gather their
harvest and once more wander in search of new pastures. It is probable that the
earliest agriculture practised was something of this rude description; and even
when tribes learnt the advantage of cultivating more slowly-germinating crops,
they would not readily abandon their nomadic habits, which long continuance
rendered dear to them; but would only become agriculturists under the pressure
of circumstances. The hunter tribes of North American Indians, and the Gipsies
of Europe, serve to show us how deeply rooted the love of wandering and the
dislike to settled industry may become in a people. It was probably to the
difficulty of supporting existence produced by the increase of population that
the more continuous pursuit of agriculture was due; and it would therefore be
first regularly followed by the less warlike tribes, whose territory would be
curtailed by the incursions of their bolder neighbors. No longer able to seek
pasture over so extended an area as formerly, and with perhaps an increasing
population, they would find the neces�sity of obtaining from the land a greater
proportionate supply of subsistence than they had hitherto done. Agriculture
would therefore have to be pursued more regularly and laboriously, and thus the
habit of settlement would gradually be acquired. Under this influence we may
discern a change taking place in the social state of the Aryan-tribes.
Gradually they become less nomadic and more agricultural; and as this takes
place, there arises also a change in the relations of peoples to each other. We
should naturally expect considerable variety in the effects produced on
different nations by the adoption of a settled life; the results varying with
the climate and locality, the sort of cultivation followed, and the
idiosyncrasies of the people. But though all these elements had their influence
in determining the sort of organization which was adopted, j-et one special
type is found very widely among the Aryans. This form is called the Village
Community, and it possesses some features apparently so peculiarly its own,
that it would be difficult to decide on the cause of its adoption or growth. It
will be safer with our present limited knowledge to satisfy ourselves with
noting its more marked characteristics, and the localities in which it may be
traced, without attempting to determine whether it is to be regarded as a
natural resultant of the settlement of patriarchal families, or as inherited or
evolved by some par�ticular group of tribes.
The village community
in its simplest state consisted of a group of families, or households, whose
dwellings were generally collected together within an inclosure. To this group
belonged a certain tract of land, the cultivation and proprietor�ship of which
was the subject of minute regulations, varying in different localities to a
certain extent, but based on the division of the land into three principal
parts, one of which consisted of that immediately in the neighborhood of the
dwellings, another of a part specially set aside for agricultural purposes, and
the remaining third was the surrounding open country, which was used only for
grazing. Each of these divisions was regarded as in some sort the common
property of the village; but the rights of individuals in some of them were
more extensive than in others. That part of the land which was annexed
especially to the dwellings was more completely the property of the different
inhabitants than any other. Each head of a house was entitled to the particular
plot attached to his dwelling, and probably these plots, and the dwellings to
which they were annexed, remained always practically in the ownership of the
same family. The area of this division, however, was very insignificant when
com�pared with the rest of the communal estate. The arable part was divided
into a number of small plots, each or several of which were assigned to
particular households. The mode of division of this part was very various; but
generally speaking, either each household had an equal share assigned to it, or
else a share in proportion to the number of its males. Redistributions of the
shares took place either at stated periods, or when over circumstances had
rendered the existing division inequit�able. Each household cultivated the
particular share assigned to it, and appropriated to its own use the crops
produced; but individuals were never allowed to adopt for themselves the mode
of cultivation that they might choose. The crops to be sown, and the part of
land on which they were to be sown, were all regulated by the common assembly
of the whole village, as were also the times for sowing and for harvest, and
every other agricultural operation; and these laws of the assembly had to be
implicitly followed by all the villagers. The open or common land of the
village was not divided between the households at all; but every member of the
community was at liberty to pasture his flocks and herds upon it.
In their relations to
each other the villagers seem to have been on a footing of perfect equality. It
is probable that there existed generally some sort of chief, but his power does
not appear to have been very great, and for the most part he was merely a
president of their assemblies, exercising only an influence in proportion to
his personal qualifications. The real lawgivers and rulers of this society are
the different individuals which compose the assembly. These, however, do not
comprise all the inhabitants of the village. Only the heads of the different
families were properly included in the village assembly. But the household has
no longer the same extended circle as formerly, and, so far as we can gather,
there seems to have been little check on the division of families and the
formation of new households.
It must be borne in
mind, however, that we have no existing institution exactly resembling the
village community, as we may suppose it must have originally been. As with the
patriarchal family, we meet with it only after it has undergone considerable
modification, and we have to reconstruct it from such modified forms and
traditions as remain to us. Many minor details of its nature are therefore
neces�sarily matters of speculation. The community, however, may still be found
in a changed form in several localities; notably among the peasantry of Russia,
and the native population of India; and its former existence among the Teuton
tribes is attested by evidence of the clearest description. With each of these
peoples, however, the form is somewhat varied from what we may conclude to have
been its original nature; in each country it has been subject not only to the
natural growth and development which every institution is liable to, but to
special influences arising from the events connected with the nation's history,
and from the nature and extent of its territory. But before we inquire what
these different in�fluences may have been, let us notice first certain leading
characteristics of this group, and consider how they may have arisen.
The first thing that
attracts observation is the change in the source of authority in this community
from that which existed in the patriarchal family. The ruling power is no
longer placed in the hands of an individual chief, but is vested in an assembly
of all the householders. The second marked peculiarity is the common
possession of the land by the village, combined with the individual possession
of goods of a mov�able nature by the different members. These may be said to be
the two essentials of a true village community. Now the change from the
patriarchal to this later social form may have taken place by either of two
processes�the extension of an individual family into a community, or the
amalgamation of various families. Probably both of these processes took place;
but wherever anything like the formation of a village community has been
actually observed, and the process has occasionally been discernible even in
modern times in India, it is due to the former of the two causes indicated.
This mode of formation also appears to have left the most distinct impress on
society, and we will therefore notice first how it probably acted.
When a family had
devoted itself to agricultural pursuits, and settled in a fixed locality, one
of those divisions of its members might take place which probably were of
frequent occurrence in the nomadic state. Although theoretically we speak of
the patriarchal family as united and indivisible, yet as a matter of fact we
know that such was not always the case, and that families must frequently have
either split up, or else sent off little colonies from their midst. Now as we
have already pointed out, the settlement of the family would have a marked
effect in preserving a permanent connection between itand its offspring; so
that the separation would be by no means so complete as formerly. The sub�sidiary
family would continue in close intercourse with the elder branch, and would enjoy
with it the use of the land which had been appropriated. In course of time it
might happen that a whole group of families would thus become settled near each
other, all united by a common origin and enjoying in common the land surrounding
the settlement; for the necessity for mutual protection, which would often
arise, would alone be a strong inducement to preserve the neigh�borhood of
those who from kinship were by nature and tradi�tion allies. And although each
separate family would continue in its internal relations the peculiarities of
the patriarchal rule, the heads of the different families would be related to
each other on quite a new principle. They would no longer be members of one
family all subservient to a common chief, but they would still be united by the
bond of their common interests.
There would thus
spring up a new relationship between the family chiefs, a relationship not
provided for in the construction of the patriarchal family. We might expect
perhaps that a special pre-eminence would be accorded to the original family
from which the others had separated, and possibly some traces of this
pre-eminence may here and there be discovered. But, for some reason which has
not hitherto received any explanation, the general principle of equality among
the different heads of households prevailed. As we do not know exactly by what
process families became divided, it is useless to speoulate how this equality
arose. Another effect produced by settlement has already been indicated;
namely, the decrease of the power of the patriarch within his own circle. The
family having ceased to be the bond of union, though the units composing the
new combina�tion were themselves groups constructed on the patriarchal type,
the fact that they were, now only parts of larger groups had the effect of
weakening the force of patriarchal customs. When the household was the only
state of which an individual was a member, to leave it was to lose all share in
its rights and property. But when the family became part of the village, the
facilities for separating from it were necessarily increased. Households would
more readily subdivide, now that after separation their component parts
continued united in the community. Thus by degrees the old patriarchal life
decayed and gave place to this new and more elastic social formation. The
importance of an individual's relation to the family became less, that of the
family to the com�munity became greater; so that by degrees the community absorbed
the regulation of many affairs originally within the exclusive power of the
patriarch. A new lesson has also been learnt with regard to property. It is
difficult to discern whether, in the older group, the property was regarded as
exclusively that of the chief, or as belonging to the family collectively. The
truth seems to be that the two ideas were blended, and neither was conceived
with any completeness. In the later group for the first time each form of
property becomes fully developed; either kind producing a clearer idea of the
other by their contrast. The land, the bond of union, and the limit of the
extent of the community, remained the common property of all; in part, no
doubt, because the idea of possessing land was still so new that it had not
been thoroughly grasped. The produce of the land, whether corn or pasture, was
rather regarded as a proper subject of possession; and though at first, in
obedience to the habits of their former life, this may also have been looked
upon as common property, it did not long continue so, as the separation of the
households remained too complete to permit of any community with regard to the
actual homestead, or of the produce required for the support of each household; and this separation of goods by the force of circumstances soon extended to
cattle and the produce of the harvest.
The effects produced
by their new relation to each other on the members of this group were very
important. Hitherto such idea of law as existed was confined to the mandates or
traditional regulations of the patriarchs. Law too appears at first inseparably
connected with religion. It was looked upon as a series of regulations handed
down from some ancestor who received them by divine inspiration. This notion of
the origin of law is so general, that it is to be met with in the traditions of
almost every nation. Thus we find the Egyp�tians reputing their laws to the
teachings of Hermes (Thoth) ; while the lawgivers of Greece, Minos, and
Lycurgus, arc inspired, the one by Zeus, the other by Apollo. So too the
Iranian lawgiver Zoroaster is taught by the Good Spirit ; and Moses receives
the commandments on Mount Sinai. Now though this idea of law is favorable to
the procuring obedience to it, it produces an injurious effect on the law
itself, by render�ing it too fixed and unalterable. Law, in order to satisfy
the requirements and changes of life, should be elastic and capable of
adaptation ; otherwise, regulations which in their institution were beneficial
will survive to be obnoxious under an altered condition of society. But so long
as laws are regarded as divine commands they necessarily retain a great degree
of rigidity. The village community, in disconnecting the source of law from the
patriarchal power, tended to destroy this association. The authority of the
patriarch was a part of the religion of the early Aryans; he was at once both
the ruler and the priest of his family ; and though this union between the two
characters long continued to have a great influence on the conception of law,
the first efforts at a distinction between divine and hu�man commands sprang
from the regulations adopted by the assembly of the village. The complete
equality and the joint authority exercised by its members was an education in
self-government, which was needed to enable them to advance in the path of
civilization, teaching them the importance of self-dependence and individual
responsibility.
Those who learnt that
lesson best displayed in their history the greatness of its influence, having
gained from it a vigor and readiness to meet and adapt themselves to new
require�ments never possessed by the absolute monarchies which sprang from
tribes unacquainted with any other principle than that of patriarchal
government. The history of the various states which sprang up in Asia, each in
its turn to be overwhelmed in a destruction which scarcely left a trace of its
social influence, exhibits in a very striking manner the defects which
necessarily ensue when a people ignorant of social arts attempts to form an
extensive scheme of government. The various races raised to temporary power by
the chances of war in the East, were, generally speaking, nomadic tribes whose
habits had produced a hardihood which enabled them to conquer with ease their
effeminate neighbors of the more settled districts, but whose social state was
not sufficiently advanced to allow them to carry on any extended rule. Used
only to their simple nomadic life, they were suddenly brought face to face with
wants and possessions of which they had hitherto had no experience, and which
lay beyond the bounds of their customs or ideas. They contented themselves with
exacting from the conquered such tribute as they could extort, leaving their
new subjects to manage their own affairs much as they had done before, till the
conquerors, gradually corrupted by the luxuries which their position afforded,
and having failed to make for themselves any firm footing in their new empire,
were in their turn overwhelmed by fresh hordes of nomadic invaders. The mighty
empire of Rome too fell; but how different a record has she left behind !
Having learnt in her earliest infancy, better perhaps than any other nation,
how to reconcile the conflicting theories of the household and the community,
she never flagged in her study of the arts of government. Early imbued with a
love of law and order, her people discovered also how to accommodate their
rules to the various conditions of those which came under their sway. Her laws
penetrated to the remotest boundaries of her possessions, and the rights of a
Roman citizen were as clearly defined in Briton as in Rome itself. Thus the
Romans have left behind them a system of law the wonder and admiration of all
mankind, and which has left indelible marks on the laws and customs, the arts
and civilization, of every nation which once formed part of their dominions.
Such were among the
influences following the adoption of the village community; but such influences
only gradually asserted themselves, and the extent of their development was
very various among different peoples. In India, the religious element in the
household had always a peculiar force, and its influence continued to affect to
a great extent the formation of the community. There this organization never
lost sight of the patriarchal power, and has exhibited a constant tendency to
revert to the more primitive social form. Among the Slavonic tribes the
community seems to have found its most favorable conditions, and some of the
reasons for this are not difficult to discern. The Slaves in Russia have fora
longtime had open to them an immense fact of thinly inhabited country, their
only rivals to the possession of which were the Finnish tribes of the north.
Now the village community is a form peculiarly adapted for colonization, and
this process of colonizing fresh country by sending out detachments from over
grown villages seems to have gone on for a long time in Russia; so that the
communities which still exist there present a complete network of relationship
to each other; every village having some mother-village from
which it has sprung. Having thus a practically boundless territory
for their settlement, none of those difficulties in obtaining land which led to
the decay of the village in western Europe affected the Russians in their
earlier history. With the Teutons the village had a somewhat different history.
It is difficult to determine exactly to what extent it existed among them; but
traces of its organization are still discoverable among the laws and customs of
Germany and England. The warlike habits of the German tribes, however, soon
produced a marked effect on its organization. The chief of the village, whether
hereditary or elective, was generally possessed of but little power. Among a
warlike people, however, the necessity for a captain or dictator must have been
much greater than with peaceful tribes; for war requires, more than any other
pursuit, that it should be conducted by an individual will. Among the peaceful
inhabitants of India or Russia the village head-man was generally some aged and
venerable father exercising a sort of paternal influence over the others
through the reverence paid to his age and wisdom. With the Teutons, however,
their habits gave an excessive importance to the strength and vigor of manhood,
and they learnt to regard those who exhibited the greatest skill in battle as
their natural chieftains.
CHAPTER
VIII.
religion.
We have hitherto been occupied in tracing the
growth of inventions which had for their end the supply of material wants, or
the ordering of conditions which should enable men to live peaceably together
in companies, and defend the pro�ducts of their labor from the attacks of rival
tribes and neighbors. A very little research into the relics of antiquity,
however, brings another side of human thought before us, and we discover,
whether by following the revelations of language or by examining into the
traces left in ancient sites, abundant proof to show that the material wants of
life did not alone occupy the thoughts of our remote ancestors any more than
our own, and that even while the struggle for life was fiercest, conjectures
about the unseen world and the life beyond the grave, and aspirations towards
the invisible source of life and light they felt to be around them, occupied a
large space in their minds. God did not leave them without witness at any time,
but caused the "invisible things to be shown by those that do appear.'.'
And even in the darkest ages and among the least favored races, there were
always to be found some minds that vibrated, however feebly, to the suggestions
of this teaching, and shaped out for themselves and their tribe some conception
of a Divine Ruler and His government of the world from those works of His hands
of which their senses told them. Before commerce, or writing, or law had
advanced beyond their earliest beginnings, religious rites and funeral rites
had no doubt been established in every tribe, and men's thoughts
about God and His relationship to His creatures had found some verbal
expression, some sort of creed in which they could be handed down from father
to son and form a new tie to bind men together. The task of tracing back these
rites and creeds to their earliest shape is manifestly harder than that of
tracing material inventions, or laws between man and man, to their first germs,
for we are here trenching on some of the deepest questions which the human mind
is capable of contemplating�nothing less indeed than the nature of conscience
and the dealings of God Himself with the souls of His creatures. We must
therefore tread cautiously, be content to leave a great deal uncertain, and,
making up our minds only on such points as appear to be decided by revela�tion,
accept on others the results of present researches as still imperfect, and
liable to be modified as further light on the difficult problems in
consideration is obtained.
The study of language
has perhaps done more than anything else to clear away the puzzles which mythologies
formerly presented to students. It has helped in two ways: first, by. tracing
the names of ohjects of worship to their root-forms, and thus showing their
meaning and revealing the thought which lay at the root of the worship.
Secondly, by proving the identity between the gods of different nations, whose
names, apparently different, have been resolved into the same root-word, or to
a root of the same meaning, when the alchemy of philological research was
applied to them.
The discovery of a
closer relationship than had been for�merly suspected between the mythologies
of various nations is a very important one, as it enables us to trace the
growth of the stories told of gods and heroes, from what may be called the
grown-up form in which we first become acquainted with them in the religious
systems of the Greeks, Romans, and Scandinavians, to the primitive shape in
which the same creeds were held by the more metaphysical and less imaginative
Eastern people among whom they originally sprang up. In some respects this task
of tracing back the poetical myths of Greek and Northern poets to the simpler,
if grander, beliefs of the ancient Egyptians and Hindus is not unlike our
search in a perfected language for its earliest roots. We lose shapeli�ness and
beauty as we come back, but we find the form that explains the birth of the
thought, and lets us see how it grew in the minds of men. One chief result arrived
at by this comparison of creeds, and by unravelling the meaning of the names of
ancient gods and heroes, is the discovery that a worship of different aspects
and forces of nature lies at the bottom of all mythologies, and that the cause
of the resem�blance between the stories told of the gods and heroes (a
resemblance which strikes us as soon as we read two or three of them together)
is, that they are in reality only slightly different ways of describing natural
appearances according to the effect produced on different minds, or to the
variations of climate and season of the year. Having once got the key of the
enigma in our hands, we soon become expert in hunting the parable through all
the protean shapes in which it is pre�sented to us. The heroes of the old
stories we have long loved begin to lose their individuality and character for
us. And instead of thinking of Apollo, and Osiris, and Theseus, and Herakles
and Thor, as separate idealizations of heroic or godlike character; of Ariadne,
and Idun, and Isis as heroines of pathetic histories, our thoughts as we read
are busied in tracing all that is said about them to the aspects of the sun's
march across the heavens, through the vicissitudes of a bright and thundery
eastern, or a gusty northern, day, and the ten�derly glowing and fading colors
of the western sky into which he sinks when his course is run.
Our first feeling in
receiving this simple explanation of the puzzling old stories is rather one of
disappointment than of satisfaction; we feel that we are losing a great
deal�not the interest of the stories only, but all those glimpses of deep moral
meanings, of yearnings after divine teachers and rulers, of acknowledgment of
the possibility of communion between God and man, which we had hitherto found
in them, and which we are sure that the original makers of them could not have
been without. It seems to rob the old religions of the essence of
religion�spirituality�and reduce them to mere observations of natural
phenomena, due rather to the bodily senses than to any instincts or necessities
of the soul. But here the science of language, with which we were about to
quarrel as having robbed us, comes in to restore to the old beliefs those very
elements of mystery, awe, and yearning towards the invisible, which we were
fearing to see vanish away. As is usually the case on looking deeper, we shall
find that the explanation which seemed at first to impoverish, really enhances
the beauty and worth of the subject brought into clearer light.
It teaches us to see
something more in what we have been used to call mere nature-worship than
appears at first sight.
When we were
considering the beginnings of language, we learned that all root-words were
expressions of sensations received from outward things, every name or word
being a description of some bodily feeling, a gathering-up of impres�sions on
the senses made by the universe outside us. With this stock of words�pictorial
words we may call them�it is easy to see that when people in early times wanted
to express a mental feeling, they were driven to use the word which expressed
the sensation in their bodies most nearly corre�sponding to it. We do something
of the same kind now when we talk of warm love, chill fear, hungry avarice, and dark revenge�mixing up words for sensations of the body
to heighten the expression of emotions of the mind. In using these expressions we
are conscious of speaking allegorically, and we have, over and above our
allegorical phrases, words set aside especially for describing mental actions,
so that we can talk of the sensations of our bodies and of our minds without
any danger of confounding them together. But in early times, before words had
acquired these varied and enlarged meanings, when men had only one word by
which to express the glow of the body when the sun shone and the glow of the
mind when a friend was near, the difficulty of speaking, or even thinking, of
mental and bodily emotions apart from each other must have been very great.
Only gradually could the. two things have become disentangled from one another,
and during all the time while this change was going on an alle�gorical way of
speaking of mental emotions and of the source of mental emotions must have
prevailed. It is not difficult to see that while love and warmth, fear and
cold, had only one word, to express them, the sun, the source of warmth, and
God, the source of love, were spoken of in much the same terms, and worshipped
in songs that expressed the same adoration and gratitude. It follows,
therefore, that while we acknowledge the large proportion in which the nature
element comes into all mythologies, we need not look Upon the wor�shippers of
nature as worshippers of visible things only. They felt, without being able to
express, the Divine cause which lay behind the objects whose grandeur and
beauty appealed to their wonder, and they loved and worshipped the Unseen while
naming the seen only. As time passed on and language developed, losing much of
its original significance, there was, especially among the Greeks and Romans, a
gradual divergence between the popular beliefs about the gods and the spirit of
true worship which originally lay behind them. People no longer felt the
influence of nature in the double method in which it had come to them in the
childhood of the race, and they began to distinguish clearly between their
bodies and their minds, between the things that lay without and the emotions
stirred within. Then the old nature beliefs became degraded to foolish and
gross superstitions, and the yearning soul sought God in a more internal way.
The mythologies of
the different Aryan nations are those which concern us most nearly, entering as
they do into the very composition of our language, and coloring not only our
literature and poetry, but our baby-songs and the tales told in our nurseries.
We shall find it interesting to compare toge�ther the various forms of the
stories told by nations of the Aryan stock, and to trace them back to their
earliest shape. But before entering on this task it may be well to turn our
attention for a little while to a still earlier mythology, where the mingling
of metaphysical conceptions with the worship of natural phenomena is perhaps
more clearly shown than in any other, and which may therefore serve as a guide
to help us in grasping this connection in the more highly-colored, picturesque
stories we shall be hereafter attempting to unravel. This earliest and least
ornamented mythology is that of the an�cient Egyptians, a people who were
always disposed to retain primitive forms unchanged, even when, as was the case
with their hieroglyphics, they had to use them to express more developed
thoughts than the forms could well hold. That they followed this course with
their religious cere�monies and in their manner of representing their gods, is
perhaps fortunate for us, as it enables us to trace with greater ease the
particular aspect of nature, and the mental sensation or moral lesson
identified with it, which each one of their gods and goddesses embodies. We
have the rude primitive form embodying an aspect or force of nature, and
instead of a beautiful confusing story, merely for the most part titles,
addresses, and prayers, whose purport more or less reveals the spiritual
meaning which that aspect of nature conveyed to the worshipper.
The chief objects of
nature-worship must obviously be the same, or nearly the same, in every part of the world, so that even among
different races, living far apart and having no connection with each other, a
certain similarity in the stories told about gods and heroes, and in the names
and titles given to them, is observable. The sun, the moon, the sky, the sea,
the river, sunshine and darkness, night and day, summer and winter�these
objects and changes must always make the staple, the back-bone so to speak,
round which all mytho�logical stories founded on nature-worship are grouped.
But climate and scenery, especially any striking peculiarity in the natural
features of a country, have a strong influence in modifying the impressions
made by these objects on the ima�ginations of the dwellers in the land, and so
giving a special form or color to the national creed, bringing perhaps some
divine attribute or some more haunting impression of the condition of the soul
after death, into a prominence unknown elsewhere. The religion of the ancient
Egyptians was dis�tinguished from that of other nations by several such cha�racteristics,
and in endeavoring to understand them we must first recall what there is
distinctive in the climate and scenery of Egypt to our minds.
The land of Egypt is,
let us remember, a delta-shaped valley, broad at its northern extremity and
gradually narrowing between two ranges of cliffs till it becomes through a
great part of its length a mere strip of cultivatable land closely shut in on
each side. Its sky overhead is always blue, and from morning till evening^
intensely bright, flecked only occa�sionally, and here and there, by thin gauzy
clouds, so that the sun's course, from the first upshooting of his keen arrowy
rays over the low eastern hills to his last solemn sinking in a pomp of
glorious color behind the white cliffs in the west, can he traced unimpeded day
after day through the entire course of the year. Beyond the cliffs which
receive the sun's first and last greeting, stretches a boundless waste�the
silent, dead, sunlit desert, which no one had ever traversed, which led no one
knew where, from whose dread, devouring space the sun escaped triumphant each
morning, and back into which it returned when the valley was left to darkness
and night.
The neighborhood of
the desert, and the striking contrast between its lifeless wastes and the richly-cultivated
plains between the hills, had, as we can see, a great effect on the imaginations
of the first inhabitants of the land of Egypt, and gave to many of their
thoughts about death and the world beyond the grave an intensity unknown to the
dwellers among less monotonous scenery. The contrast was a perpetual parable to
them, or rather perhaps a perpetual memento mori. The valley between the
cliffs presented a vivid picture of active and intense life, every inch of
fruitful ground teeming with the results of labor�budding corn, clustering
vines, groups of palm-trees, busy sowers, and reapers, and builders;
resounding, too, everywhere with brisk sounds of toil or pleasure. The clink of
anvil and hammer, the creaking of water-wheels, the bleating and lowing of
flocks and herds, the tramp of the oxen treading out the corn, the songs of
women, and the laughter of children playing by the river. On the other side of
the cliffs, what a change! There reigned an unbroken solitude and an intense
silence, such as is only found in the desert, because it comes from the utter
absence of all life, animal or vegetable: no rustle of leaf or bough, no bum of
an insect, or whirr of a wing, breaks the charmed stillness even for a minute.
There is silence, broad, unbroken sunshine, bare cliffs, rivers of golden
sand�-nothing else. Amenti, the ancient Egyptians called the western desert
into which, as it seemed to them the sun went down to sleep after his day's
work was done; Amenti, the vast, the grand, the unknown, and it was there they
built their most splendid places of worship, and there they carrried their dead
for burial, feeling that it spoke to them of rest, of unchangeable-ness, of
eternity.
Another striking and
peculiar feature of Egyptian scenery was the beautiful river�the one only
river�on which the prosperity, the very existence, of the country depended. It,
too, had a perpetual story to tell, a parable to unfold, as it flowed and
swelled and contracted in its beneficent yearly course. They saw that all
growth and life depended on its action; where its waters reached, there
followed fruitfulness and beauty, and a thousand teeming forms of animal,
vegetable, and insect life; where its furthest wave stayed, there the reign of
nothingness and death began again. The Nile therefore became to the ancient
Egyptians the token and emblem of a life-giving principle in nature, of that
perpetual renewal, that passing from one form of existence into another, which
has ever had so much hopeful significance for all thinking minds. Its blue
color, reflecting the sky, was the most sacred of their emblems, and was
devoted to funeral decorations and to the adornments of the dead, because it
spoke to them of the victory of life over death, of the permanence of the life
principle amid the evanescent and vanishing forms under which it appeared. Of
these two dis�tinctive features of nature in Egypt, the unexplored western
desert and the unending river, we must then think as exercising a modifying or
intensifying effect on the impressions pro�duced on the minds of ancient
Egyptians by those aspects of nature which they had in common with other
Eastern people. Let us think what these are. First and most conspicuous we must
put the sun, in all his changing aspects, rising in gentle radiance over the
eastern hills, majestically climbing the cloudless sky; sending down fierce
perpendicular rays through all the hot noon, withdrawing his overwhelming heat
towards evening as he sloped to his rest, and painting the western sky with
color and glory, on which the eyes of men could rest without being dazzled,
vanishing from sight at last behind the white rocks in the west. And then the
moon�white, cold, changeable, ruling the night and measuring time. Besides
these, the countless hosts of stars; the green earth constantly pouring forth
food for man from its bosom; the glowing blue sky at noon and the purple
midnight heaven; the moving wind; the darkness that seemed to eat up and
swallow the fight.
Now let us see how
the ancient- Egyptians personified these into gods, and what were the
corresponding moral or spiritual ideas of which each nature-power spake to
their souls. We shall find the mythology easier to remember and understand if
we group the personifications round the natural objects whose aspects inspired
them, instead of enumerating them in their proper order as first, second, and
third class divinities. So for the present we will class them as Sun-Gods,
Sky-Gods, Wind-Gods, &c. ; and we will begin with the sun, which among the
ancient Egyptians occupied the first place, given, as you will see, to
the sky among our Aryan ancestors. The sun indeed not only occupies the most
conspicuous position in Egyptian mythology, but is presented to us in so many
characters and under so many aspects, that he may be said to be the chief
inspiration, the central object of worship, nothing else indeed coming near to
his grandeur and his mystery. It is to be remarked, however�and this is a
distinctive feature in the Egyptian system of worship�that the mystery of
the sun's disappearance during the night and his reappearance every morning, is
the point in the parable of the sun's course to which the Egyptians attached
the deepest significance, and to the personification of which they gave the
most dignified place in their hierarchy of gods. Atum or Amun, " the
concealed one," was ,the name and title given to the sun after he had
sunk, as they believed, into the under-world ; and by this name they worshipped
the concealed Creator of all things, the " Dweller in Eternity," who
was before all, and into whose bosom all things, gods and men, would, they
thought, return in the lapse of ages. The figure under which they represented
this their oldest and most venerable deity was that of a man, sometimes
human-headed and sometimes with the man's face concealed under the head and
horns of a ram�the word ram meaning concealment in the Egyptian language. The
figure was colored blue, the sacred color of the Source of Life. Two
derivations are given for the name Amun. It means that which brings to light ;
but it also expresses the simple invi�tation " Come," and in this
sense it appears to be connected with a sentence in the ritual, where Atum is
represented as dwelling alone in the under-world in the ages before creation,
and on " a day " speaking the word " Come," when imme�diately
Osiris and Horus (light and the physical sun) appeared before him in the
under-world.
The aspect of the sun
as it approached its mysterious set�ting exercised perhaps a still greater
power over the thoughts of the Egyptians, and was personified by them into a
deity, which, if not the most venerable, was the best loved of all their gods.
Osiris was the name given from the earliest times to the kind declining sun,
who appeared to them to veil his glory, and sheathe his dazzling beams in a
lovely, many-colored radiance, which soothed and gladdened the weary eyes and
hearts of men, and enabled them to gaze fearlessly and lovingly on the dread
orb from which during the day they had been obliged to turn their eyes. The god
who loved men and dwelt among them, and for their sakes permitted himself to be
for a time quenched and defeated by the darkness�it was thus that the ancient
people read the parable of the sun's evening beauty and of his disappearance
beneath the shades of night, amplifying it, as the needs of the human heart
were more distinctly recognized, into a real foreshadowing of that glorious
truth towards which the whole human race was yearning�the, truth of
which these shows of nature were indeed speaking continually to all who could
understand. The return of Osiris every evening into the under world in�vested
him also, for the ancient Egyptians, with the character of guardian and judge
of souls who were supposed to accom�pany him on his mysterious journey, or at
all events to be received and welcomed by him in Amenti (the realm of souls)
when they arrived there. Osiris therefore filled a place both among the gods of
the living and those of the dead. He was the link which connected the lives of
the upper and the under world together, and made them one�the Lover and Dweller
among men while yet in the body, and also the Judge and Ruler of the spirit
realm to which they were all bound. Two distinct personifications showed him in
these characters. As the dweller among men and the sharer of the commonness and
materiality of their earth-life, he was worshipped under the form of a bull�the
Apis, in which shape his pure soul was believed constantly to haunt the earth,
passing from one bull to that of another on the death of the animal, but never
abandoning the land of his choice, or depriving his faithful worshippers of his
visible presence among them. In his character of Judge of the Dead, Osiris was
represented as a mummied figure, of the sacred blue color, carrying in one hand
the rod of dominion, and in the other the emblem of life, and wearing on his
head the double crown of Upper and Lower Egypt. In the judgment scenes he is
seated on a throne at the end of the solemn hall of trial to which the soul has
been arraigned, and in the centre of which stands the fateful balance where, in
the presence of the evil accusing spirit and of the friendly funeral gods and
genii who stand around, the heart of the man is weighed against a symbol of
Diviue Truth.
Next in interest to the
setting sun is the personification under which the Egyptians worshipped the strong
young sun, the victorious conqueror of the night, who each morning ap�peared to
rise triumphant from the blank realm of darkness, in which the rays of
yesterday's sun had been quenched. They figured him as the eldest son of
Osiris, Horus, the vigorous bright youth who loved his father, and avenged him,
piercing with his spear-like ray the monster who had swallowed him up. Horus is
represented as sailing up the eastern sky from the under world in a boat, and
slaying the serpent Night with a spear as he advances. The ultimate victory of
life over death, of truth and goodness over falsehood and wrong, were the moral
lessons which this parable of the sun's rising read to the ancient Egyptians.
The midday sun ruling the heavens in unclouded glory, symbolized to them
majesty and kingly authority, and was worshipped as a great and powerful god
under the name of Ra, from which name the title given to their kings, Phra, was
derived.
Though these four
appearances may well seem to exhaust all the aspects under which the sun can be
considered, there are still several other attributes belonging to him which the
ancient Egyptians noticed and personified into yet other sun-gods. These we will
enumerate more briefly. Pthath, a god of the first order, worshipped with great
magnificence at Memphis, personified the life-giving power of the sun's beams,
and in this character was sometimes mixed up with Osiris, and in the ritual is
spoken of also as the creative principle, the " word " or "
power " by which the essential deity revealed itself in the visible works
of creation. Another deity, Mandoo, appears to personify the fierce power of
the sun's rays at midday in summer, and was looked upon as the god of vengeance
and destruction, a leader in war, answering in some measure, though not
entirely, to the war-gods of other mythologies. There were also Gom, Moui, and
Kons, who are spoken of always as the sons of the sun god, those who
reveal him or carry his messages to mankind, and in them the rays, as
distinguished from the disk of the sun, are no doubt personified. The
rays of the sun had also a feminine per�sonification in Pasht, the goddess with
the lioness's head. To her several different and almost-opposite qualities were
attri�buted: as indeed, an observer of the burning and enlightening rays of an
Eastern sun might be doubtful whether to speak oftenest of the baleful
fever-heat with which they infect the blood, or of their vivifying effects upon
the germs of animal and vegetable life. Thus the lioness goddess was at once
feared and loved; dreaded at one moment as the instigator of fierce passions
and unruly desires, invoked at another as the giver of joy, the source of all
tender and elevating emotions. Her name, Pasht, means the lioness, and was
perhaps suggested bythe fierceness of the sun's rays, answering to the lion's
fierce strength or the angry light of his eyes. She was also called the "
Lady of the Cave," suggesting something of mystery and concealment. Her
chief worship was at Bubastis; but, judging from the frequency of her
representations, must have been common throughout Egypt.
We will now take the
second great light of the heavens, the moon, and consider the forms under which
it was personified by the Egyptians. Rising and setting like the sun, and dis�appearing
for regular periods, the moon was represented by a god, who, like the god of
the setting sun, occupied a con�spicuous position among the powers of the under
world, and was closely connected with thoughts of the existence of the soul
after death, and the judgment pronounced on deeds done in the body. Thoth,
"the Word," the "Lord of Divine Words," was the title given
to this deity; but though always making one in the great assemblage in the
judgment-hall, his office towards the dead does not approach that of Osiris in
dignity. He is not the judge, he is the recorder who stands before the balance
with the dread account in his hand, while the trembling soul awaits the final
sentence. His character is that of a just recorder, a speaker of true words ;
he wears the ostrich feather, the token of exact rigid evenness and impar�tiality,
and yet he is represented as having uneven arms, as if to hint that the
cold white light of justice, untempered by the warmth of love, cannot
thoroughly apprehend what it seems to take exact account of, leaving, after
all, one side unembraced, unenlightened, as the moonlight casts dense shadows
around the spots where its beams fall. The silent, watching, peering moon ! Who
has not at times felt an inkling of the parable which the ancient Egyptians
told of her cold eye and her unwarming rays which enlighten chilly, and point
out while they distort ?
In spite of his
uneven arms, however, Thoth (the dark moon and the light moon) was a great god,
bearing sway in both worlds in accordance with his double character of the
revealed and the hidden orb. On earth he is the great teacher, the inventor of
letters, of arithmetic, and chronology; the " Lord of Words," the "
Lover of Truth," the " Great and Great." Thoth was sometimes
represented under the form of an ape; but most frequently with a human figure
ibis-headed; the ibis, on account of his mingled black and white feathers,
symbolizing the dark and the illumined side of the moon.
Occasionally,
however, he is drawn with a man's face, and bearing the crescent moon on his
head, surmounted by an ostrich feather; in his hand he holds his tablets and
his recording pencil.
The sky divinities
were all feminine among the Egyptians; representing the feminine principle of
receptivity, the sky being regarded by them mainly as the abode, the home of
the sun and moon gods. The greatest of the sky deities was Maut, the mother,
who represents the deep violet night sky, tenderly brooding over the hot
exhausted earth when the day was over, and wooing all living things to rest, by
stretching cool, protecting arms above and around them. The beginning of all
things, abysmal calm, but above all motherhood, were the metaphysical conceptions
which the ancient Egyptians connected with the aspect of the brooding heavens
at midnight, and which they worshipped as the oldest primeval goddess, Maut.
The night sky, however, suggested another thought, and gave rise to yet another
personification. Night does not bring only repose; animals and children sleep,
but men wake and think; and, the strife of day being hushed, have leisure to
look into their own minds, and listen to the stilL small voice that speaks
within. Night was thus the parent of thought, the mother of wisdom, and a
personification of the night sky was worshipped as the goddess of wisdom. She
was named Neit; a word signifying " I came from myself," and she has
some attributes in common with the Greek goddess of wisdom, Athene, whose warlike
character she shared. Nu, another sky goddess, who personifies the sunlit blue
midday sky may also on other accounts claim kinship with the patroness of
Athens. She is the life-giver�the joy-inspirer. Clothed in the sacred color
which the life-giving river reflects, the midday sky was supposed to partake of
the river's vivifying qualities, and its goddess Nu is very frequently pictured
as seated in the midst of the tree of life, giving of its fruits to faithful
souls who have completed their time of puri�fication and travel in the
under-world, and are waiting for admission to the Land of A.oura, the last
stage of preparation before they are received into the immediate presence of
the great gods.
Two other aspects of
the sky were considered worthy of personification and worship. The morning sky,
or perhaps the eastern half of the morning sky, which awaited the sun's earliest
beams, and which was called Sate, and honored as the goddess of vigilance and
endeavor, and the beautiful western sky at even, more lovely in Egypt than
anywhere else, to the exaltation of which the Egyptians applied their prettiest
titles and symbols. Hathor, the " Queen of Love," was the name they
gave to their personification of the evening sky, speaking of her at once as
the loving and loyal wife of the sun, who received the wearied traveller, the
battered con�queror, to rest on her bosom after his work was done, and the
gentle household lady whose influence called men to their homes when labor was
finished, and collected scattered families to enjoy the loveliest spectacle of
the day, the sunset, in company. Hathor is represented as a figure with horns,
bearing the sun's disk between them, or sometimes carrying a house upon her
head.
The sky, however,
with the ancient Egyptians, did not include the air; that again was
personified in a masculine form, and regarded as a very great god, some of
whose attri�butes appear to trench on those of Osiris, and Pthath; Kneph was
the name given to the god who embodied the air, the living breath or spirit;
and he was one of the divinities to whom a share in the work of creation was
attributed. He is represented in a boat, moving over the face of the waters,
and breathing life into the newly-created world. He was no doubt connected in
the minds of pious Egyptians with thoughts of that breath of God by whose
inspiration man became a living soul; but in his nature aspect he perhaps
personified the wind blowing over the Nile valley after the inundation, and
seeming to bring back life to the world by drying up the water under which the
new vegetation was hidden.
The soil of the
country thus breathed upon, which responded to the rays of Osiris and the
breath of Kneph by pouring forth a continual supply of food for men, was
naturally enough personified into a deity who claimed a large share of
devotion, and was worshipped under many titles. Isis, the sister-wife of
Osiris, was the name given to her, and so much was said of her, and so many
stories told, that it appears at times as if, under that name, the attributes
of all the other goddesses were gathered up. Isis, being a personification, not
of the receptive earth only, but of the feminine principle in nature wherever
it was perceived, whether in the tender west that received the sun, or in tho
brooding midnight sky that invited to repose, or in the cherishing soil
"that drew in the warmth of the sun, and the breath of the wind, to give
them forth again changed into flowers, and fruit, and corn. Isis of " the
ten thousand names " the Greeks called her; and if we consider her as the
embodiment of all that can be said of the feminine principle, we shall not be
surprised at her many names, or at the difficulty of comprehending her nature.
She was, above all else, however, the wife of Osiris and the mother of Horus,
which certainly points to her being, or at all events to her having been
originally, a sky-goddess; but then again she is spoken of as dressed in robes
of many hues, which points to the changing and parti-colored earth. Some of her
attributes seem to connect her with the dark moon, especially' the fact that
her most important offices are towards the dead in the under-world, whose
government she is spoken of as sharing with her husband Osiris. In pictures of
the funeral procession she is drawn as standing at the head of the mummied body
during its passage over the river that bounds the under-world, and in that
position she represents the beginning ; her younger sister Nepthys, the end,
stands at the foot of the still sleeping soul; the two goddesses thus summing
up, with divinity at each end, the little span of mortal life. In the judgment
hall, Isis stands behind the throne of Osiris, drooping great protecting wings
over him and it. This quality of protecting, of cherishing and defending,
appears to be the spiritual conception worshipped under the form of the
many-named goddess. Isis is constantly spoken of as the protector of her
brother Osiris, and is drawn on the tombs with long drooping wings. She is also
frequently represented as nursing Horus, the son who avenged his father, and in
that character she wears the cow's head, the cow being sacred to Isis, as was
the bull to Osiris.
The origin of the
strange intimate connection between these Egyptian gods, and certain animals
held to be sacred to them, and in some cases to be incarnated by them, is a
very difficult question to determine. Two explanations are given by different
writers, one is that the animal worship was a remnant of the religion of an
inferior race who inhabited Egypt in very far back times, and who were
conquered but not exterminated by emigrants from Asia, who brought a higher
civilization and more spiritual religion with them, which however did not actually
supersede the old, but incorporated some of its baser elements into itself.
Other writers look npon the animal worship as but another form of the unending
parable from nature, which, as we have seen, pervades the whole of the
mythology. The animals, according to this view, being not less than the nature
gods worshipped, as revelations of a divine order, manifesting itself through
the many appearances of the outside world; their obedient following of the laws
imposed on their natures through in�stinct making them better witnesses to the
Divine Will than self-willed, disobedient man was found to be.
This is one of the
problems which must be left to be determined by further researches into
unwritten history, or perhaps by a fuller understanding of Egyptian symbols.
That a great deal of symbolical teaching was wrapped up in their worship of animals
may be gathered by the lesson which they drew from the natural history of the
sacred beetle, whose habit of burying in the sand of the desert a ball of clay,
full of eggs, which in due course of time changed into chrysalises and then
into winged beetles, furnished them with their favorite emblem of the resurrection
of the body and the continued life of the soul through the apparent
death-sleep�an emblem which no temple wanted and without which no body was ever
buried. Thinking of this, we must allow that their eyes were not shut to the
teaching of the " visible things " which in the ages of dark�ness yet
spoke a message from God.
We have now gone over
the most important of the Egyptian gods, connecting them with the natural
appearances which appear to have inspired them, so as to give the clue to a
comparison with the nature gods of the Aryans, of which we shall speak in
another paper. There were of course other objects of worship, not so easily
classed, among which we ought to mention Hapi, the personification of the river
Nile; Sothis, the dog-star, connected with Isis, and two other of the funeral
gods; Anubis, who in his nature aspect may be possibly another personification
of air and wind, and who is always spoken of as the friend and guardian of pure
souls, and represented at the death-bed sometimes in the shape of a
human-headed bird as helping the new-born soul to escape from the body;
alsoThmei, the goddess of Truth and Justice, who introduces the soul into the
hall of judgment. The evil powers recognized among the ancient Egyptians were
principally embodiments of darkness and of the waste of the desert, and do not
appear to have had distinct conceptions of moral evil associated with them.
They are, however, spoken of in the book of the dead as enemies of the soul,
who endeavor to delude it and lead it out of its way on its journey across the
desert to the abode of the gods. Amenti was no doubt the desert, but not only
the sun-lit desert the Egyptians could overlook from their western hills. It included
the unknown world beyond and underneath, to which they supposed the sun to go
when he sank below the horizon, and where following in his track the shades
trooped when they had left their bodies. The story of the trials and combats of
the soul on its journey through Amenti to the judgment-hall, and its reception
by the gods, is written in the most ancient and sacred of Egyptian books, the
Ritual, or Book of the Dead, which has been translated into French by M. de
Rong6, and into English by Dr. Birch. The English translation is to be found in
the Appendix to the fifth volume of Bunsen's Egypt's Place in History.
The mythologies of
the other uninspired Semitic nations resemble the Egyptian in the main element
of being personifi�cations of the powers of nature. The Chaldeans directed
their worship towards the Heavenly bodies even more exclusively than did the
ancient Egyptians. Their principal deities were arranged in triads of greater
and less dignity, and all the members of these were personifications of
different aspects of suu and sky. The first triad comprised Anu, the hidden
sun: Father of the gods, Lord of Darkness, Ruler of a far-off city, Lord of
Spirits. By these titles suggestive of some of the attributes and offices
towards the dead, attributed by the Egyptians to Atum and Osiris, was the first
member of their first order of Gods addressed by the Chaldaeans. Next in order came
Bil, the midday sun: the Ruler, the Lord, the Source of kingly power, and the
patron and image of the earthly King. His name has the same signification as
Baal, and he personifies the same aspect of nature, the sun ruling in the
heavens, whose worship was so widely diffused among all the people with whom
the Israelites came in contact. The third member of the first triad was Hoa,
who personified the rays of the sun: Lord of the abyss, Lord of the great deep,
the intelligent Guide, the intelligent Fish, the Lord of the Understanding, are
some of his titles, and appear to reveal a conception
somewhat answering to that of Thoth. His symbol was a serpent, and he was
represented with a fish's head, which connects him with the Philistine's god
Dagon. The second triad comprised Sin or Urki, a moon god, worshipped at Ur,
Abraham's city,�his second name Urki, means the watcher, and has the same root
as the Hebrew name for angel �San, the disk of the sun, and Vul, the air.
Beneath these deities in dignity, or rather perhaps in distance, came the five
planets, each representing some attribute or aspect of the deity, or rather
being itself a portion of deity- endowed with a special characteristic, and
regarded as likely to be propitious to men from being less perfect and less
remote than the greater gods. These planetary gods were called�Nebo (Mercury),
the lover of light; Ishtar (Venus), the mother of the gods; Nergal (Mars), the
great hero; Bel Merodach (Jupiter), the ruler, the judge; Nin (Saturn), the god
of strength. To these gods the chief worship of the Assyrians was paid, and it
was their majesty and strength, typifying that of the earthly king, which
Assyrian architects personified in the winged man-headed bulls and lions with
examples of which we are familiar. The false gods of the Canaanite nations,
Moloch, Baal, Chemosh, Baal-Zebub, and Thammuz, were all of them
personifications of the sun or of the sun's rays, considered under one aspect
or another; the cruel gods, to whom human sacrifices were offered, representing
the strong, fierce summer sun, and the gentle Thammuz being typical of the
softer light of morning and of early spring, which is killed by the fierce heat
of midday and midsummer, and mourned for by the earth till his return in the
evening and in autumn. Ashtoreth, the horned queen, symbolized by trees and
worshipped in groves, is the moon and also the evening star, but, like Isis,
she seems to gather up in herself the worship of the feminine principle in
nature. The Canaanites repre�sented their gods in the temples by symbols
instead of by sculptured figures. An upright stone, either an aerolite or a
precious stone (as in the case of the great emerald kept in the shrine of the
Temple of Baal-Melcarth at Tyre) symbolized the sun and the masculine element
in nature; while the feminine element was figured under the semblance of a
grove of trees, the Ashara, sometimes apparently a grove outside the temple and
sometimes a mimic grove kept within.
There was, however,
behind and beyond all these, another, and perhaps a more ancient and more
metaphysical concep�tion of God worshipped by all the Semitic people of Asia.
His name, II or El, appears to have been for Chaldasans, Assyrians, Canaanites,
and for the wandering tribes of the desert, including the progenitors of the
chosen people, the generic name for God; and his worship was limited to a
distant awful recognition, unprofaned by the rites and sacrifices wherein the
nature gods were approached, ill became a concealed distant deity, too far off
for worship, and too great to be touched by the concerns of men, among those
nations with whom the outside aspects of nature grew, to be con�cealers,
instead of revealers of the Divine; while to the chosen people the name
acquired even new significance, as the voice of inspiration unfolded the
attributes of the Eternal Father to His children.
This slight sketch of
the heathen mythology of the Shemites will probably strike you as very barren
in incident and character; a shadowy hierarchy of gods and heroes indeed,
through whose thin personalities the shapes of natural objects loom with
obtrusive clearness. They may serve, however, as finger-posts to point the way
through the mazes of more complex, full-grown myths, and it must also be
remembered that we have not touched upon the later more ornamented stories of
the Egyptian gods, such as that of the death and dismemberment of Osiris by his
enemy Typhon, and the recovery of his body, and his return to life through the
instrumentality of Isis and Horus.
CHAPTER IX.
iETAS RELIGIONS.
That morning speech of Belarius (in Gymbeline) might serve as an illustration of a primitive religion, a nature religion
in its simplest garb :
"Stoop, boys; this gate Instructs you how to adore the heavens, and
bows you To morning's holy office: the gates of monarchs Are arched so high,
that giants may get through And keep their impious tnrbans on without Good-morrow
to the sun. Hail, thon fair heaven ! We house i' the rock, yet use thee not so
hardly As prouder livers do."
Omit only that part
which speaks the bitterness of dis�appointed hopes which once centred round the
doing as prouder livers do, and the rest breathes the fresh air of moun�tain
life, different altogether from our life, now free alike from its cares, and
temptations, and moral responsibilities. He gazes up with an unawful eye into
the heavenly depths, and fearlessly pays bis morning orisons. " Hail, thou
fair heaven !" There is no sense here of sin, humility, self-re�proach.
And in this respect�taking this for the moment as the type of an Aryan religion�how strongly it contrasts with the utterances of
Hebrew writers. Is this the voice of natural as Opposed to inspired religion ?
Not altogether, for the Semitic mind was throughout antiquity imbued with a
deeper sense of awe or fear�awe
in the higher religion, fear in the lower�than ever belonged to the Aryan character. We see this difference in the
religions of Egypt and Assyria ; and it will be remembered that when speaking
of the earliest records of the Semitic and Aryan races, Ave took occasion to say that it may very well have been to their
admixture of Semitic blood that the Egyptians stood indebted for the mystic and
allegorical part of their religious system ; for among all the Semitic people,
whether in ancient or modern times, we may observe a tendency�if no
more�towards religious thought, and towards thoughts of that mystic character
which characterized the Egyptian mythology. But the Aryans grew up and formed
themselves into nations, and developed the germs of their religion apart from
external influence, and in a land which from the earliest times had belonged to
them alone. Their character, their religion, their national life, were their
own; and though in after times these went through dis�tinctive modifications,
when the stems of nations that we know, Greeks, Latins, Germans, and the rest,
grew out of the Aryan stock, they yet bore amid these changes the memory of a
common ancestry. The land in which they dwelt was favorable to the growth of
the imaginative faculties, and to that lightness and brightness of nature which
afterwards so distinguished the many-minded Greeks, rather than to the slow,
brooding character of the Eastern mind. There, down a hundred hillsides, and
along a hundred valleys, trickled the rivulets whose waters were hurrying to
swell the streams of the Oxus and the Jaxartes. And each hill and valley had
its separate community, joined indeed by language and custom to the common
stock, but yet living a separate simple life in its own home, which had, one
might almost say, its individual sun and sky as well as hill and river. No
doubt in such a laud innumerable local legends and beliefs sprang up, and
these, though lost to us now, had their effects upon the changes which among
its various branches the mythologies of the Aryans underwent; mythologies which
are before all remarkable for the endless variations to which the stories of
their gods are subject, the infinite rainbow-tints into which their essential
thoughts are broken.
Despite these
divergencies, the Aryans had a common chief deity,�the sky, the "fair
heaven." This, the most abstracted and intangible of natural appearances,
at the same time the most exalted and unchanging, seemed to them to speak most plainly of an
"all-embracing deity. And though their minds were open to all the thousand
voices of nature, and their imaginations equal to the task of giving a
personality to each, yet none, not even the sun himself, imaged so well their
ideal of a highest All-Father as did the over-arching heaven. The traces of
this primitive belief, the Aryan people- carried with them on their wanderings.
This sky-god was the Dyaus (the sky) of Indian mythology, the Zeus of the
Greeks, the Jupiter of the Romans, and the Zio, Tew, or Tyr of the Germans and
Norsemen. For all these names are etymologically allied. Zeus (gen. Dios) and
Dyaus are from the same root as are Jupiter (anciently Diupiter) and the com�pound
form Dyaus-pitar (father Dyaus); and Zeo and Tew also bear traces of the same
origin. Indeed it is by the reappearance of this name as the name of a god
among so many different nations that we argue his having once been the god of
all the Aryan people. The case is like that of our word daughter. As we
find this reappearing in the Greek thugatSr, and the Sanskrit duhitar, we feel sure that the old Aryans had a name for daughter from which all
these names are derived; and as we find the Sanskrit name alone has a secondary
meaning, signifying " the milker," we conclude that this was the
origin of the word for a daughter. Just so, Zeus and Jupiter and Zio and Dyaus
show a common name for the chief Aryan god; but the last alone explains the
meaning of that name, for Dyaus signifies the sky.
This sky-god then
stood to the old Aryans for the notion of a supreme and common divinity.
Whatever may have been the divinities reigning over local streams and woods,
they acknowledged the idea of one over-ruling Providence whom they could only
image to their minds as the over�spreading sky. This, we may say, was the
essential feature in their religion, its chief characteristic ; whereas to the
Semitic nations, the sun, the visible orb, was in every case the supreme god.
The reason of this contrast does not, it seems to me, lie. only in the
different parts which the sun played in the southern and more northern regions
: or if it arises in the difference of the climate, it npt the less forms an
important chapter in religious development. There are in the human mind two
diverse tendencies in its dealings with religious ideas. Both are to be found
in every religion, among every people; one might almost say in every heart. The
first tendency is an impulse upwards�a desire to press the mind continually
forward in an effort to idealize the deity, but by exalting or seeming to exalt
Him into the highest regions of abstraction, it runs the risk of robbing Him of
all fellowship with man, and man of all claims upon His sympathy and love. Then
comes the other tendency, which oftentimes at one stroke brings down the deity
as near as possible to the level of human beings, and leaves him at the end no
more than a demi-god or exalted man. One may be called the metaphysical, the
other the mythological tendency : and we shall never be able to understand the
history of religions until we learn to see how these influences interpenetrate
and work in every system. They show at once that a distinction must be drawn
between mythology and religion. The su�preme god will not be he of whom most
tales are invented, because, as these tales must appeal to human interests and
relate adventures of the human sort, they will cling more naturally round the
name of some inferior divinity. The very age of mythology�so far as regards the
beings to whom it relates�is probably rather that of a decaying religion.
In any case, there
will probably be a metaphysical and a mythological side to every system. Thus
among the Egyptians, Amun, the concealed, was the metaphysical god; but their
mythology centred round the names of Osiris and Horus. And just so with the
Aryans, the sky was the original, most abstracted, and most metaphysical god ;
the sun rose into prominence in obedience to the wish of man for a more human
divinity. And if the Semitic people were more inclined towards sun-worship, the
Aryans rather towards heaven-worship, the difference is consistent with the
greater faculty for abstract thought which has always belonged to our race.
The two influences
are perfectly well marked in Aryan mythology. The history of it represents the
rivalry between the sky-gods and the gods of the sun. It is on account of his
daily change that the last less fitly becomes the position of a supreme god.
Born each day in the east, faint and weak he battles with the clouds of
morning; radiant and strong he mounts into the midday sky, and then, having
touched his highest point, he turns to quench his beams in the shadowy embrace
of night. Even the Egyptians and Assyrians, in view of these vicissitudes, were
driven to invent a sort of abstract sun, separated in thought from the mere
visible orb.
This daily course
might stand ,as an allegory of the life of man. The luminary who underwent
these changing shows, however great and godlike in appearance, must have some
more than common relationship with the world below ; he must be either a hero
raised among the gods, or, better (for of this thought the Aryans too had their
dim foreshadowing), he is an Avatar, an Incarnation of the Godhead, come down
to take upon him for a while the painful life of men. This was the way the
sun-gods were regarded by the Indo-European nations. Accordingly, while their
deepest religious feelings belonged to the abstract god Zeus, Jupiter among the
Greeks and Romans, Dyaus and later on Brahma (a pure abstraction) among the
Indians, the stories of their mythology belonged to the sun-god. He is the
Indra of the Hindoos, who wrestles with the black serpent, the Night, as Horus
did with Typhon ; he is the Apollo of the Greeks, likewise the slayer of the
serpent, the Python; or else he is Heracles (Hercules), the god-man�sometimes
worshipped as a god, sometimes as a demi-god only�the great and mighty hero,
the performer of innumerable labors for his fellows; or he is Thorr, the
Hercules of the Norsemen, the enemy of the giants and of the great
earth-serpent, which represent the dark chaotic forces of nature ; or the mild
Baldur, the fairest of all the gods, the best-beloved by gods and men.
It is clear that a
different character of worship will belong to each. The sacred grove would be
dedicated to the myste�rious pervading presence ; the temple would be the
natural home of the human-featured god; and this the more because men
worshipped in forest glade or upon mountain top before they dedicated to their
gods houses made with hands. Dyaus is the old, the primevally old, divinity,
the " son of time " as the Greeks called him.1 Whenever,
there�fore, we trace the meeting streams of thought, the cult of the sun-god
and the cult of the sky, to the latter belongs the conservative part of
the national creed, his rival is the re�forming element. In the Vedic religion
of India, Indra, as has been said, has vanquished the older deity ; we feel in
tie Vedas that Dy&us, though often mentioned, no longer occupies a
commanding place, not however without concessions on both sides. Indra could
not have achieved this victory but that he partakes of both natures. He is the
sky as well as the sun, more human than the unmoved watching heavens, he
is a worker for man, the sender of the rain and the sunshine, the tamer of the
stormwinds, and the enemy of darkness. And if one should examine in detail the
different systems of the Aryan people he would, I think, have no difficulty in
tracing throughout them the two influences which have been dwelt upon, and in
each connecting these two influences with their sky- and sun-gods. Whatever
theory may be used to account for it, the change of thought is noticeable. Man
seems to awake into the world with the orison of Belarius upon his lips; he is
content with the silent unchanging ab�stract god. But as he advances in the
burden and heat of the day he wishes for a fellow-worker, or at least for some
potency which watches his daily struggles with less of godlike sublime
indifference. Hence arise his sun-gods,�the gods who toil and suffer, and even
succumb and die.
It would be too long
a task to try and show these varying moods among all the Aryan folk. Among most
the traces are obscure, for the religions themselves have been almost lost.
Even in those with which we are best acquainted, as for instance, the religions
of the Greeks' and Norsemen, we must not attempt a complete or scientific
exposition, but let the reader draw from a rough sketch their general
character. Let us turn first to the Greek. The chief religious influences in
Hellas came from Zeus and Apollo, and belonged to two separate branches of the
same race who came together to form the Hellenic people. The ancestors of the
Greeks had, we know, travelled from the Aryan home by a road which took them
south of the Black Sea, and on to the table-land of Asia Minor. So far a
comparison of names and traditions shows them advancing in a compact body. Here
they separated; and after a stay of some centuries, during which a part had
time to mingle with the Semitic people of the land, they pushed forward, some across the Hellespont and round that
way by land through Thrace and Thessaly, spread�ing as they went down to the
extremity of the peninsula; others to the
western coast of Asia Minor, and theii, when through the lapse of years they
had learnt their art from the Phoenician navigators who frequented all that
land, onward from island to island, as over stepping-stones, across the Aegean,
Penetrating to every
pleasant bay or fertile valley by the coast, but most of all to those upon the
east, the new-comers mingled with or drove away the former occupants, whom they
called Pelasgi, and who were in fact their brethren who had first gone round by
land to Greece. These, who had advanced little in civilization, and still lived
their early pas�toral life, worshipping their gods in groves or upon hillsides,
these Pelasgi preserved especially their Aryan god Dyaus, whose name had now
become Zeus. This is why we hear of the Pelasgic Zeus; and why Zeus' great
shrines lay in the least disturbed districts of Greece proper, in the west, in the sacred groves of Dodona
and Elis.
But the worship of
Apollo belonged to the sailors from the Asiatic coast. He is the patron of the
arts, of all that higher civilization which the Greeks had learned in contact
with older nations, especially of the divine arts of music and song. He was
worshipped by both divisions of the new Greek race, the Dorians and Ionians, whose personality was so great that it almost
obliterated that of the older dwellers in the European peninsula. So too the
worship of Apollo spread after the Dorians and Ionians throughout the land. But
it began in the east, as Apollo himself was said to have sprung from the island
of Delos.
As before by a
comparison of words, so now in mythology by a comparison of legends, we form
our notion of the remote�ness of the time at which these stories were first
passed current. Not only, for instance, do we see that Indra and Apollo
resemble each other in character, but we have proof that nature-myths�stories
really narrating some process of nature �were familiar alike to Greeks and
Indians. The Vedas, the sacred book from which we gather our knowledge of
ancient Hindoo religion, do not relate their stories of the gods in the same
way, or with the same clearness and elaboration, as do the Greek poets. They
are collections of hymns, prayers in verse, addressed to their gods themselves,
and what they relate is told more by reference and implication than directly.
But even with this difference, we have no difficulty in signalizing some of the
adventures of Indra as almost identical with those of the son of Leto. Let one
suffice. The pastoral life of the Aryans is reflected in their mythology, and
thus it is that in the Yedas almost all the varied phenomena of nature are in
their turn compared to cattle. Indra is often spoken of as a bull; still more
commonly are the clouds the cows of Indra, and their milk the rain. More than
one of the songs of the Rig-Veda allude to a time when the wicked Pawis (beings
of fog or mist') stole away the cows from the fields of Indra and hid them away
in a cave. They obscured their footprints by tying up their feet or by making
them drag bushwood behind them. But Indra sent his dog Sarama (the dawn or
breath of dawn), and she found out where the cattle were hidden. But (according
to one story) the Panis overcame her honesty and gave her a cup of milk to
drink, so that she came back to Indra and denied having seen the cows. But
Indra discovered the deception, and came with his strong spear and conquered
the Panis, and recovered what had been stolen.
Now turn to the Greek
myth. The story here is cast in a different key.
Te boves olim nisi reddidisses Per dolum amotas, puerum minaoi Voce dum
terret, viduus pharetra Risit Apollo.
Hermes (Mercury) is
here the thief. He steals the cattle of Apollo feeding upon mount Pieria, and
conceals his theft much as the Panis had done. Apollo discovers what has been
done, and complains to Zeus. But Hermes is a god, and no punish�ment befalls
him like that which was allotted to the Pawis ; he charms Apollo by the sound
of his lyre, and is forgiven, and allowed to retain his booty. Still, all the
essentials of the story are here ; and the story in either case relates the
same nature-myth. The clouds which in the Indian tale are stolen
A word allied to oar fen.
by the damp vapors of
morning', are in the Greek legend filched away by the morning breeze ; for this
is the nature of Hermes. And that some such power as the wind had been known to
the Indians as accomplice in the work, is shown by the complicity of Sarama in
one version of the tale. For Sarama likewise means the morning breeze ; and, in
fact, Sarama and Hermes are derived from the same root, and are
almost identical in character. Both mean in their general nature the wind ; in
their special appearances they stand now for the morning, now for the evening
breeze, or even for the morning and evening themselves.
The next most
important deity as regards the whole Greek race is Heracles. It is a great
mistake to regard him, as our mythology books often lead us to do, as a
demi-god or hero only. Originally, and among a portion of the Greek race, he
was one of the mightiest gods ; but at last, perhaps because his adventures
became in later tradition rather preposterous and undignified, he sank to be a
demi-god, or immortalized man. The story of Heracles' life and labors is a pure
but most elaborate sun:myth. From his birth, where he strangles the
serpents in his cradle�the serpents of darkness, like the Python which Apollo
slew�through his Herculean labors to his death, we watch the labors of
the sun through the mists and clouds of heaven to its ruddy setting; and these
stories are so like to others which are told of the northern Heracles, Thorr,
that we caunot refuse to believe that they were known in the main in days
before there were either Greek-speaking Greeks or Teutons. The closing scene of
his life speaks the most eloquently of its natural origin. Returning home in
victory�his last victory�to Trachis, Deianira sends to him there the fatal
white robe steeped in the blood of Nessus. No sooner has he put it on than his
death-agony begins. In the madness of his pain he dashes his companion, Lichas,
against'the rocks ; he tears at the burning robe, and with it brings away the
flesh from his limbs. Then seeing that all is over, he becomes more calm. He
gives his last commands to his son, Hyllus, and orders his funeral pile to be prepared
upon mount GEta, as the sun, after its last fatal battle with the clouds of
sunset, sinks down calmly into the sea. Then as, after it has gone, the sky
lights up aglow with color, so does the funeral pyre of Heracles seud out its
light over the ^Egean, from its western shore.
Another deity who was
distinctly of Aryan origin was Demeter (Ceres), a name which is, in fact, none
other than Gemeter, " mother earth." The association of ideas which,
opposite to the masculine godhead the sun or sky, placed the fruitful
all-nourishing earth, is so natural as to find a place in almost every system:
we have seen how they formed a part of the Egyptian and Assyrian mythologies.
There is evidence enough to show that each branch of the Aryan folk carried
away along with their sky- and sun-worship this earth-worship also. Tellus was
one of the divinities of the old Roman pantheon, though her worship gave place
in' later times to that of Cybele and
Ceres: Frigg, the wife of Odin, filled the same position among the Teutons. But
among none of the different branches was the great nature-myth which always gathers round the
earth-goddess, woven into a more pathetic story than by the Greeks. The story
is that of the winter death or sleep of earth, or of all that makes earth
beautiful and glad. And it was thus the Greeks told that world-old legend.
Persephone (Proserpine) is the green earth, or the green verdure which may be
thought the daughter of earth and sky. She is, indeed, almost the reduplication
of Dimeter herself; and in art it is not always easy to distin�guish a
representation as of one or the other. At spring-time she, a maiden, with her
maidens, is wandering careless in the Elysian fields, plucking the flowers of
spring, " crocuses and roses and fair violets," 1 when in
a moment all is changed. Hades, regent of Hell, rises in his black-horsed
golden chariot; unheeding her cries, he carries her off to share his infernal
throne and rule in the kingdoms of the dead. In other words, the awful shadow
of death falls across the path of youth and spring, and Hades appears to
proclaim the fateful truth that all spring-time, all youth and verdure, are
alike with hoary age candidates for service in his Shadowy Kingdom. The sudden
contrast between spring flowers and maidenhood and death gives a dramatic
intensity to the scene and represents the quiet course of decay in one
tremendous moment. To lengthen out the picture and show the slow
sorrow of earth robbed of its spring and summer, Demeter is portrayed wandering
from land to land in bootless search of her lost daughter.
We know how deep a significance this story had in the religious thought of
Greece; how the repre�sentation of it composed the chief feature of the
Eleusinian mysteries, and how these and other mysteries probably enshrined the
intenser, more hidden feelings of religion, and continued to do so when
mythology had lost its hold upon the popular mind. It is, indeed, a new-antique
story, patent to all and fraught for all with solemnest meaning. So that this
myth of the death of Proserpine has lived on in a thousand forms through all
the Aryan systems.
Besides these gods,
the Greeks had some whose origin was, in part at least, Semitic. Almost the
chief of these was the Phoenician moon-goddess Astarte, out of whom grew the
Aphrodite (Venus) of the Greeks, and in great measure Artemis (Diana) and
Athene" (Minerva) as well. The more sensuous the character in which
Aphrodite appears, the more does she show her Asiatic birth; and this was why
the Greeks, when regarding her especially as the goddess of love, called her
Cypris or Cythersea, after Cyprus and Cythera which had been in ancient days
stations for the Phoenician traders, and where they had first made acquaintance
with the Greeks. She was the favorite goddess of these mariners, as, indeed, a
moon-goddess well might be; and they gave her her most corrupt and licentious
aspect. For she had not this character even among all the Phoenicians; but
oftentimes appears as a huntress, more like Artemis, or armed as a goddess of
battle, like AthenS. Doubtless, however, goddesses closely allied to Aphrodite
or Artemis, divinities of productive nature and divinities of the moon,
belonged to the other branches of the Indo-European family. The idea of
these divinities was a common property; the exact being in whom these ideas
found expression varied with each race.
If we travel from
Hellas and from India to the cold north the same characteristic features
reappear. In the Teutonic religions, as we know them,1 Odin has taken the place of the
old Aryan sky-god, Dyaus. This last did, indeed, linger on in the Zio or Tyr of
these systems; but he had sunk from the position of a chief divinity. The
ehange, however, is not great. The god chosen to fill his place resembles him
as nearly as possible in character. Odin or "\Yuotan, whose name means
" to move violently," "to rush," was originally a god of
the wind rather than of the atmosphere of heaven; but along with this more
confined part of his character, he bears almost all the attributes of the
exalted sky-god, the Dyaus or Zeus. Only he adds to these some parts peculiar
to a god of wind; and we can easily understand how, as these Aryan people
journeyed northwards, their wind-god grew in magnitude and power.
It was Odin who
lashed into fury their stormy seas, and kept the impatient vikings (fjord-men)
forced prisoners in their sheltered bays. He it was who rushed through their
mountain forests, making the ancient pine-tops bend to him as he hurried on;
and men sitting at home over their winter fires and listening to his howl told
one another how he was hastening to some distant battle-field, there to direct
the issue, and to choose from among the fallen such heroes as were worthy to
accompany him to Valhalla, the Hall of Bliss.Long after the
worship of Christ had overturned that of the .Jisir,' this, the most familiar
and popular aspect of Odin's nature, lived on in the thoughts of men. In the
Middle Ages the wind reappears in the legend of the Phantom Army, a strange
apparition of two hosts of men seen to join battle in mid-air. The peasant of
the Jura or the Alps could tell how, when alone upon the mountain-side, he had
beheld the awful vision. Sometimes all the details of the. fight were visible,
but as though the combatants were riding in the air; sometimes the sounds of
battle only came from the empty space above, till at the end a shower of blood
gave the fearful witness a proof that he was not the dupe of his imagination
only. In other places, especially, for instance, in the Harz mountains, the
Phantom Army-gave place to the Wild Huntsman�our Heme the Hunter. In the Harz
and in other places in Germany he was called Hackelbiirend or Hackelberg; and
the story went how he had been chief huntsman to the Duke of Brunswick, but for
impiety or for some dreadful oath, like that which had brought vengeance on the
famous Van der Decken, had been condemned to hunt for ever through the
clouds�for ever, that is, until the Day of Judgment.1 All the year
through he pursues his way alone, and the peasants hear his holloa, mingled
with the baying of his two dogs.But for twelve nights�between
Christmas and Twelfth night�he hunts on the earth; and if any door is left open
during the night, and one of the two hounds runs in, he will bring mis�fortune
upon that house.
Besides this wilder
aspect of his character, Odin appears as the heaven-god�all-embracing�the
father of gods and men, like Zeus. " All-father Odin " he is called, and
his seat is on Air-throne; there every day he ascended and looked over
Glad-home, the home of the gods, and over the homes of men, and far out beyond
the great earth-girding sea, to the dim frost-bound giant-land on earth's
border. And whatever he saw of wrong-doing and of wickedness upon the earth,
that he set to' rights; and he kept watch against the coming of the giants over
seas to invade the abode of man and the citadel of the gods. Only these
last�the race of giants�he could not utterly subdue and exterminate; for Fate,
which was stronger than all, had decreed that they should remain until the end,
and only be overthrown at the Twilight of the Gods them�selves�of which we
cannot tell more now.
In this picture of
Odin we surely see a fellow-portrait to that of the "wide-seeing"
Zeus. "The eye of Zeus, which sees all things and knows all," says
one poet; or again, as another says, " Zeus is the earth, Zeus is the sky,
Zeus is all, and that which is over all."
Behind Odin stands
Tyr�of whom we have already spoken �and Thorr and Baldur, who are two different
embodiments of the sun. The former corresponds in character very closely with
Heracles. He is the mighty champion, the strongest and most warlike of all the
gods. But he is the friend of man and patron of agriculture,1 and as
such the enemy of the giant-race, which represents not only cold and darkness,
but the barren, rugged, uncultivated regions of earth. Like Heracles, Thorr is
never idle, constantly with some work on hand, " faring eastward to fight
Trolls (giants)," as the Eddas often tell us. In one of these expeditions
he performs three labors, which may be paralleled from the labors of Heracles.
He nearly drains the sea dry by drinking from a horn; this is the sun "
sucking up the clouds " from the sea, as people still speak of him as doing.
It corresponds to the turning the course of the Alpheus and Peneus, which
Heracles per�forms. Then he tries to lift (as he thinks) a large cat from the
ground, but in reality he has been lifting the great mid-earth serpent (notice
the fact that we have the sun at war with a serpent once more) which encircles
the whole earth, and he has by his strength shaken the very foundations of the
world. This is the same as the feat of Heracles in bringing up Cerberus from
the under-world. And lastly, he wrestles, as he thinks, with an old woman, and
is worsted; but in reality he has been wrestling with Old Age or Death, from
whom no one ever came off the victor. So we read in Homer that Heracles once
wounded Hades himself, and " brought grief into the land of shades,"
and in Euripides' beautiful play, Alcestis, we see Heracles struggling,
but this time victoriously, with Thanatos, Death himself. In these labors the
Norse hero, though striving manfully, fails ; but the Greek is always
victorious. Herein lies a difference belonging to the character of the two
creeds.
Baldur the
Beautiful�the fair, mild Baldur�represents the sun more truly than Thorr does:
the sun in his gentle aspect, as he would naturally appear to a Norseman. His
house is Breidablik, " Wide-glance," that is to say, the bright upper
air, the sun's home. He is like the son of Leto seen in his benignant aspect,
the best beloved among gods, the brightener of their war-like life, beloved,
too, by all things on earth, living and inanimate, and lamented as only the sun
could be�the chief nourisher at life's feast. For, when Baldur died, everything
in heaven and earth, " both all living things and trees and stones and all
metals," wept to bring him back again, " as thou hast no doubt seen
these things weep when they are brought from a cold place into a hot one."
A modern poet has very happily expressed the character of Baldur, the sun-god,
the great quickener of life upon earth. Baldur is supposed to leave heaven to
tread the ways of men, and his coming is the signal for the new birth, as of
spring�time, in the sleeping world.
" There is some divine trouble
On earth and in air;
Trees tremble, brooks bubble,
Ants loosen the sod,
Warm footsteps awaken
Whatever is fair,
Sweet dewdrops are shaken
To quicken each clod.
The wild rainbows o' er him
Are melted and fade.
The light runs before him
Through meadow and glade.
Green branches close round him,
Their leaves whisper clear�
He is ours, we have found him,
Bright Baldur is here."
The earth-mother of
the Teutons was Frigg, the wife of Odin; but perhaps when Frigg's natural
character was forgot�ten, Hertha (Earth) became separated into another
personage. "Odin and Frigg," says the Edda, "divide the
slain;" and this means that the sky-god received the breath, the earth-goddess
the body. But on the whole she plays an insignificant part in our late form of
Teuton mythology. Closely related to her, as Persephone is related to Demeter,
with a name formed out of hers, stands Freyja, the goddess of spring, and
beauty, and love; for the northern goddess of love might better accord with the
innocence of spring than the Phoenician Aphrodite. Freyja has a brother Freyr,
who but reduplicated her name and character, for he too is a god of spring.
Very beautiful is the myth which reverses the sad story of Persephone (and
Baldur) and tells of the barren earth wooed by the returning spring. Freyr one
day mounted the seat of Odin which was called air-throne, and whence a god
might look over all the ways of earth. And looking out into giant land far in
the north, he saw a light flash forth as the aurora lights up the wintry sky.And looking again, he saw that a maiden wondrously beautiful had just opened
her father's door, and that this was her beauty which shone out over the snow.
Then Freyr left the air-throne and determined to send to the fair one and woo
her to be his wife. Her name was Gerda.Freyr sent his messenger
Skirnir to carry his suit to Gerda; and he told her how great Freyr was among
the gods, how noble and happy a place was Asgard, the home of the gods. For all
Skirnir's pleading Gerda would give no ear to his suit. But Freyr had given his
magic sword (the sun's rays) to Skirnir; and at last the ambassador, tired of
pleading, drew that and threatened to take the life of Gerda unless she granted
Freyr his wish. So she consented to meet him nine nights hence in the wood of
Barri. The nine nights typify the nine winter months of the northern year; and
the name of the wood, Barri, means "the green"; the beginnings of
spring in the wood being happily imaged as the meeting of the fresh and barren
earth.
All the elements of
nature were personified by the spirit of Aryan poetry, and it would be a
hopeless task�wearisome and useless to the reader�to give a mere category of
the nature gods in each system. Those which had most influence upon their
religious thought were they who have been men�tioned, the gods of the sky and
sun and mother earth. The other elemental divinities were (as a rule) more
strictly bound within the circle of their own dominions. It is curious to trace
the difference between these strictly polytheistic deities-coequal in their
several spheres�and those others who arose in obedience to a wider ideal of a
godhead. Thus the Indians had a strictly elemental heaven or sky, as well as
their god Dyaus. Him they called Varuwa, a word which corresponds etymologically
to the Greek Ouranos, the heaven. In the later Indian mythology Vanma came to
stand, not for the sky, but for the wide expanse of ocean, and so corresponds
to the Greek Poseidon, the Latin Neptune, and the Norse CEgir. All these were
the gods of the sea and of all waters. The wind, as we saw, combined in the
person of Odin with the character of a highest god; but in the Greek the part
was played by an inferior divinity, Hermes. In India there is no actual
wind-god ; but the character is divided among a plurality of minor divinities,
the Maruts. And in revenge a being of the first importance in the Indian system
receives scarcely any notice in the others. This is Agni, the god of fire, who
corresponds to Hephaestus and Vulcan; and in the north is not a god at all, but
an evil being called Loki. This is enough to show that the worship of Agni rose
into fervor after the separation of the Aryan folk.
We postpone to the
next chapter the mention of the gods of the under-world.
The religions of
which we have been giving this slight sketch have been what we may call "
natural " religions, that is to say, the thoughts about God and the Unseen
world which without help of any special vision seem to spring up simultaneously
in the minds of the different Aryan peoples. But one among the Aryan religions
still in pre-historic times broke off abruptly from its relation with the
others, and, under a teacher whom we may fairly call god-taught, in beauty and
moral purity passed far beyond the rest.
This was the
Zoroastrian, the faith of the Iranian (ancient Persian) branch, a religion
which holds a pre-eminence among all the religions of antiquity, excepting
alone that of the Hebrews. And that there is no exaggeration in such a claim is
sufficiently witnessed by the inspired writings themselves, in which the
Persian kings are frequently spoken of as if they as much as the Hebrews were
worshippers of Jehovah. " Cyrus the servant of God," " The Lord
said unto my lord (Cyrus)," are constantly recurring expressions in
Isaiah. In some respects this Zoroastrianism seems to stand in violent
opposition to the Aryan religion; in other lights it appears as merely a much
higher development of it. In either case, we may feel sure that the older
system was before the coining of the " gold bright" 1 reformer, essentially a polytheism with only some yearnings towards monotheism,
and that Zoroaster settled it upon a firmly monotheistic basis. This very fact
leaves us little to say about the Iranian system considered strictly as a
religion. For when once nations have risen to the height of a monotheism there
can be little essential difference in their beliefs; such difference as there
is will be in the conception they have of the character of their gods, whether
it be a high, a relatively high, or relatively low one; and this again is more
perhaps a question of moral develop�ment than of religion. Their one god, since
he made all things and rules all things, cannot partake of the exclusive nature
of any natural phenomenon; he cannot be a god of wind or water, of sun or sky.
The Zoroastrian creed did afterwards introduce (then for the first time in the.
world's history) a very important element of belief, namely, of the distinct
origin, and almost if not quite equal powers, of the good and evil principles.
But this was later than the time of Zarathustra.
The name which
Zarathustra taught the people to give to the one God was unconnected with Aryan
nature-names, Dyaus or Varuna, or Indra. He simply called him the "Great
Spirit," or, in theZend, Ahura-mazda; in later Persian, Hormuzd or Ormuzd.
He is the all-perfect, all-wise, all-powerful, all-beautiful. He is the creator
of all things. And�still nearer to our Christian belief�before the creation of
the world, by means whereof the world itself was made, existed the Word. Some
trace of this same doctrine of the pre�existing Word (Hanover, in the
Zoroastrian religion ) is to be found in the Vcdas, where he is called Vaeh. It would be here impossible to enter into an examination of the question
how far these early religions seem to shadow forth the mystical doctrine of the Logos. The evil principle opposed to Ormuzd is Agra-Mainyus (Ahrimanes),
but in the true doctrine he is by no means the equal of God, no more so than is
Satan. The successive corruption of pure Zoroastrianism after the time of its
founder is marked by a constant exag�geration of the power of the evil
principle (suggested perhaps by intercourse with deity-worshipping nations of a
lower type) until Ahrimanes becomes the rival of Ormuzd, co-equal and
co-eternal with him.
Such is the simple
creed of the Persians, accompanied of course by rites and ceremonies, part
invented by the reformer, part inherited from the common Aryan parentage. It is
well known that the Persians built no temples, but worshipped Ormuzd chiefly
upon the mountain-tops; that they paid great respect to all the elements�that
is to air, water, and fire, the latter most of all�a belief which they shared
with their Indian brethren, but stopped far short of worshipping any. That they
held very strongly the separate idea of the soul, so that when once a body had
lost its life, they considered it to be a thing wholly corrupt and evil; a doctrine
which carried in the germ that of the inherent evil of matter, as the philo�sophical
reader will discern.
It remains to say
something of their religious books. The Zend Avesta was supposed to
comprise the teaching of Zoroaster, and was believed to have been written by
him. Only one complete book has been preserved�it is called the Vendiddd. The
ZswcHanguage in which the Avesta is written is the oldest known form of
Persian, older than that in use at the time of Darius the Great; but this is no
proof that it dates back to the days of Zarathustra. Part of it is in prose and
part in verse, and as in every literature .we find that the fragments of verse
are they which, survive the Conquest, it has been conjectured that the songs of
the Zend Avesta (Gatbas they are called) may even have been written by
the great reformer himself.
CHAPTER
X.
the other world.
If the sun-god was so natural a type of a
man-like divinity, a god suffering some of the pains of humanity, a sort of
type of man's own ideal life here, it was natural that men should question this
oracle concerning their future life and their hopes beyond the grave. We have
seen that the Egyptians did so: how they watched the course of the day-star,
and, seeing him sink behind the sandy desert, pictured a home of happiness
beyond that waste, a place to be reached by the soul after many trials and long
wandering in the dim Amenti-land which lay between. The Aryans dwelt, as we
know, upon the slopes of the Hindoo-Koosh or in the level plain beneath; and,
if the conjecture be reasonable that a great part of the land now a sandy
desert was then filled by an inland sea,1 many of them must have
dwelt upon its borders and seen the sun plunge in its wave each evening. Then
or afterwards they saw this, and interpreted what they saw in the very thought
of Milton:�
"Weep no more, woeful shepherds, weep no more, For Lyeidas, your
sorrow, is not dead, Sunk though he be beneath the watery floor. So sinks the
day-star in the ocean bed, And yet anon repairs bis drooping head, And tricks
his beams, and with new-spangled ore Flames in the forehead of the morning
sky."
And thus a belief
grew up among them that after death their souls would have to cross this ocean
to some happy paradise which lay beyond in the " home of the sun."
The expectation of a
journey after death to reach the home of shades is all but universal; for this
reason was food and drink placed with the corpse in the tombs of the stone age:
and the opinion that the home of the departed lies in the west is of an almost
equally wide extension. The Egyptian religion, which in its wonderful "
Book of the Dead " gives the oldest (next to the stone age remains) and
one of the completest accounts of primitive belief, expresses both these ideas
very clearly; and to lengthen out the soul's journey, which was fancied to last
thousands of years, and give inci�dent where all must have been really
imaginary, the actual journey of the mummy to its resting-place was lengthened
after life to portray the more ghostly wanderings of the spirit. As the body
was carried across the Nile to be buried in the desert, so the soul was
believed to begin his journey in the dim twilight region of Apap, king of the
desert, to cross a river more than once, to advance towards the sun, light
gradually breaking upon him the while, until at last he enters the "
Palace of the Two Truths," the judgment-hall of Osiris (the sun). Last of
all, he walks into the sun itself, or is absorbed into the essence of the
deity.
It is clear that in
all this we have a nucleus of world-belief touching the soul's future. Yet
along with this there is another tendency to view the dead as being still
present under the mound which conceals his remains, and in obedience to this feeling the old stone age men scattered "shards, flints, and
pebbles," before the mouth of the grave. Such a theory would more
naturally incline to view the home of the dead as being in or beneath the
earth, while the other view would look for it as lying in the west with the
setting sun. So, far as we know, the first was the prevailing feeling among the
Semitic people. The old Hebrew writers (with whom the hopes of immortality were
not strong) speak of going down into the grave,1 a place thought of
as a misty, dull, unfeeling, almost unreal abode. And lastly, a third
element�if not universal, common certainly to the. Aryan races�will be the conception of the soul separating from the
body altogether and mounting upwards to some home in the sky. All these
elements are found to exist and co-exist in creeds untaught by revelation:
and the force of the
component parts determines the color of their doctrine about the other world.
Among all the Aryan
people the Greeks seem to have turned their thoughts farthest away from the
contemplation of the grave, and though the voice of wonder and imagination
could not quite be silent upon so important a question, Hades and the kingdom
of Hades filled a disproportionately small space in their creed. They shrank
from images of Death, and adorned their tombs in cinery urns with wreaths of
flowers and figures of the dancing Hours: it is doubtful if the god Thanatos
has ever been pictured by Greek art. And from what they have left on record
concerning Hades and the realms of death, it is evident that they regarded it
chiefly from its merely nega�tive side, in that aspect which corresponds most
exactly to the notion of a dark subterraneous kingdom, and not to that of a
journey to some other distant land. The etymology of their mythical King of
Souls corresponds too with the same notions. Hades means nothing else than
A-ides, the unseen. And when it was said that the dead had gone to Hades, all
that was literally meant was that it had gone to the unseen place. But later
on, the place became personified into the grim deity whom we know in Homer, the
brother of Zeus and Poseidon, he to whose share fell, in the partition of the
world, the land of perpetual night. And the under-world pictured by Homer is
just of that voiceless, sightless character which accords with the name of Hades.
Even the great heroes lose almost their identity, and all the joy and interest
they had in life. To " wander mid shadows a shadow, and wail by impassable
streams," is henceforward their occupation.
Not that the Greeks
had no idea of another world of the more heavenly sort; ideas obtained
as a joint inheritance with their brother nations ; only their thoughts and
their poetry do not often centre round such pictures. Their Elysian fields are
a western sun's home, just after the pattern of the Egyptian; and so are their
islands of the west, where, accord�ing to one tradition, the just Rhadamanthus
had been trans�ported when he fled from the power of his brother Minos. Only,
observe, there is this difference between such Elvsia and the Egyptian house of
Osiris�the latter was reached across the sandy desert, the former are separated
by the ocean from the abode of men. There then are the heavens of the Greek
mythology; while the realm of Hades�or later on the realm Hades�might by
contrast be called their Hell. Let us look a little nearer at this
heaven-picture.
The Caspian Sea�or by
whatever name we call the great mediterranean sea which lay before them�would
be naturally, almost inevitably, considered by the Aryans from their home in
Bactria to bound the habitable world. The region beyond its borders would be a
twilight land like the land of Apap (the desert-king) of the Egyptians: and
still farther away would lie the bright region of the sun's proper home. And
these ideas would be both literal�cosmological conceptions, as we should call
them�and figurative, or at least mythical, referring to the future state of the
soul. The beautiful expression of the Hebrew for that twilight western region,
" the valley of the shadow of death," might be used for the Apap land
in its figurative significance, and not the less justly because there creeps in
here the other notion of death as of a descending to the land of shades,
for the two ideas of the western heaven and the subterraneous hell were never
utterly separated, but, among the Aryans at any rate, constantly acted and
reacted upon one another. So with the Greeks we have as a cosmo�logical
conception�or let us say, more simply, a part of their world-theory�the
encircling river Oceanus, with the dim Cim�merian land beyond ; and we have the
Elysian fields and the islands of the west for the most happy dead. And then by
a natural transfer of ideas the bounding river becomes the river of death�Styx
and Lethe�and is placed in the region of death ; even the Elysian fields at last
suffer the same change.
The Indian religion,
too, has its river of death. " On the fearful road to Yama's door,"
says a hymn, " is the terrible stream Yaitarawi, in order to cross which I
sacrifice a black cow." This river of death must be somehow crossed. The
Greeks, we know, had their grim ferryman.
The Indians crossed
their river of death by a bridge, which was guarded by two dogs, not less
terrible to evil-doers than Charon and Cerberus.
" A narrow path,
an ancient one, stretches there, a path untrodden by men, a path I know
of."
On it the wise, who
had known Brahma, ascend to the dwellings of Svarga, when they have received
their dismissal
The names of these
two dogs are interesting. They are the sons of that Sarama whom we have already
seen sent by Indra to recover the lost cattle, whose name, too, signified the
breeze of morning. Her two sons, the dogs of Yama, being so closely connected
with the god of the under-world�as Sarama is with Indra the sun-god�might be
guessed as the winds of evening or, more vaguely, the evening, as Sarama is the
morning. They are so ; and by their name of Sarameyas, are even more closely
related to Hermes than Sarama was.1 We now know why to Hermes was
allotted the office of Psychopomp, or leader of the shades to the realm of
Hades� or at least we partly know; for we see that he is the same with the two
dogs of Yama in the Indian myth. But they are also connected by name with
another much more infernal being, Cerberus. Their individual names were Cerbura the spotted, and Syama the black. Thus the identity of nature is confirmed
by the identity of name.
Death and sleep are
twin-brothers, and we need not be surprised to find the Sarameyas, or rather a god Sarameyas, addressed as the god of sleep, the protector of the sleeping
household, as we do find in a very beautiful poem of the Rig-Vedas.
"Destroyer of sickness, guard of the house; oh, thou who takest all
shapes, be to us a peace-bringing friend. Bay at the robber, Sarameyas,
bay at the thief ; why bayest thou at
the singer of Indra, why art tbou angry with me, sleep Sarameyas ? The
mother sleeps, the father sleeps, the dog sleeps, the clan-father
sleeps, the whole clan sleeps, sleep thou, Sarameyas.
Those who sleep by the cattle, those who sleep by the wain, the women who
lie on the couches, the sweet-scented ones, all these we bring to
slumber."
How these verses
breathe of the fragrant air of early pastoral life ! In their names, again, of
" black " and " spotted," it is very probable that the dogs
typified two appearances of night, black or starry.
And yet we must
remember that Hermes is not a god of night, or sleep, but strictly and properly
of the wind, and that his name, as that of Sarameyas, bears this meaning in its
con�struction. The god who bore away the souls to the other world, however
connected with the night, "the proper time for dying," must have been
originally the wind. And in this we see an exquisite appropriateness. The soul
is in its origi�nal and literal meaning the breath�" the
spirit does but mean the breath." What more natural therefore than that
the spirit should be carried away by the wind-god. This was peculiarly an Aryan
idea. Yet let it not be laid to their charge as though their theories of the
soul and future life were less spiritual than those of other nations: quite the
con�trary was the case. So far as they abandoned the notion of the existence of
the body in another state and transferred the future to the soul, their
ideas became higher, and their pic�tures of the other world more amplified. But
how, it may be asked, did the Aryans pass to their more spiritual conception of
the soul ? The more external causes of this progress it is worthwhile briefly
to trace.
The sun, it has been
said, acted powerfully upon men's minds in pointing the hopes of futurity. And
in sketching the sun-myth which lay concealed in the story of the life of
Heracles, we noticed one feature which suggests thoughts about a not yet
mentioned element in the funeral rites of the Aryans. The fiery setting of the
sun would itself suggest a fiery funeral, and pre-eminently so to a race who
seem to have been addicted more than any other to this form of interment.
Baldur, the northern sun-god, likewise receives such a funeral, and this more
even than the death of Heracles typifies the double significance of the sun's
westering course. For he sails away upon a burning ship. ^rhen
therefore this fire burial was thoroughly established in custom as the most
heroic sort of end, it is not likely that men would longer rely upon their helief
that the body continued in an after life, the thought of the dead man living in
his grave or travelling thence to regions below must, or should, by the
consistent be definitely abandoned. In place of it, a theory of the vital
faculty residing in the breath, which almost amounts to a soul distinct from
the body, is accepted. Or if the doubting brethren still require some visible
representation of this vital power, the smoke of the funeral pyre
may typify the ascend�ing soul. Nay, it would appear as though inanimate things
likewise had some such essence, which by the fire could be separated from their
material form. For what would formerly have been placed with the dead in the
grave is now placed upon the pyre. In the funeral of Patroclus (II. xxiiL) we have a complete
picture of these reformed rites, which seem to have become common to all the
Aryan folk; nor surely could we wish anything more vivid and impressive. The
fat oxen and sheep are slain before the pyre, and with the fat from their
bodies and with honey the corpse is liberally anointed. Then twelve captives
are sacrificed to the manes of the hero; they and his twelve favorite dogs are
burnt with him upon the pile. We soon see the reason for the anointing of the
corpse with fat. It was necessary for the peace of the shade that his body
should be thoroughly burned; for the funeral cere�mony was looked upon as the
inevitable portal to Hades; without it the ghost still lingered upon earth
unable to cross the Stygian stream. So afterwards, when the pile will not-burn,
Achilles prays to the North and the West Winds and pours libations to them that
they come and consummate the funeral rite. All night as the flame springs up
Achilles stands beside it, calling upon the name of his friend and watering the
ground with libations from a golden cup. Toward morn�ing the flame sinks down;
and then the two winds, according to the beautiful language of mythology,
return homeward across the Thracian sea.
All the Aryan
nationalities practised cremation in some form or other, or had practised it;
most only gave it up upon the introduction of Christianity. The time is too
remote, therefore, to say when this form of interment was in truth a novelty;
and the fact that the bronze age in Europe is, as distinguished from that of
the stony, a corpse-burning age, is one of the reasons which urge us to the
conclusion that the bronze-using invaders were of the Aryan family.The Indians, owing to their excessive reverence for Agni the fire-god, adhered
to the practice most faithfully; though the very same reason (namely, their
regard for the purity of fire) made the reformed Iranian religion utterly
repudiate it�a fact which might seem strange did we not know how much
Zoroas-trianism was governed by a spirit of opposition to the older faith.Among the Norsemen about the time of the introduc�tion of Christianity into
Scandinavia, Burn? or Bury ? became a test-question, and a constant cause of
dispute between the rival creeds.
In the northern
religion too, therefore, we have the same leading ideas which we have
signalized in the Indian or Grecian systems. Especially does that notion of the
breath of the body, or the smoke of the funeral pyre representing the soul of
the hero and carried upward under care of the wind, come prominently forward.
This might be expected because, it will be remembered, the wind in the northern
mythology is not, as with the Indians, a servant of Yama only, or as with the Greeks a lesser divinity, but the
first of all the gods. To Odin is assigned the task of collecting the souls of
heroes who had fallen in battle; and there are few myths more poetical than
that which pictures him riding to battle fields to execute his mission. He is
accompanied by his Yalkyriur, "the choosers," a sort of Amazonian
houris, half human, half godlike, who ride through the air in the form of
swans; wherefore they�who are originally perhaps the clouds�are often called in
the Eddas, Odin's swan maidens. It has been said that this myth lived on in
after-ages in the form of the Phantom, Army and Heme the Hunter : and
the essential part of it, the myth of the soul carried away by the wind, lived
on more obscurely in a hundred other tales, some of which we may glance at in
our next chapter upon Mythol�ogy. But while this idea of the mounting
soul is often clearly expressed�as for instance where in Beowulf in
the last scene, the hero is burnt hy the sea-shore, it is said of him that he wand
to wolcum, " curled to the clouds," imaging well the curling
smoke of the pyre�there lingered on throughout other ideas of the death home, a
subterraneous land (Helhcim, Hel's home) ruled over by the goddess Hel,with its infernal Styx-like stream, and the bridge of Indian mythology transferred
to the lower world. And so much were the three distinct ideas interwoven, that
in the myth of Baldur each one may be traced. For here the sun-god, who is the
very origin and prototype of the two more exalted elements of the creed of the
heavenward journey,has himself to stoop downward to the gates of
HeL If this legend sanctified for the heathens the practice of fire burial,
they had certainly so much excuse for their obstinate adherence to the older
custom, as one of the most beautiful myths ever told might plead for them.
"We may look upon it in two aspects�first as an image of the setting sun,
next as an expression of men's thoughts concerning death, and the course of the
soul to its future home. If in this latter respect the story seems to mix up
two different myths concerning the other world, we need not be surprised at
that.
Baldur dies, as the
sun dies each day, and as the summer dies into winter. He falls, struck by a
dart from the hand of his blind brother Hodr (the darkness), and the shadow of
death appears for the first time in the homes of Asgard. At first the gods knew
not what to make of it, " they were struck dumb -with horror," says
the Edda;1 but seeing that he is really dead, they prepare his
funeral pyre. They took his ship Hringhorn, (Ringhorn, the disk of the
sun), and on it set a pile of wood, with Baldur's horse and his armor, and all
that he valued most, to which each god added' some worthy gift. And when Nanna,
the wife of Baldur, saw the preparations, her heart broke with grief, and she
too was laid upon the pile. Then they set fire to the ship, which sailed out
burning into the sea.
But Baldur himself
has to go to Helheim, the dark abode beneath the earth, where reigns Hel,the goddess of the dead. Then Odin sends his messenger, Hermodr, to the
goddess, to pray her to let Baldur return ouce more to earth. For nine days and
nine nights Hermodr rode through dark glens, so dark, that he could not discern
anything until he came to the river Gjoll ("the sounding"�notice that
here the Stygian reappears), over which he rode by Gjoll's bridge, which was
pleasant with bright gold. A maiden sat there keeping the bridge ; she inquired
of him his name and lineage�for, said she, "Yestereve five bands of dead
men rid over the bridge, yet they did not shake it so much as thou hast done.
But thou hast not death's hue upon thee ; why then ridest thou here on the way
to Hel ? "
"I ride to
Hel," answered Hermodr, "to seek Baldur. Hast thou perchance seen him
pass this way ? "
"Baldur,"
answered she, " hath ridden over Gjoll's bridge. But yonder, northward,
lies the road to Hel."
Hermodr then rode
into the palace, where he found his brother Baldur filling the highest place in
the hall, and in his company he passed the night. The next morning he besought
Hel, that she would let Baldur ride home with him, assuring her how great the
grief was among the gods.
Hel answered, "
It shall now be proved whether Baldur be so much loved as thou sayest. If,
therefore, all things both living and lifeless weep for him, then shall he
return.
But if one thing
speak agamsthim or refuse to weep, he shall be kept in Helheim."
And when Hermodr had
delivered this answer, the gods sent off messengers throughout the whole world,
to tell every�thing to weep, in order that Baldur might be delivered out of
Helheim. All things freely complied with this request, both men and every other
living thing, and earths, and stones, and trees, and metals, just as thou hast
no doubt seen these things weep when they are brought from a cold place into a
hot one. As the messengers were returning, and deemed that their mission had
been successful, they found an old hag, named Thokk,sitting in a
cavern, and her they begged to weep Baldur out of Helheim. But she said :�
" Thokk will wail Nought quick or dead
With dry eyes For carl's son care L
Baldur's bale-fire. Let Hel hold her own."
So Baldur remained in
Helheim. Such was the sad con�clusion of the myth of which the memory is kept
up even in these days. For in Norway and Sweden�nay, in some parts of Scotland,
the bale-fires celebrating the bale or death of the sun-god are lighted
on the day when the sun passes the highest point in the ecliptic. Baldur will
not, said tradition, remain forever in Helheim. A day will come, the twilight
of the gods, when the gods themselves will be destroyed in a final victorious
contest with the evil powers. And then, when a new earth has arisen from the
deluge which destroys the old, Baldur, the god of Peace, will come from Death's
home to rule over this regenerate world. A sublime myth� if indeed it can be
called a myth.
" Swiftly walk over the western cave, Spirit of Night,
Out of thy misty eastern cave."
CHAPTER XI.
mythologies ahd folk tales.
If we found it difficult to reduce to a
consistent unity the religious ideas of the Aryan races, what hope have we to
find any thread through the labyrinth of their unbridled imagination in dealing
with more fanciful subjects ? The world is all before them where to choose,
nature, in her multi�tudinous works and ever-changing shows, is at hand to give
breath to the faculty of myth-making, and lay the foundation of all the stories
which have ever been told. The two ele�ments concurrent to the manufacture of
mythologies are the varying phenomena in nature, and that which is Called the
anthropomorphic (personifying) faculty in man. Not, in�deed, that all m\-ths
represent natural appearances, some may well enough relate events, human
adventures; but the gods themselves being in almost every instance the personi�fications
of phenomena or powers of nature, the myths of widest extension were
necessarily occupied with these. Religion being the greatest concern of man,
the myths which allied themselves most closely to his religious ideas would be
those which maintained the longest life and most universal acceptance. In
reviewing some of the Aryan myths �in a hasty and general review as it must
needs be�the preceding chapter will serve as a guide to the myths most closely
connected with religious notions, which have a chief claim upon our attention.
Indeed, conversely, it was the fact that so many myths cling around certain
natural phenomena which allowed us, with proper reservation, to point these out
as the phenomena which held the most intimate place in men's minds and hearts. With
proper reservations, because the highest abstracted god does not lend
himself to the myth-making faculty. He stands apart from the polytheistic
cycle�below him the nature-gods who are also the heroes of the mythologies.
With a backward
glance, then, to what has been already written, we may expect the chief myth systems
to divide them�selves under certain classes corresponding with the god�-or
natural phenomenon�who is their concern. We may expect to find myths relating
especially to the labors of the sun, like those of Heracles and Thorr, or to
the wind, like that of Hermes stealing the cattle of Apollo, or to the earth
sleeping in the embrace of winter, or sorrowing for the loss of her greenery,
or joying again in her recovered life. And again we may look to find myths more
intimately concerned with death, and with the looked-for future of the souL
These will mingle like mingling streams, but we shall often be able to trace
their origin.
The diversity of the
natural phenomena which give them rise will not in any way hinder the myths
from reproducing the human elements which have, since the world began,
held their pre-eminence in romance and history. There will be love stories,
stories of battle and victory, of magic and strange disguises, of suddenly
acquired treasure, and, most attractive of all to the popular mind, stories of
princes and princesses whose princedom is hidden under a servile station or
beggar's gaber�dine, and of heroes who allow their heroism to rust for a while
in strange inaction, that
Not necessarily
because such heroes were the sun, but rather that the tales, appealing
so correctly to the common sy�pathies of human nature, attach themselves
pre-eminently to the great natural hero, the sun-god.
Yet, to begin with
the sun-god, his love stories relate most commonly the pursuit of the dawn, a
woman, by the god of day. She flies at his approach; or if the two are married
in early morning, when the day advances, the dawn dies or the sun leaves her to
pursue his allotted journey. We read how Apollo pursued Daphne:, while she
still fled from him, and at last, praying to the gods, was changed into a
laurel, which ever afterwards remained sacred to the son of Let6. There is
nothing new in the story; it might be related of any hero. 1 et, as we find
Greek art so often busy with it, we might guess that it had obtained for some
reason a hold more than commonly firm upon the popular imagination. And when we
turn from the Greek to the Sanskrit we are able to unravel the myth and show
it, so far as the names are concerned, peculiar to the sun-god. Daphne is the
Sanskrit Dahana, that is to say, the
Dawn.
A tenderer love story
is that which speaks of the sun and the dawn as united at the opening of the
day, but of the separation which follows when the sun reveals himself in his
true splendor. The parting, however, will not be eternal, for the sun in the
evening shall sink into the arms of the west, as in the morning he left those
of the east�all the physical appearances at sundown will correspond with those
of the dawn�so in poetical language he will be said to return to his love again
at the evening of life. Well according with its natural origin and native
attractiveness, we find this story repeated almost identically as regards its
chief incidents by all the branches of the Aryan family. For an Indian version
of it the reader may consult the story of Urvasi and Pururavas told by Mr. Max
Miiller from one of the Vedas, Urvasi is a fairy who falls in love with
Pururavas, a mortal, and consents to become his wife, on condition that she
should never see him without his royal garment on, "for this is the manner
of women." For a while they lived together happily; but the Gandhavas, the
fairy beings to whom Urvasi belonged, were jealous of her love for a mortal,
and they laid a plot to separate them. " Now there was a ewe with two
lambs tied to the couch of Urvasi and Pururavas, and the fairies stole one of
them, so that Urvasi upbraided her husband and said, 'They steal my darlings as
though I lived in a land where there is no hero, and no man.' And Pururavas
said, 'How can that be a land without heroes or men where I am,' and naked he
sprang up. Then the Gandhavas sent a flash of lightning, �and Urvasi saw her husband naked as by
daylight. Then she vanished. 'I come back,' she said; and went."
Cupid loves Psyche as
Pururavas Urvasi, but here the story is so far changed that the woman breaks the
condition laid upon their union. Not this time by accident, but from the evil
counselling of her two sisters, Psyche disobeys her husband. They have long
been married, but she has never seen his face; and doubts begin to arise lest
some horrid monster, and not a god, may be the sharer of her couch. So she
takes the lamp, and when she deems her husband is fast locked in sleep, gazes
upon the face of the god of love.
" But as she tnmed at last To quench the lamp, there happed a little
thing That quenched her new delight, for flickering. The treacherous flame cast
on his shoulder fair A burning drop; he woke, and seeing her there, The meaning
of that sad sight knew full well; Nor was there need the piteous tale to
tell."
It may be said that
we have here wandered far from the sun. Cupid or Eros is in no sense a sun-god;
nor has Psyche any proved connection with Ushas, the Dawn. This is true; once a
sun-myth does not imply always a sun-myth. So much the contrary, that it is
part of our business to show how stories, first appropriated to Olympus or
Asgard, may descend to take their place among the commonest collection of
nursery tales. It is the case with this myth of the Dawn, The reader's
acquaintance with nursery literature has probably already auticipated the
kinship to be claimed by one of the most familiar childish legends. But as one
more link to rivet the bond of union between Urvasi and Pururavas and JSeaidy and the Peast, let us look at a story of Swedish origin called Prince
Halt under the JEarth.
" There was
once, very very long ago, a king who had three daughters, all exquisitely fair,
and much more amiable than other maidens, so that their .like was not to be
found far or near. But the youngest princess excelled her sisters, not only in
beauty, but in goodness of heart and kind�ness of disposition. She was
consequently greatly beloved by all, and the king himself was more fondly
attached to her than to either of his other daughters.
" It happened
one autumn that there was a fair in a town not far from the king's residence,
and the king himself resolved on going to it with his attendants. When on the
eve of departure he asked his three daughters what they would like for
fairings, it being his constant custom to make them some present on his return
home. The two elder princesses began instantly to enumerate precious things of
curious kinds; one would have this, the other that; but the youngest daughter
asked for nothing. At this the king was surprised, and asked her whether she
would not like some ornament or other; but she answered that she had plenty of
gold and jewels. When the king, however, would not desist from urging her, she
at length said, 'There is one thing which I would gladly have, if only I might
venture to ask it of my father.' ' What may that be ? ' inquired the king, '
say what it is, and if it bo in my power you shall have it.' ' It is this,'
replied the princess, ' I have heard talk of the three singing leaves, and
them I wish to have before anything else in the world.' The king laughed at her
for making so trifling a request, and at length exclaimed, 'I cannot say that
you are very covetous, and would rather by half that you had asked for some
greater gift. You shall, however, have what you desire, though it should cost
me half my realm.' He then bade his daughters farewell and rode away."
Of course he goes to
the fair, and on his way home happens to hear the three singing leaves, "
which moved to and fro, and as they played there came forth a sound such as it
would be impossible to describe." The king was glad to have found what his
daughter had wished for, and was about to pluck them, but the instant he
stretched forth his hand towards them, they withdrew from his grasp, and a
powerful voice was heard from under the earth saying, "Touch not my
leaves." " At this the king was somewhat surprised, and asked who it
was, and whether he could not purchase the leaves for gold or good words. The
voice answered, ' I am Prince Halt under the Earth, and you will not get
my leaves either with good or bad as yon desire. Nevertheless I will propose to
you one condition.' 'What condition is that?' asked the king with eagerness. '
It is,' answered the voice, ' that you promise me the first living thing that
you meet when you return to your palace.' " As we anticipate, the first
thing which he meets is his youngest daughter, who therefore is left with
lamentation under the
liazel bush : and, as
is its wont on such occasions, the ground opens, and she finds herself in a
beautiful palace. Here she lives long and happily with Prince Hatt, upon
condition that she shall never see him. But at last she is permitted to pay a
visit to her father and sisters; and her stepmother succeeds in awakening her
curiosity and her fears, lest she should really be married to some horrid
monster. The princess thus allows herself to be persuaded to strike a light and
gaze on her husband while he is asleep. Of course, just as her eyes have
lighted upon a beautiful youth he awakes, and as a consequence of her
disobedience�(here the story alters somewhat)�he is struck blind, and the two
are obliged to wander over the earth, and endure all manner of misfortunes
before Prince Hatt's sight is at last restored.
The sun is so apt to
take the place of an almost superhuman hero, that most of the stories of such
when they" are purely mythical relate some part of the sun's daily course
and labors. Thus in the Greek, Perseus, Theseus, Jason, are in the main
sun-heroes, though they mingle with their histories tales of real human
adventure. One of the most easily traceable sun-stories is that of Perseus and
the Gorgon. The later represen�tations of Medusa in Greek art give her a
beautiful dead face shrouded by luxurious snaky tresses; but the earlier art
presents us with a round face, distorted by a hideous grin from ear to ear,
broad cheeks, low forehead, over which curl a few flattened locks. We at once
see the likeness of this face to the full moon; a likeness which, without
regard to mythology, forces itself upon us; and then the true story of Perseus
flashes upon us as the extinction of the moon by the sun's light. This is the
baneful Gorgon's head, the full moon, which so many nations superstitiously
believed could exert a fatal power over the sleeper; and when slain by the son
of Danae, it is the pale ghostlike disc which we see by day. It is very
interesting to see how the Greeks made a myth of the moon in its�one may
say�literal unidealized aspect, as well as the countless more poetical myths
which spoke of the moon as a beautiful goddess, queen of the night, the virgin
huntress surrounded by her pack of dogs�the stars. In the instance of Medusa
these two aspects of one natural appearance are brought into close
relationship, for Athens�in her character of moon-goddess�wears the Gorgon's
head upon her shield.
As we have passed on
to speak of the moon, we may as well notice some of the other moon-myths:
though in the case of these, as of the myths of the sun, our only object must
be to show the characteristic forms which this order of tales assume, so that
the way may be partly cleared for their detection; nothing like a complete list
of the infinitely varied shapes which the same nature-story can assume being
possible. One of the most beautiful of moon-myths is surely the talc of Artemis
(Diana) and Endymion. This last, the beautiful shepherd of Latmos, by his name " He who enters," is in origin the sun just entering the cave of night. The
moon looking upon the setting sun is a signal for his long sleep, which in the
myth becomes the sleep of death. The same myth reappears in the well-known
German legend of Tann-hiiuser. He enters a mountain, the Venusberg, or Mount of
Venus, and is not sent to sleep, but laid under an enchant�ment by the
goddess within. In other versions of the legend the mountain is called not
Venusberg but Horelberg, and from this name we trace the natural origin of the
myth. For there was an old moon-goddess of the Teutons called Horel or Hursel.
She therefore is the enchantress in this case; and the Christian knight falls a
victim to the old German moon-goddess. It has been supposed that the story of
the massacre of St. Ursula and her eleven thousand virgins�whose bones they
show to this day at Cologne�arose out of the same nature-myth; and that this
St. Ursula is also none other than Hursel, followed by her myriad troop of
stars.'
The northern religion
has been fruitful of its sun-myths, though in this system the sun is not
pre-eminent, but holds an almost equal place with the wind�the myths of Thorr
and Baldur are balanced by those of Odin in his character of wind-god. And both
sorts of stories have descended to a place in our nursery tales. Thorr, the
champion of men, and the enemy of the Jotuns (giants), becomes in later days
Jack the Giant Killer; Odin, by a like descent, the Wandering Jew, or the Pied
Piper of Hameln. And thus through a hundred popular legends we can detect the
natural appearance out of which they originally sprang. Let us look at them
first in their
" Wroth was Freyja And with fury fumed, All the jEsir's hall Under
her trembled; Broken Hew the famed Brisinga-necklace."
But the wily Loki
settles the difficulty. Thorr shall to Jotunheim clad in Freyja's weeds,
"Let by his side, keys jingle, and a neat coif set on his
head."
So taking Loki with
him clad as a serving-maid, the god fares to Thrym's house, as though he were
the looked-for bride. It must, one would suppose, have been an anxious time for
Thorr and Loki, while unarmed they sate in the hall of the giant; for the hero
could not avoid raising some suspicions by his unwomanly appearance and
demeanor. He alone devoured, we are told, an ox, eight salmon, "and all the
sweetmeats women should have," and he drank eight " scalds " of
mead. Thrym naturally exclaimed that he never saw brides eat so greedily or
drink so much mead. But the "all-crafty" Loki sitting by, explained how this was owing to the hurry Freyja was in
to behold her bridegroom, which left her no time to eat for the eight nights
during which she had been journeying there. And so again when Thrym says�
" Why are so piercing Freyja's glances ? Methinks that fire burns
from her eyes."
Loki explains that
for the same reason she had not slept upon her journey; and the foolish, vain
giant is gulled once more. At last the coveted prize, the hammer, was brought
in to consecrate the marriage, and " Thorr's soul laughed in his breast,
when the fierce-hearted his hammer recognized. He slew Thrym, the Thursar's
(giant's) lord, and the Jotun's race crushed he utterly." At another time
Thorr engages Alvis, " of the race of the Thursar,"in
conversation upon all manner of topics, concerning the names which different
natural objects bear among men, among gods, among giants, and among dwarfs,
until he* guilefully keeps him above earth till after sunrise, which it is not
possible for a dwarf or Jotun to do and live. So Alvis burst asunder.This tale shows clearly enough how much Thorr's enemies are allied with
darkness.
Thorr is not always
so successful. In another of his journeys3 the giants" play a
series of tricks upon him, quite suitable to the Teutonic conception of the
cold north, as a place of magic, glamour, and illusion. One giant induces the
thunderer to mistake a mountain for him, and to hurl at it the
death-dealing bolt�his hammer Mjolnir. Afterwards he is set to drain a horn
which he supposes he can finish at a draught, but finds that after the third
pull at it, scarcely-more than the rim has been left bare; at the same time
Loki engages in an eating match with one Logi, and is utterly worsted. But in
reality Thorr's horn has reached to the sea, and he has been draining at that;
while the antagonist of Loki is the devouring fire itself. Afterwards Thorr
cannot lift a cat from the ground, for it is in truth the great Midgard
Closely connected
with the sun god are the mythical heroes of northern poetry, the Perseus or
Theseus of Germany and Scandinavia. The famous Sigurd the Volsung, the slayer
of Fafnir, or his counterpart Siegfrid of the Nibelung song, or again the hero
of our own English poem Beowulf,1 are especially at war with
dragons�which represent the powers of darkness�or with beings of a Jotun-iike
character. They are all discoverers of treasure; and this so far corresponds
with the character of Thorr that the thunderbolt is often spoken of as the
revealer of the treasures of the earth, and that the sign of it was employed as
a charm for that purpose. And when we read the tales or poems in which these
adventures are told w-e see how entirely unhuman in character they were, and
how much the actors in the drama bear the reminiscences of the natural
phenomena from which they sprang. This is especially the case with Beowulf. The
poem is weird and imaginative in the highest degree: the atmosphere into which
we are thrown seems to be the misty delusive air of Jotun�heim, and the
unearthly beings whom Beowulf encounters must have had birth within the shadows
of night and in the mystery which attached to the wild unvisited tracts of
country. Grendel, a horrid ghoul who feasts on human beings, whom Beowulf
wrestles with (as Thorr wrestles with Ella) and puts to death, is described as
an "inhabiter of the moors," the "fen and fastnesses;" he
comes upon the scene "like a cloud from the misty hills, through the wan
night a shadow-walker stalking"; and of hiin and his mother it is said,
" They a father know not, Whether any of them was Born before Of the
dark ghosts."
They inhabit, in a
secret land, the wolves' retreat, and in "windy ways�
Where the mountain stream Under the nesses mist Downward flows."
Of the myths which
spring from the wind, and which may therefore be reckoned the children of Odin,
by far the most interesting are those which attach to him in his part of
Psyco-pomp, or soul-leader, and which form a part, therefore, of an immense
series of tales counected with the Teutonic ideas of death as they were
detailed in the last chapter. There were many reasons why these occupied a
leading place in middle-age legend. The German race is naturally a gloomy or at
least a thoughtful one: and upon this natural gloom and thoughtfulness the
influence of their new faith acted with re�doubled force, awaking men to
thoughts not only of a new life but of a new death. Popular religion took as
strong ahold of the darker as of the brighter aspects of Catholicism, and was
busy gra fti ug the older notions of the soul'sf uture state upon the fresh
stock of revealed religion. Thus manyof the popularnotionsboth of heaven and
hell maybe discovered in the beliefs of heathen Germany. Let us, therefore,
abandoning the series of myths which belong properly to the Aryan religious beliefs
as given in chapter ix. (though upon these, so numerous are they, we seem
soarcely to have begun), turn to others which illus�trate our last chapter.
Upon one we have already touched; Odin, as chooser of the dead, hurrying
through the air towards a battle-field with his troop of shield-maidens, the
Valkyriur '; or if we like to present the simpler nature-myth, the wind bearing
away the departing breath of dying men, and the clouds which he carries on with
him in his course. For there is no doubt that these Yalkyriur, these shield or
swan maidens, who have the power of transforming themselves at pleasure into
birds, are none other than the clouds, perhaps like the cattle of Indra,
especially the clouds of sunrise. We meet with them elsewhere than in northern
mythology. The Urvasi, whose story we have been relating just now, after the
separation from her mortal husband changes herself into a bird and is found by
Pururavas
in this disguise,
sitting with her friends the Gandhavas uponi the water of a lake. This means
the clouds of evening sitting upon the wide blue sky. The Valkyriur themselves,
whenj they have been married to men, often leave them as thej Indian fairy left
her husband, and lest they should do so it is} not safe to restore them the
swan's plumage which they wore as Valkyriur; should they again obtain their old
equipment they will be almost sure to don it and desert their home to return to
their old life. The Valkyriur, therefore, are clouds; and in so far as they
appear in the legends of other nations have no intimate connection with Odin.
But when they are the clouds of sunset and when Odin in his character of
soul-bearer becomes before all things the wind of the setting sun (that
breeze which so often rises just as the sun goes down, and which itself might
stand for the escaping soul of the dying day), then the Valkyriur make part of
an ancient myth of death. And almost all the stories of swan maidens, or
transformations into swans, which are so familiar to the ears of childhood,
originate from Odin's warrior maidens. If we notice the plot of these stories,
we shall see that in them too the transformation usually takes place at
sun-setting or sun-rising. For instance, in the tale of the six swans in
Grimm's Household Stories? the enchanted brothers of the princess can
only reappear in their true shapes just one hour before sunset.
In Christian
legends,'subject to the changes which inevitably followa change of belief,
thegodsof Asgard become demoniacal powers; and Odin the chief god takes the
place of the arch�fiend. For this part he is doubly suited by bis character of
conductor of the souls; if he formerly led them to heaven, he now thrusts them
down to hell. But so many elements came together to compose the mediaeval idea
of the devil that in this character the individuality of Odin is scarcely
preserved. At times a wish to revive something of this personal character was
felt, especially when the frequent sound of the wind awoke old memories; then
Odin re-eme'rges as some particular fiend or damned human soul. He is the
Wandering Jew, a being whose eternal restlessness well keeps up the character
of the wind blowing where it listeth: or he is, as we have said, the Wild
Huntsman of the Harz, and of many other places.
The name of this
being, Hackelberg, or Hackelbarend (cloak bearer), sufficiently points him out
as Odin, who in the heathen traditions had been wont to wander over the earth
clad in a blue cloak,and broad hat, and carrying a staff.
Hackelberg, the huntsman to the Duke of Brunswick, had refused even on his
death-bed the ministrations of a priest, and swore that the cry of his dogs was
pleasanter to him than holy rites, and that he would rather hunt for ever upon
earth than go to heaven. "Then," said the man of God, "thou
shalt hunt on until the Day of Judgment." Another legend relates that
Hackelberg was a wicked noble who was wont to hunt on Sundays as on other days,
and (here comes in the popular version) to impress the poor peasants to
aid him. One day he was joined suddenly by two horsemen. One was mild of
aspect, but the other was grim and fierce, and from his horse's mouth and
nostril breathed fire. Hackelberg turned then from his good angel and went on
with his wild chase, and now, in company of the fiend, he hunts and will hunt
till the last day. He is Called in Germany the hel-jdger, " hell
hunter." The peas�ants hear his "hoto" "hutu," as the
storm-wind rushes past their doors, and if they are alone upon the hill-side
they hide their faces while the hunt goes by. The white owl, Totosel, is a nun
who broke her vows, and now mingles her " tutu " (towhoo)with his
" holoa." He hunts, accompanied by two dogs (the two dogs of Yama),
in heaven, all the year round, save upon the twelve nights between Christmas and
Twelfth-night.2 If any door is left open upon the night when
Hackelberg goes by, one of the dogs will run in and lie down in the ashes of
the hearth, nor will any power be able to make him stir. During all the ensuing
year there will be trouble in that household, but when the year has gone round
and the hunt comes again, the unbidden guest will rise from his couch, and,
wildly howling, rush forth to join his master. Strangely refracted there lurks
in this part of the story a ray of the Vedic sleep-god Sarameyas.
These twelve nights occupy in the middle-age legends the place of a sort
of battle-ground be'ween the powers of light and darkness. One ohvions reason
of this is that they lie in midwinter, when the infernal powers are the
strongest. Another reason perhaps is that they lie be�tween the great Christian
feast and the great heathen one, the feast of Yule. Each party might be
expected to put forth its full power.
" Destroyer of
sickness, guard of the house, oh, thou who takest all shapes, be to us a
peace-bringing friend."
The Valkyruir in
their turn are changed by the mediaeval spirit into witches. The Witches'
Sabbath, the old beldames on broom-sticks riding through the air, to hold their
revels on the Brocken, reproduce the swan maidens hurrying to join the flight
of Odin. And, again, changed once more, " Old Mother Goose " is but a
more modern form of a middle-age witch, when the thought of witches no longer
strikes terror. And while we are upon the subject of witches it may be well to
recall how the belief in witches has left its trace in our word "
nightmare." Mara was throughout Europe believed to be the name of a
very celebrated witch somewhere in the north, though the exact place of her
dwelling was variously stated. And it is highly probable that this name Mara
was once a bye-name of the death-goddess Hel, and itself etymologically
connected with the name of the sea (Meer), the sea being, as we have seen,
according to one set of beliefs, the home of the soul.
Odin, or a being
closely analogous with him, reappears in the familiar tale of the Pied Piper of
Hameln, he who, when the whole town of Hameln suffered from a plague of rats
and knew not how to get rid of them, appeared suddenly �no one knew from
whence�and professed himself ahle to accomplish their wish by means of the
secret magic of his pipe. But it is a profanatiou to tell the enchanted legend
otherwise than in the enchanted language of Browning :�
" Into the street the piper stept, Smiling first a little smile, As if he knew what magi i slept In his quiet pipe the
while; Then like a musical adept To blow the pipe his lips he wrinkled."
Then the townsfolk,
freed from their burden, refused the piper his promised reward, and scornfully
chased him from the town. On the 26th of June he was seen again, but this time
(Mr. Browning has not incorporated this little fact) fierce of aspect and
dressed like a huntsman, yet still blowing upon the magic pipe.
Now it is not the
rats who follow, but the children :�
" All the little hoys and girls, With rosy cheeks and flaxen curls,
And sparkling eyes and teeth like pearls, Tripping and skipping, ran merrily
after The wonderful music with shouting and laughter."
And so he leads them
away to the Koppelberg Hill, and
" Lo. as they reached the mountain side, A wondrous portal opened
wide, As if a cavern were suddenly hollowed ; And the Piper advanced and the
children followed. And when all were in, to the very last, The door in the
mountain side shut fast."
This too is a myth of
death. It is astonishing when we come to examine into the origin of popular
tales how manv we find that had at first a funeral character. This Piper hath
indeed a magic music which none can disobey, for it is the whisper of death; he
himself is the soul-leading Hermes (the wind, the piper), or at least Odin, in
the same office. But the legend is, in part at any rate, Slavonic; for it is a
Slavonic notion which likens the soul to a mouse.When we have
got this clue, which the modern folk lore easily gives us, the Odinic character
of the Piper becomes very apparent. Nay, in this particular myth we can almost
trace a history of the meeting of two peoples, Slavonic and German, and the
junction of their legends. Let us suppose there had been some great and long
remembered epidemic which had proved peculiarly fatal to the children of Hameln
and the country round about. The Slavonic dwellers there�and in pre-historic
times the Slaves probably spread quite as far as the Weser�would speak of these
deaths mythically as the departure of the mice (i. e. the souls), and
perhaps keeping the tradition, which we know to be universally Aryan, of a
water-crossing, might tell of the mice as having gone to the water. Or further,
they might feign that these souls were led there by a piping wind god : he too
is the common property of the Aryan folk. Then the Germans coming in, and
wishing to express the legend in their
mythological form,
would tell how the same Piper had piped awav all the children from the
town. So a double story would spring up about the same event. The Weser
represents one image of death, and might have served for the children as well
as for the mice : to make the legend fuller, however, another image is selected
for them, the dark, " concealed" place, namely, Hel, or the cave of
Night and Death.
The two images of
death which occur in the last story rival each other through the field of
middle-age legend and ro�mance. When we hear of a man being borne along in a
boat, or lying deep in slumber beneath a mountain, we may let our minds wander
back to Baldur sailing across the ocean in his burning ship Hringhom, and
to the same Baldur in the halls of Hel's palace. The third image of death is
the blazing pyre unaccompanied by any sea voyage. One or other of these three
allegories meet us at every turn. If the hero has been snatched away by fairy
power to save him from dying, and the last thing seen of him was in a boat�as
Arthur disappears upon the lake Avalon�the myth hold out the hope of his
return, and sooner or later the story of this return nill break off and become
a separate legend. Hence the numerous half-unearthly heroes, such as Lohengrin,
who come men know not whence, and are first seen sleeping in a boat upon a
river. These are but broken halves of complete myths which should have told of
the former disappearance of the knight by the same route. Both portions really
belong to the tale of Lohengrin; he went away first in a ship in search of the
holy grail, and in the truest version returns in
like manner in a boat drawn by a swan. In some tales he is called the
Knight of the Swan. He comes suddenly, in answer to a prayer to Heaven for
help, uttered by the distressed Else of Brabant. But he does not return at once
again to the Paradise which has sent him to earth. He remains upon earth, and
becomes the husband of Else, and a famous war�rior; and part of another myth
entwines itself with his story. Else must not ask his name: but she disobevs
his impera�tive command, and this fault parts them for ever. Here we have Cupid
and Psyche, or Prince Hatt and his Wife, over again. The boat appears once more
drawn by the same swan, Lohengrin steps into it, and disappears from the haunts
of men. We have already seen how through the Valkyruir the swan is connected
with ideas of death. It remains to notice how they are naturally so connected
by the beautiful legend�myth or fact I do not know�that the swan siugs once
only in life, namely, when he is leaving it, that his first song is his own
funeral melody. A much older form of the Lohengrin myth is referred to in the
opening lines of Beowulf, where an ancestor of that hero is said to have been
found, a little child, lying asleep in an open boat which bad drifted, no one
knows whence, to the shore of Gothland.
Death being thus so
universally symbolized by the River of Death, it is easy to see the origin of
the myth that ghosts will not cross living water. It meant nothing else than
that a ghost cannot return again to life. In the dark days which followed the
overthrow of the Western Empire, when all the civilization of its remoter
territories had melted away, there grew up among the fishermen of Northern Gaul
a wild belief that the Channel opposite them was the mortal river, and that the
shores of this island were the asylum of dark ghosts. The myth went, that in
the villages of the Gaulish coast the fishermen were summoned by rotation to
perform the dreadful task of ferrying over the departed spirits. At night a
knock�ing was heard on their doors, a signal of their duties, and when they
approached the beach they saw boats lying deep in the water as though heavily
freighted, but yet to their eyes empty. Each stepping in, took his
rudder, and then by an unfelt wind the boat was wafted in one night across a
distance which, rowing and sailing, they could ordinarily scarcely compass in
eight. Arrived at the opposite shore (our coast), they heard names called over
and voices answering as if by rota, and they felt their boats becoming light.
Then when all the ghosts had landed they were wafted back to Gaul.
Among
underground-sleepers, who reproduce the second image of death, the most
celebrated are Kaisar Karl in the Unterberg�the under-hill, or hill leading to
the under-world; or, as another legend goes, in the Ntirnberg, which is really
the Niedern-berg, the
down-leading hill; and Frederick Red-Beard sleeping in like manner at
Kaiserslautern, or under the Rabenspurg (raven's hill). Deep below the earth he
sits, his knights around him, their armor on, the horses harnessed in the
stable ready to come forth at Germany's hour of need. His long red beard has
grown through the table on which his head is resting. Once, it is said, a
shepherd chanced upon the cave which leads down to the under-ground palace and
awoke the Emperor from his slumber. " Are the ravens still flying round
the hill ?" asked Frederick. "Yes." "Then must I sleep
another hundred years."
There are two forms
of allusion to the old heathen custom of fire-burial. One is by the direct
mention of a fire�a circle of fire, probably, through which the Knight must
ride; the second is by putting in place of the fire the thorn which was the
invariable concomitant of the funeral pile. A thorn-bush having been employed
as the foundation of the fire, a thorn becomes a symbol of the funeral, and so
of death. Hence the constant stories of the Sleep-thorn. In the tale of Sigurd
the Volsung both these symbols are used; when Sigurd first finds Brynhild she
has been pricked by Odin with a sleep-thorn, in revenge, because she took part
against his favorite Hialmgunnar ; for she was a Valkyria. Sigurd awakes her.
At another time he rides to her through a circle of fire which she has set
round her house, and which no other man dared face. In the myth of Sigurd,
twice as it were riding through death to Brynhild, we see first of all a
nature-myth precisely of the same kind as the myth of Freyr and Gerda (p. 143),
precisely the reverse of the myth of Persephone. Brynhild is the dead earth
restored by the kiss of the sun, or of summer. Afterwards the part of Brynhild
is taken by the Sleeping Beauty, and Sigurd becomes the prince who breaks
through the thorn-hedge. Observe one thing in the last story. The prick from
the sleep-thorn becomes a prick from a spinning-wheel, and thus loses all its
original meaning, while the circle of fire is transformed into a thorn-hedge,
proof sufficient that they were convertible ideas. Lastly, it remains to say,
that the stories of glass mountains ascended by knights are probably allegories
of death�heaven being spoken of to this day by Russian and German peasants as a
glass mountain�and perhaps the glass slipper of Cinderella is so too. 8*
CHAPTER
XII.
picture-writing.
Though it is true, as we
have said before, that every manu�factured article involves a long chapter of
unwritten history to account for its present form, and the perfection of the
material from which it is wrought, there is no one of them, not the most
artistic, that will so well repay an effort to hunt it through its
metamorphoses in the ages to its first starting-point, as will the letters that
rapidly drop from our pen when we proceed to write its name. Each one of these
is a manu�factured article at which a long, long series of unknown artists have
wrought, expanding, contracting, shaping, pruning, till at length, the result
of centuries of effort, our alphabet stands clear�a little army of mute,
unpretending signs, that are at once the least considered of our inherited
riches�mere jots and tittles�and the spells by which all our great feats of
genius are called into being. Does unwritten history or tradition tell us
anything of the people to whose invention we owe them, or, on the other hand,
can we per�suade the little shapes with which we are familiar to so animate
themselves, and give such an account of the stages by which they grew into
their present likeness, as will help us to understand better than we did before
the mental and social conditions of the times of their birth ? One question at
least they answer clearly ; we know that while in their earliest forms they must
have preceded the birth of History, they were the forerunners and heralds of
his appearance, and if we are obliged to relegate their invention to the dark
period of unrecorded events, we must place it at
least in the last of the twilight hours, the one that preceded daybreak, for
they come leading sunlight and certainty behind them. It will be hard if these
revealers of other births should prove to be entirely silent about their own.
Another point seems to grow clear as we think. As letters are the elements by
which records come to us, it is not in records, or at least not in early
records, that we must look for a history of their invention. Like all other
tools, they will have lent themselves silently to the ends for which they were
called into being. For a long, long time they will have been too busy giving
the histories of their employers to tell us consciously anything about
themselves. We must leave the substance of records then, and look to their
manner and form, if we would unravel the long story of the invention and growth
of our alphabet; and as it is easiest to begin with the thing that is nearest
to us, let us pause before one of our written words, and ask ourselves exactly
what it is to us.
In tracing the growth
of language, we have learned that words were at first descriptive of the things
they named, in fact, pictures to the ear. What then is a written word ? Is it
too a picture, and what does it picture, to the eye ? When we have written the
words cat, man, lion, what have we done ? We have brought the images of certain
things into our minds, and that by a form presented to the eye; but is it the
form of the objeqt we immediately think of ? No, it is the form of its name; it
is therefore the picture of a sound. To picture sound is, surely, a very
far-fetched notion, one that may have grown out of many previous efforts to
convey thought from mind to mind; but certainly not likely to occur first to
those who began the attempt to give permanent shape to the thoughts floating
within them. So great and difficult a task must have baffled the powers of many
enter�prises, and been approached in many ways before the first steps towards
accomplishing it were securely taken. We shall find that the history of our alphabet
is a record of slow stages of growth, through which the idea of sound-writing
has been evolved; the first attempts to record events were made in a different
direction. Since, as we have agreed, we are not likely to find a record of how
events were first recorded, and as the earliest, attempts are likely to have
been imperfect and little durable, we must be content to form our notions of
the earliest stage in our grand invention, by observing the method used by
savages now, to aid their memories; and if we wish to determine the period in
the history of the human race when such efforts are likely to have been first
made, we must recall what we have already learned of the history of primitive
man, and settle at what stage of his development the need for arti�ficial aids
to memory would first press upon him. Stories and poetry are not likely to have
been the first things written down. While communities were small and young,
there was no need to write painfully what it was so delightful to repeat from
mouth to mouth, and so easy for memories to retain; and when the stock of
tradition and the treasure of song grew so large in any tribe as to exceed the
capacity of ordinary memories (greater before the invention of writing, let us
re�member, than now), men with unusual gifts would be chosen and set apart for
the purposes of remembering and reciting, and of handing down to disciples in
the next generation, the precious literature of the tribe. Such an order of
remem�berers would soon come to be looked upon as sacred, or at least highly
honorable, and would have privileges and im�munities bestowed on them which
would make them jealous of an invention that would lessen the worth of their
special gift. The invention of writing, then, is hardly likely to have come
from the story-tellers or bards. It was probably to aid the memory in recalling
something less attractive and more secret thau a story or a song that the first
record was made.
So early as the time
of the cave-dwellers, there was a beginning of commerce. Traces have been found
of work�shops belonging to that period, where flint weapons and tools were made
in such quantities as evidently to have been designed for purposes of barter,
and the presence of amber and shells in places far from the coast, speaks of
trading journeys. With bargains and exchange of commodities, aids to memory
must surely have come in; and when we think of the men of the Neolithic age as
traders, we can hardly be wrong in also believing them to have taken the next
step in civilization which trade seems to bring with it�the invention of some
system of mnemonics.
No man or woman would
be likely to trust their bargain�ing to another without giving him some little
token or pledge by way of safeguard against mistake or forgetfulness. It would
be a very trifling, transitory thing at first; something in the nature of a
tally, or a succession of knots or woven threads in a garment, allied to the
knot which we tie on our handkerchief over night to make us remember something
in the morning. It seems hardly worthy of notice, and yet the invention of that
artificial aid to memory is the germ of writ�ing, the little seed from which
such great things have come. Unfortunately our discoveries of stone-age relics
have not yet furnished us with any helps to understand how the ancient men
managed and carried out the aids to memory they must have had; but we can trace
the process of invention among still extant races, who keep pretty closely to
first methods. Some tribes of Red Indians keep records on cords called wampum,
by means of beads and knots, and when an embassy is sent from one chieftain to
another, the principal speaker carries one of these pieces of wampum, and from
it reads off the articles of the proposed treaty, almost as easily as if it
were from a note-book.
In the Eastern
Archipelago, and in Polynesia proper, these cord-records were in use forty
years ago, and by means of them the tax-gatherers in the Island of Hawaii kept
clear accounts of all articles collected from the inhabi�tants of the island.
The revenue book of Hawaii was a rope 400 fathoms long, divided into portions
corresponding to districts in the island, and each portion was under the care
of a tax-gatherer, who by means of knots, loops, and tufts of different shapes,
colors, and sizes, managed to keep an accurate account of the number of hogs,
dogs, pieces of sandal�wood, &c, at which each inhabitant of his district
was rated. The Chinese have a legend that in very early times their people used
little cords marked by knots of different sizes, instead of writing; but the
people who brought the cord system of mnemonics to the greatest perfection were
the Peruvians. They were still following it at the time of their conquest by
the Spaniards; but they had elaborated it with such care as to make it
available for the preservation of even minute details of the statistics of the
country. The ropes on which they kept their records were called quipus, from quipu, a knot. They were often of great length and thickness, and from
the main ropes depended smaller ones, distinguished by colors appropriate to
subjects of which their knots treated�as, white for silver, yellow for gold,
red for soldiers, green for corn, parti-colored when a subject that required
division was treated of. These dependent colored strings had again other little
strings hanging from them, and on these exceptions were noted. For instance, on
the quipus devoted to population� the colored strings on which the
number of men in each town and village was recorded had depending from them
little strings for the widowers, and no doubt the widows and the old maids had
their little strings from the colored cord that denoted women. One knot meant
ten; a double knot, one hundred; two singles, side by side, twenty; two
doubles, two hundred; and the position of the knots on their string and their
form were also of immense importance, each subject having its proper place on
the quipus and its proper form of knot. The art of learning to read quipus must
have been difficult to acquire; it was practised by special func�tionaries,
called quipucamayocuna, or knot-officers, who, however, seem only to have been
able to expound their own records; for when a quipus was sent from a distant
province to the capital, its own guardian had to travel with it to explain it.
(A clumsy and cumbrous way of sending a letter, was it not ?) Knot-records were
almost everywhere superseded by other methods of recording events as
civilization advanced; but still they continued to be resorted to under special
cir�cumstances, and by people who had not the pens of ready writers. Darius
made a quipus when he took a thong, and tying sixty knots on it, gave it to the
Ionian chiefs, that they might untie a knot every day, and go back to their own
land if he had not returned when all the knots were undone, and the Scythians who,
about the same time, sent a message to Darius, afford us an example of another
way of attaching meaning to things, and so using them as aids to memory,�
writing letters with objects instead of pen and ink, in fact. Here, however,
symbolism comes in, and makes the mnemonics at once prettier and less
trustworthy as capable of more than one interpretation. The Scythian
ambassadors presented Darius (as Herodotus tells us) with a mouse, a bird, a
frog, and an arrow, and the message with which they had been en�trusted was
that, unless he could hide in the earth like a mouse, or fly in the air like a
bird, or swim in water like a frog, he would never escape the arrows of the
Scythians.
Such, too, was the
bow, too heavy for an ordinary man to bend, which the long-lived Ethiopians
sent to Cambyses; and the twelve memorial stones which Joshua was directed to
place in the river Jordan, in order that the sons might ask the fathers, and
the fathers tell the sons what had happened in that place; and again such were
the yokes and bonds which Jeremiah put round his neck when he testified against
the alliance with Egypt before Zedekiah, and the earthen pot that he broke in
the presence of the elders of the people. Signs joined with words and actions
to convey a fuller or more exact meaning than words alone can convey. Perhaps,
however, we ought hardly to call these last examples helps to memory; they
partake more of the nature of pictures, and were used to heighten the effect of
words. We may perhaps regard them as a connecting link between the merely
mechanical tally, wampum and quipus, and the effort to record ideas we must now
consider�picturing. It must, however, always be borne in mind that, though we
shall speak of these various methods of making records as stages of progress
and develop�ment, it is not to be supposed that the later ones immediately, or
indeed ever wholly, superseded the first anymore than the introduction of
bronze and iron did away with the use of flint weapons. The one method
subsisted side by side with the other, and survived to quite late times, as we
see in such usages as the bearing forth of the fiery cross to summon clansmen
to the banner of their chieftain, and the casting down of the knight's glove as
a gage of battle, or, to come down to homely modern instances, the tallies and
knots on handkerchiefs that unready writers carry to help their mem�ories even
now.
Helps to memory of
all kinds never get beyond being helps. They cannot carry thought from
one to another without the intervention of an interpreter, in whose memory they
keep fast the words that have to be said; they localize tradition, but they
cannot change tradition into history, and are always liable to become useless
by the death of the man, or order of men, to whom they have been entrusted.
A more independent
and lasting method of recording events was sure to be aimed at sooner or later;
and we may conjec�ture that it usually took its rise among a people at the
period when their national pride was so developed as to make them anxious that
the deeds of some conspicuous hero should be made known, not only to those
interested in telling and hearing of them, but to strangers visiting their
country, and to remote descendants. Their first effort to record an event, so
as to make it widely known, would naturally be to draw a picture of it, such as
all seeing the picture would understand; and accordingly we find that the
earliest step beyond artificial helps to memory is the making of rude pictures
which aim at showing a deed or event as it occurred without suggesting the
words of a narrative; this is called "picturing" as distin�guished
from picture-writing. That this, too, was a very early art we may feel sure
from the fact that rude pictures of ani�mals have been found among the relics
of the earliest stone age. We are not perhaps justified in conjecturing that
the pictures actually found are rough memorials of some real hunting scene, but
we learn from them that the thought of depicting objects had come, and the
skill to produce a likeness been attained to, and the idea of using this power
to transmit events lies so near to its possession, that we can hardly believe
one to have been long present without the other. To enable ourselves to imagine
the sort of picture-records with which the stone-age men may have ornamented
some of their knives, spears, and hammers, we must examine the doings of people
who have continued in the same stage of civilization down to historic times.
Some curious pictures
done by North American Indians have been found on rocks and stones, and on the
stems of pine trees in America, which furnish excellent examples of early
picturing. Mr. Tylor, in his Early History of Mankind, gives engravings
of several of these shadowy records of long-past events. One of these, which
was found ou the smoothed sur�face of a pine-tree, consists merely of a rude
outline of two canoes, one surmounted by a bear with a peculiar tail and the
other by a fish, and beyond these a quantity of shapes meant for a particular
kind of fish. The entire picture records the successes of two chieftains named
Copper-tail Bear and Cat�fish, in a fishing excursion. Another picture found on
the surface of a rock near Lake Superior is more elaborate, and interests us by
showing a new element in picturing, through which it was destined to grow into
its next stage. This more elaborate picture shows an arch with three suus in
it�a tor�toise, a man about to mount a horse, and several canoes, one
surmounted by the image of a bird. All this tells that the chief King-fisher
made an expedition of three davs across a lake, and arriving safely on land,
mounted his horse. The new element introduced into this picture is symbolism,
the same that transformed the homely system of tallies into the
Scythian's graceful
living message to Darius. It shows the excess of thought over the power of
expression, which will soon necessitate a new form. The tortoise is used as a
symbol of dry land. The arch is, of course, the sky, and the three suns in it
mean three days. The artist who devised these ways of expressing his thought
was on the edge of picture-writing, which is the next stage in the upward
progress of the art of recording events, and the stage at which some nations
have terminated their efforts.
Picture-writing
differs from picturing in that it aims to convey to the mind, not a
representation of an event, but a narrative of the event in words, each word
being pictured. The distinction is important, for the change from one system to
the other involves an immense, progress in the art of per�petuating thought.
Let us take a sentence and see how it might be conveyed by the two methods. A
man slew a lion with a bow and arrows while the sun went doxon. Picturing
would show the man with a drawn bow in his hand, the lion struok by the arrow,
the sun on the horizon. Picture-writing would present a series of little
pictures and symbols dealing separately with each word�a man, a symbol for
slew, say a hand smiting, a lion, a connecting symbol for " with,"
and so on. We see at once how much more elaborate and exact the second method
is, and that it makes the telling of a continuous story possible. We also
discover that these various stages of writing correspond to developments of
language, and that as languages grow in capacity to express nobler thoughts, a
greater stress would be put upon invention to render the more recondite words
by pictures and symbols, till at last language will outgrow all possibility of
being so rendered, and another method of showing words to the eye will have to
be thought of�for all languages at least that attain their full development.
That a great deal maybe expressed by pictures and symbols, however, we learn
from the picturing and picture-writing of past races that have come down to us,
and from the present writing of the Chinese, who with their radical language
have preserved the pictorial character that well accords with an early stage of
language.
The Red Indians of
North America have invented some very ingenious methods of picturing time and
numbers. They have names for the thirteen moons or months into which they
divide the year�Whirlwind moon, moon when the leaves fall off, moon when the
fowls go to the south, &c, and when a hunter setting forth on a long
expedition wished to leave a record of the time of his departure for a friend
who should follow him on the same track, he carved on the bark of a tree a
picture of the name of the moon, accompanied with such an exact representation
of the state of the moon in the heavens on the night when he set out, that his
friends had no difficulty in reading the date correctly. The Indians of
Virginia kept a record of events in the form of a series of wheels of sixty
spokes, each wheel representing the life of a man, sixty years being the
average life of a man among the Indians. The spokes meant years, and on each
one a picture of the prin�cipal occurrences of the year was drawn.
A missionary who
accompanied Penn to Pennsylvania says that he saw a wheel, on one spoke of
which the first arrival of Europeans in America was recorded. The history of
this dis�astrous event for the Indians was given by a picture of a white swan
spitting fire from its month. The swan, being a water-bird, told that the
strangers came over the sea, its white plu�mage recalled the color of their
faces, and fire issuing from its mouth represented fire-arms, the possession of
which had made them conquerors. The North American Indians also use rude little
pictures, rough writing we may call it, to- help them to remember songs and
charms. Each verse of a song is con�centrated into a little picture, the sight
of which recalls the words to one who has once learned it. A drawing of a
little man, with four marks on his legs and two on his breast, recalls the
adverse charm, " Two days must you fast, my friend, four days must you sit
still." A picture of a circle with a figure in the middle represents a
verse of a love-song, and says to the initiated, " Were she on a distant
island I could make her swim over." This sort of picturing seems to be
very near writing, for it serves to recall words�but still only to
recall them�it would not suggest the words to those who had never heard the
song before; it is only an aid to memory, and its employers have only as yet
taken the first step in the great discovery we are talking about. The Mexicans,
though they had attained to much greater skill than this in the drawing and
coloring of pictures, had not progressed much further in the invention. Their
picture-scrolls do not seem ever to have been more than an elaborate system of mnemonics,
which, hardly less than the Peruvian quipus, required a race of inter�preters
to hand down their meaning1 from one generation to another. This
fact makes us regret somewhat less keenly the decision of the first Spanish
archbishop sent to Mexico, who, on being informed of the great store of vellum
rolls, and folds on folds of cloth covered with paintings, that had been
discovered at Anahuac, the chief seat of Mexican learning, ordered the entire
collection to be burnt in a heap; a moun�tain heap, the chroniclers of
the time call it�lest they should contain incantations or instructions for the
practice of magical arts. As some excuse for this notion of the archbishop's we
will mention the subjects treated of in the five books of picture-writing which
Montezuma gave to Cortez :�the first book treated of years and seasons; the
second of days and festi�vals; the third of dreams and omens; the fourth of the
naming of children; the fifth of ceremonies and prognostications.
The few specimens of
Mexican writing which have come down to us, show that, though the Toltecs had
not used their picture signs as skilfully as some other nations have done, they
had taken the first step towards phonetic, or sound-writing; a step which, if
pursued, would have led them through some such process as we shall afterwards
see was followed by the Egyptians and Phoenicians, to the formation of a true
alphabet. They had begun to write proper names of chiefs and towns by pictures
of things that recalled the sound of their names, instead of by a symbol
suggestive of the appearance or quality of the place or chieftain, or of the meaning of the names. It is difficult to explain this without pictures; but as this
change of method involves a most im�portant step in the discovery of the art of
writing, we had better pause upou it a little, and get it clear to our minds.
There was a king whose name occurs in a chronicle now exist�ing, called
Itz-co-atle, Knife-snake; his name is generally written by a picture of a
snake, with flint knives stuck in it; but in one place it is indicated in a
different manner. The first syllable is still -pictured by a knife; but
for the second, instead of a snake, we find an earthen pot and a sign for
water. Now the Mexican name for pot is " co-mitle," for water
"atle;" read literally the name thus pictured would read
"Itz-comitle-atle;" but it is clear, since the name intended was
"Itz-co-atle," that the pot is drawn to suggest only the first
syllable of its name, co, and by this change it has become no longer a
picture, but a phonetic, syllabic sign, the next step but one before a true
letter. What great results can be elaborated from this change you will see when
we begin to speak of Egyptian writing.
We must not leave
picture-writing till we have said some�thing about the Chinese character, in
which we find the highest development of which direct representation of
things appears capable. Though we should not think it, while looking at the
characters on a Chinese tea-paper or box, every one of those groups of black
strokes and dots which seem so shapeless to our eyes is a picture of an object;
not a picture of the sound of its name, as our written words are, but a
representa�tion real or symbolic of the thing itself. Early specimens of
Chinese writing show these groups of strokes in a stage when a greater degree
of resemblance to the thing signified is pre�served; but the exigencies of
quick writing, among a people who write and read a great deal, have gradually
reduced the pictures more and more to the condition of arbitrary signs, whose
connection with the things signified must be a matter of habit and memory. The
task of learning a sign for every word of the language in place of conquering
the art of spelling does seem, at first sight, to put Chinese children in a
pitiable condition as compared with ourselves. To lessen our com�passion, we
may recall that the Chinese language is still in the root stage (having been
checked in its growth in fact by a too early invention of these same
picture-signs), and that con�sequently it comprehends comparatively few sounds,
the same sound being used to express meanings by a difference in intonation.
This difference could not easily be given in writ�ing; it is therefore almost a
necessity to recall the thing itself to the mind instead of its name.
Pictorial signs are
used in several different ways, some�times as real pictures, sometimes as
ideographs, which again may be divided into groups as they are
used�metaphorically, as a bee for industry; enigmatically, as among the Egyptians,
an ostrich feather is used as a symbol of justice, because all the plumes in
the wing of this bird were supposed to be of equal length; by syndoche, putting
a part for the whole; as two eyeballs for eyes; by metonomy, putting cause for
effect; as a tree for shadow; the disk of the sun for a day, &c. This
system of writing in pictures and symbols requires so much ingenuity, such
hosts of pretty poetic inventions, that perhaps there is less dulness than
would at first appear in getting the Chinese alphabet of some ten thousand
signs or so by heart. "We will mention a few Chinese ideographs in
illustration. The sign for a man placed over the sign for a mountain-peak
signifies a hermit; the sign for a mouth and that for a bird placed side by
side signify the act of singing; a hand holding a sweeping-brush is a woman; a
man seated on the ground, a son (showing the respectful position assigned to
children in China); an ear at the opening of a door means curiosity; two eyes
squinting towards the nose mean to ob�serve carefully; one eye squinting
symbolizes the color white, because so much of the white of the eye is shown
when the ball is in that position; a mouth at an open door is a note of
interrogation, and also the verb to question.
Even Chinese writing,
however, has not remained purely ideographic. Some of the signs are used
phonetically to picture sound, and this use must necessarily grow now that
intercourse with Western nations introduces new names, new inventions and new
ideas, which, somehow or other, must get themselves represented in the Chinese
language and writing.
The invention of
determinative signs�characters put be�side the word to show what class of
objects a word belongs to� helps the Chinese to overcome some of the
difficulties which their radical language offers to the introduction of
sound-writing. For example, the word Pa has eight different mean�ings, and when
it is written phonetically, a reader would have to choose between eight objects
to which he might apply it, if there were not a determinative sign by its side
which gives him a hint how to read it. This is as if when we wrote the word
vessel we were to add "navigation" when we in�tended a ship; and
"household" when we meant a jug or puncheon. The Chinese
determinative signs are not, however, left to each writer's fancy. Two hundred
and fourteen signs (originally themselves pictures, remember) have been chosen
out, and are always used in this way. The classes into which objects are
divided by these numerous signs are minute, and do not appear to follow any
scientific method or arrangement. There is a sign to show that a written word
belongs to the class noses, another for rats, another for frogs, another for
tortoises. One is inclined to think that the helpful signs must be as hard to
remember as the words themselves, and that they can only be another element in
the general confusion. Probably their frequent recurrence mates them soon
become familiar to Chinese readers and they act as finger�posts to guide the
thoughts into the right direction. De�terminative signs have always come in to
help in the transi�tional stage between purely ideographic and purely phonetic
writing, and were used by both Egyptians and Assyrians in their elaborate
systems as soon as the phonetic principle be�gan to be employed among their
ideographs.
It is an interesting
fact that the Japanese have dealt with the Chinese system of writing precisely
as did the Phoenicians with the Egyptian hieroglyphics. They have chosen
forty-seven signs from the ten thousand employed by the Chinese, and they use
them phonetically only; that is to say, as true sound-carrying letters.
CHAPTER
XIII.
phonetic writing
We have now to trace the process through
which picture-writing passed into sound-writing, and to find out how signs (for
we shall see they are the same signs) which were origin�ally meant to recall
objects to the eye, have ended in being used to suggest, or, shall we say, picture, sounds to the ear. A written word, let us remember, is the picture of a
sound, and it is our business to hunt the letters of which it is formed through
the changes they must have undergone while they were taking upon themselves the
new office of suggesting sound. We said too that we must not expect to find any
written account of this change, and that it is only by examining the forms of
the records of other events that this greatest event of literature can be made
out. What we want is to see the signs, while busy in telling us other history,
beginning to perform their new duties side by side with the old, so that we may
be sure of their identity ; and this oppor�tunity is afforded us by the
hieroglyphic writing of the ancient Egyptians, who, being people disposed to
cling to everything that had once been done, never altogether left off employing
their first methods, even after they had taken another and yet another step
towards a more perfect system of writing, but carried on the old ways and the
new improvements side by side. The nature of their language, which was in part
radical and in part inflexional, was one cause of this inter�mixture of methods
in their writing ; it had partly but not entirely outgrown the stage in which
picture-signs are most useful. Ideograph is
the proper name for a picture-sign, which, as soon as picture-writing
supersedes picturing, becomes the sign for a thought quite as often as it is
the sign for an object. Very ancient as are the earliest Egyptian records, we
have none which belong to the time when the invention of writing was in the stage
of picturing: we only conjecture that it passed through this earliest stage by
finding examples of picturing mixed with their other kinds of writing. Each
chapter of the Ritual, the oldest of Egyptian books, has one or more
designs at its head, in which the contents of the chapter are very carefully
and ingeniously pictured, and the records of royal triumphs and progresses
which are cut out on temple and palace walls in ideographic and phonetic signs,
are always prefaced by a large picture which tells the same story in the
primitive method of picturing without words.
The next stage of the
invention, ideographic writing, the ancient Egyptians carried to great
perfection, and reduced to a careful system. The signs for ideas became fixed,
and were not chosen according to each writer's fancy. Every picture had its
settled value, and was always used in the same way. A sort of alphabet of
ideographs was thus formed. A heart drawn in a certain way always meant "
love," an eye with a tear on the lash meant " grief," two hands
holding a shield and spear meant the verb "to fight," a tongue meant
"to speak," a foot-print " to travel," a man kneeling on
the ground signified " a conquered enemy," &c. Conjunctions and
prepositions had their fixed pictures, as well as verbs and nouns : " also
" was pictured by a coil of rope with a second band across it,
"and" by a coil of rope with an arm across it, " over"' by
a circle surmounting a square, " at" by the picture of a hart
reposing near the sign for water�a signifi�cant picture for such a little word,
which recalls to our minds, "As the hart panteth after the
water-brooks," and leads us to wonder whether the writer of the Psalm were
not familiar with the Egyptian hieroglyph.
So much was done in
this way, we almost wonder that the need for another method came to be felt;
perhaps a peculiarity of the Egyptian language helped the splendid thought of
picturing sound to flash one happy day into the mind of some priest,
when he was laboriously cutting his sacred sentence into a temple wall. The language
of ancient Egypt, like that of China (being, as we said before, in part a
radical ' language), had a great many words alike in sound but different in
meaning, and it could not fail to happen that some of these words with two
meanings would indicate a thing easy to draw, and a thought difficult to
symbolize; for example, the ancient Egyptian word neb means a basket and
a ruler; and nofre means a lute and goodness. There would come a day
when a clever priest, cutting a record on a wall, would bethink him of putting
a lute iustead of the more elaborate symbol that had hitherto been used for
goodness. It was a simple change, and might not have struck any one at the time
as involving more than the saving of a little trouble to hieroglyphists, but it
was the germ out of which our system of writing sprang. The priest who did that had taken the first step towards picturing sound, and cut a true phonetic
sign�the true if remote parent indeed of one of our own twenty-four letters of
the alphabet. Let us consider how the thought would probably grow. The writers
once started on the road of making signs stand for sounds would observe how
much fewer sounds there are than objects and ideas, and that words even when
unlike are composed of the same sounds pronounced in different succession. If
we were employed in painting up a notice on a wall, and intended to use
ideographs instead of letters, and moreover if the words manage, mansion,
manly, mantles, came into our sentence, should we not begin each of these words
by a figure of a man ? and again, if we had to write treacle, treason, treaty,
we should begin each with a picture of a tree; we should find it easier to use
the same sign often for part of a word, than to invent a fresh symbol for each
entire word as we wrote it. For the remaining syllables of the words we had so
successfully begun we should have to invent other signs, and we should perhaps
soon dis-- cover that in each syllable there were in fact several sounds, or
movements of lips or tongue, and that the same sounds differently combined came
over and over again in all our words. Then we might go on to discover exactly
how many movements of the speaking organs occurred in ordinary speech, and the
thought of choosing a particular picture to i-.represent each movement might
occur; we should then have invented an alphabet in its early stage of
development. That was the road along which the ancient Egyptians travelled, but
they progressed very slowly, and never quite reached its end.
They began by having
syllabic signs for proper names. Osiri was a name that occurred frequently in
their sacred writings, and they happened to have two words in their language
which made up its sound. Os a throne, iri an eye. Hence a small
picture of a throne came to he the syllabic sign for the sound os, the
oval of an eye for the sound iri; in like manner Totro, the name of an
early king, was written by a hand Tot and a circle Ho, and thus a
system of spelling by syllables was established. Later they began to divide
syllables into movements of the speaking organs, and to represent these
movements by drawing objects whose name began with the movement intended. For
example, a picture of a lion (labo) was drawn not for the whole sound (labo) but for the liquid I; an
owl (mvlag) stood for the lahial m; a water-jug (nem) for n. They had now in fact invented letters, but though they had made the great
discovery they did not use it in the best way. They could not make up their minds
to keep to phonetic writing, and throw away their pictures and ideo�graphs.
They continued to mix all these methods together, so that when they painted a
lion�it might be a picture and mean lion, it might be a symbolic sign
and mean pre�eminence, or it might he a true letter and stand for the
liquid I. The Egyptians were obliged to invent a whole army of
determinative signs, like those now employed by the Chinese, which they placed
hefore their pictures to show when a group was to be read according to its
sound, when it was used symbolically, and when it was a simple representation
of the object intended.
Another source of
difficulty in deciphering the writing of the ancient Egyptians, is that they
were not content with a single sign for a single sound, they had a great, many
different pictures for each letter, and used them in fanciful methods: for
example, if I occurred in the name of a king, or god, they would use the
lion picture to express it, thinking it appropriate; but if the same sound
occurred in the name of a queeu, they would use a lotus-lily as more feminine
and elegant. They had as many as twenty different pictures which could be used
for the first letter of our alphabet a, and thirty for the letter h, one
of which closely resembles our capital H in form, being two upright
palm-branches held by two arms which make the cross of the H. No letter had
fewer than five pictures to express its sound, from which the writer might
choose according to his fancy ; or perhaps, sometimes, according to the space
he had to fill up on the wall, or obelisk, where he was writing, and the effect
in form and color he wished his sentence to produce. Then again, all their
letters were not quite true letters (single breathings). The Egyptians never
got quite clear about vowels and consonants, and generally spelt words (unless
they began with a vowel sound) by consonants only, the consonants
carrying a vowel breathing as well as their own sound, and thus being syllabic
signs instead of true letters.
Since much of the
writing of the ancient Egyptians was used ornamentally as decoration for the
walls of their houses and temples, and took with them the place of the tapestry
of later times, the space required to carry out their complex system of writing
was no objection to it in their eyes; neither did they care much about the
difficulty of learning so elaborate an array of signs, as for many centuries
the art of reading and writing was almost entirely confined to an order of
priests whose occupation and glory it was. When writing became more common, and
was used for ordinary as well as sacred purposes, the pictorial element
disappeared from some of their styles of writing, and quick ways of making the
pictures were invented, which reduced them to as completely arbitrary signs,
with no resemblance to the objects intended, as the Chinese signs now are.
The ancient Egyptians
had two ways of quick writing, the Hieratic (used by a priest), which was
employed for the sacred writings only, and the Demotic used by the people,
which was employed for law-papers, letters, and all writing that did not touch
on religious matters or enter into the province of the priest. Yet, though
literature increased and writing was much practised by people engaged in the
ordinary business of life (we see pictures on the tombs of the.great man's
upper servant seated before his desk and recording with reed-pen and ink-horn
the numbers of the flocks and herds belonging to the farm), little was done to
simplify the art of writing by the ancient Egyptians. Down to the latest times
when Hieroglyphics were cut, and Demotic and Hieratic characters written, the
same confusing variety of signs were employed� pictorial, ideographic,
symbolic, phonetic�all mixed up to�gether, with nothing to distinguish them but
the determinative signs before spoken of, which themselves added a new element
to the complexity.
It was left for a
less conservative and more enter�prising people than the ancient Egyptians to
take the last and greatest step in perfecting the invention which the ancient
Egyptians had brought so far on its road, and by throwing away all the first
attempts, allow the serviceable, successful parts of the system to stand out
clear. The Phoenicians, to whom tradition points as the introducers of our
alphabet into Europe, and who, during early ages, were in very close political
and trading connection with the ancient Egyptians, are now believed to be the
authors of the improve�ment by which we benefit. They did not invent the
alphabet which the Greeks learned from them; they could have had no reason to
invent signs, when they must have been well ac�quainted with the superabundance
that had been in use for centuries before they began to build their cities by
the sea�shore. What they probably did was to choose from the Egyptian
characters, with which all the traders of the world must have been familiar,
just so many phonetic or sound-carrying signs as represented the sounds of
which speech is made up; and rejecting all others, they kept strictly to these
chosen ones in all their future writings. This was a great work to have
accomplished, and we must not suppose that it was done by one man, or even in
one generation; as probably it took a very long time to perfect the separation
between vowels and consonants: a distinction which had already been made by the
ancient Egyptians, for they had vowel signs, though, as before remarked, they
constantly made their con�sonants carry the vowels, and spelt words with the
consonants alone. You will remember that consonants are the most important
elements of language, and constitute, as we have said before, the bones of
words; but also that distinctions of time, person, and case depended in an
early stage of language on vowels; and you will therefore understand how
important to clearness of expression it was to have a clearly defined separate
sign for the vowels and diphthongs that had, so to speak, all the exactitude of
meaning in their keeping. The Phoenicians, of all the people in the early
world, were most in need of a clear and precise method of writing: for, being
the great traders and settlers of ancient times, one of its principal uses
would be to enable them to communicate with friends at a distance by means of
writings which should convey the thoughts of the absent ones, or the private
instructions of a trader to his partner without need of an interpreter.
The advantages of
simplicity and clearness had been less felt by Egyptian priests while
inscribing their stately records on walls of temples and palaces, and on the
tapering sides of obelisks which were meant to lift sacred words up to the eye
of Heaven rather than to expose them to those of men. They believed that a race
of priests would continue, as long as the temples and obelisks continued, who
could explain the writing to those worthy to enter into its mysteries; and they
were not sorry, perhaps, to keep the distinction of understanding the art of
letters to their own caste.
It was not till
letters were needed by busy people, who had other things to do besides
studying, that the necessity for making them easy to learn, and really
effective as carriers of thought across distances, was sincerely felt. Two con�jectures
as to the method pursued by the Phoenicians in choosing- theirletters and
adapting them to their own language have been made by the learned. One is, that
while they took the forms of their letters from the Egyptian system of signs,
and adopted the principle of making each picture of an object stand for the
first sound of its name, as labo for I; they did not give to each
letter the value it had in the Egyptian alphabet, but allowed it to mean for
them the first sound of its name in their own language. For example, they took
the sign for an ox's head and made it stand for the sound a, not because
it was one of the Egyptian signs for " a," but because Aleph
was the name for an ox and " a " was its first syllable. This,
which seems a natural method enough, is, however, not the method followed by the
Japanese in choosing their alphabet from the Chinese signs; and more recent
investigations prove such a close resemblance between the earliest forms of
Phoenician letters, and early forms of signs for the same sounds in Hieratic
character, that a complete descent in sound-bearing power, as well as in form,
is now claimed for our letters from those hieroglyphics, which, in our
ignorance of the relationship, we used to consider a synonymous term for
something unintelligible. The Semitic language spoken by the Phoenicians was
richer in sounds than the less developed language spoken by the ancient
Egyptians; but as the Egyp�tians used several signs for each letter, the
Phoenicians easily fell into the habit of giving a slightly different value to
two forms originally identical, and thus provided for all the more delicate
distinctions of their tongue. A close comparison of the forms of the letters of
the earliest known Canaanite in�scriptions with Hieratic writing of the time of
the Old Empire reveals a resemblance so striking between fifteen of the
Phoenician letters and Hieratic characters carrying the same sounds, that a
conviction of the derivation of one from the other impresses itself on even a
careless observer. The correspondence of the other five Canaanite letters with
their Hieratic counterparts is less obvious to the uneducated eye, but experts
in such investigations see sufficient likeness even there to confirn the
theory.
The gradual
divergence of the Phoenician characters from their Hieratic parents is easily
accounted for by the difference of the material and the instrument employed by
the Phoenicians and Egyptians in writing. The Hieratic character was painted by Egyptian priests on smooth papyrus
leaves with a brush or broad pointed reed pen. The Canaanite inscriptions are
graven with a sharp instrument on hard stone, and as a natural con�sequence the
round curves of the Hieratic character become sharp points, and there is a
general simplification of form and a throwing aside of useless lines and dots,
the last remnants of the picture from which each Hieratic character originally
sprang. The names given later to the Phoenician letters, Aleph, an "ox;"
Beth, a "house;" Gimel, a "camel;" Daleth, a "door;
"are not the names of the objects from which the forms of these letters
were originally taken. The Hieratic " A " was taken from the picture
of an eagle, which stood for " A" in hieroglyphics; "B "
was originally a sort of heron; " D," a hand with the fingers spread
out. New names were given by the Phoenicians to the forms they had borrowed,
from fancied resemblances to objects which, in their language, began with the
sound intended, when the original Egyptian names had been forgotten. It is hard
for us to see a likeness between our letter " A" and an ox's horns
with a yoke across; or between " B" and the ground-plan of a house;
" G " and a camel's head and neck; " M " and water; "
W " and a set of teeth; "P" and the back of a head set on the
neck; but our letters have gone through a great deal of straightening and
putting into order since they came into Europe and were sent out on their
further westward travels. The reader who has an opportunity of examining early
specimens of letters on Greek coins will find a freedom of treatment which
makes them much more suggestive of resemblances, and the earlier Phoenician
letters were, no doubt, more pictorial still. The interesting and important
thing to be remembered con�cerning our letters is that each one of them was,
without doubt, a picture once, and gets its shape in no other way than by
having- once stood for an object, whose name in the ancient people's language
began with the sound it conveys to us.
These Phoenician
letters, born on the walls of Egyptian tombs older than Abraham, and selected
by Phoenician traders who took their boats up to Memphis at or before Joseph's
time, are the parents of all the alphabets now used in the world, with the
exception of that one which the Japanese have taken from Chinese picture-writing.
The Phoenicians carried their alphabet about with them to all the countries
where they planted trading settlements, and it was adopted by Greeks and
Latins, and gradually modified to suit the languages of all the civilized
peoples of east and west. The Hebrew square letters are a form of divergence
from the original type, and even the Sanskrit character in all its various
styles can be traced back to the same source by experts who have studied the
transformations through which it has passed in the course of ages. It is, of
course, easy to understand that these ubiquitous-little shapes which through so
many centuries have had the task laid on them of spelling words in so many
different languages must have undergone some variations in their values to suit
the tongues that interpreted them.
The original family
of twenty letters have not always kept together, or avoided the intrusion of
new comers. Some of the languages they have had to express, heing in an early
stage of development, have not wanted even so many as twenty letters, and have
gradually allowed some of them to fall into disuse and be forgotten; an
instance of this we find in the alphabet of the northern nations�the
Gothic�which consisted only of sixteen runes�called by new names; they were
most probably taken from the Phoenicians and furnished with mystic sayings
belonging only to themselves.
In languages where
nicer distinctions of sound were called for than the original twenty Phoenician
signs carried, a few fresh letters were added, but in no ease has any quite new
form been invented. The added letters have always been a modification of one of
the older forms�either a letter cut in half, or one modified by an additional
stroke or dot. In this way the Romans made G out of C, by adding
a stroke to one of its horns. T^and IT, I and J were originally
slightly different ways of writing one letter, which had been taken advantage
of to express a new sound when the necessity for a greater number of
sound-signs arose. At first sight it seems a simple thing enough to invent a
letter, but let us remember that such a thing as an arbitrarily-invented letter
does not exist anywhere. To create one out of nothing is a feat of which human
ingenuity does not seem capable. Every single letter in use anywhere (we can
hardly dwell on this thought too long) has descended in regular steps from the
pictured object in whose name the sound it represents originally dwelt. Shape
and sound were wedded together in early days by the first beginners of writing,
and all the labor bestowed on them since has only been in the way of
modification and adaptation to changed circumstances. Xo wonder that, when
people believed a whole alphabet to have been invented straight off, they also
thought that it took a god to do it. Thoth, the Great-and-great, with his
emblems of justice and his recording pencil; Oannes, the Sea-monster, to whom
all the wonders of the under-world lay open; Swift Hermes, with his cap of
invisibility and his magic staff; One-eyed Odin, while his dearly-purchased
draught of wisdom-water was inspiring him still. Xo one indeed�as we see
plainly enough now�but a hero like one of these, was equal to the task of
inventing an alphabet.
Before we have quite
done with alphabets, I ought to mention another system of ancient writing, the
cuneiform; which, though it has left no trace of itself on modern alphabets, is
the vehicle which preserves some of the most interesting and ancient records in
the world. The cuneiform or arrow-shaped character used by the ancient
Chaldaeans, Assyrians, Babylonians, and Persians, is supposed to owe its
peculiar form to the material on which it was habitually graven by those who
employed it. It arose in a country where the temples were built of unburned
brick instead of stone, and the wedge-shaped form of the lines composing the
letters is precisely what would be most easily produced on wet clay by the
insertion and rapid withdrawal of a blunt-pointed stick or reed. Like all other
systems, it began in rude pictures, which gradually came to have a phonetic
value, in the same manner as did the Egyptian hieroglyphics. The earliest
records in this character are graven on the unburned bricks of pyramidal-shaped
temples, which a little before the time of Abraham began to be built by a
nation composed of mixed Shemite, Cushite, and Scythian peoples round the
shores of the Persiaji Gulf. The invention of the character is ascribed in the
records to the Scythian race, who are always designated by the sign of a wedge,
which was equivalent to calling them the writers, or the literary people. It is
perhaps allowable to conjecture that the Scythian invention terminated with the
notion of depicting objects by means of wedge-shaped lines, and using them for
picture-writing, such as the Chinese (also a Turanian people) invented, as you
will remember, so early, that their language was checked in its progress of
development by the premature discovery. The subsequent unfolding and
application of the invention belonged to the Shemites. In theirTiands it became
the vehicle in which the history of the two great empires of Babylon and
Nineveh, and the achievements of ancient Persian kings, have come down to us.
We have all seen and wondered at the minute writing on the Assyrian marbles in
the British Museum, and stood in awe before the human-headed monster gods�
" Their flanks with dark runes fretted o'er,"
whose fate, in
surviving the ruin of so many empires, and being- brought from so
far to enlighten us on the history of past ages, can never cease to astonish
us. When we look at them again, let us spare a thought to the history of the
character itself. Its mysteries have cost even greater labor to unravel than
hieroglyphics themselves. To the latest times of the use of cuneiform by the
Seleucidas, pictorial, symbolic, and phonetic groups continued to be mixed
together, and a system of determinative signs was employed to show the reader
in what sense each word was to be taken. The symbolism, too, is very complex,
and the difficulty of reading the signs used phonetically is greatly increased
by the fact of the lan�guage from which they acquired their values (a Turanian
one) being different from the Semitic tongue, in which the most important
records are written.
CHAPTER XIV.
CONCLUSION.
At this point, where we are bringing our
inquiries to a con�clusion, we would feign look a little nearer into the mists
which shroud the past, and descry, were it possible, the actual dawn of history
for the individual nations�see not onlv how the larger bodies of men have
travelled through the pre-historic stages of their journey, but how, having
reached their settled home, each people begins to emerge from the obscurity
that surrounds its early days. What were the exact means, we ask, wherebv a
collection of nomadic or half-nomadic tribes separ�ated, reunited, separated
again, and developed upon different soils the qualities which distinguish them
from all others ? What is, in fact, the beginning of real national life ?
The worlds which
circle round our sun, or rather, the multitudinous systems of orbs which fill
space, might pose a like inquiry. There was a time when these which are
now distinct worlds were confounded as continuous nebulas, a thin vapor of
matter whirling round in one unchanging circle. In time, their motion became
less uniform, vortices� as the word is;�set in, smaller bodies of vaporous
matter which, obeying the universal movement, set up internal motions among
themselves, and cooling, separated into separate orbs. How like is all this to
the history of nations. These, conformed once together in one unstable mass of
wandering tribes, have in like manner separated from their nebulous brethren,
and, setting up their internal vortices, have coalesced
into nations. And yet
as a system of planets, albeit with their own distinctive motions, do all
revolve in one direction round one central force, so the different families of
nations, which we may call the planets of a system, seem in like manner com�pelled
by a power external to themselves in one particular course to play a particular
part in the world's history. The early stone age Turanians, the Cushite
civilizers of Egypt and Chaldaea, the Semitic people, may all be looked upon as
dif�ferent systems of nations, each with their mission to t he human race; and
thus the Aryan people, after they had become so separated as to lose all family
remembrance, are found work�ing together to finish an assigned destiny,
migrating in every direction, and carrying with them everywhere the seeds of a
higher civilization.
If we desire to get
any idea of the process by which the separation of the Aryan people became
completed, we must put quite upon one side the idea of a nation as we see it
now. Now, when we speak the word, we think of a political unit subject to one
government, stationary, and confined within pretty exact limits of space. But
very different was the nation during the process of its foundation; there was
scarcely any political unity among them, their homes were unfixed, the members
constantly shifting and changing combinations, like those heaps of sand we see
carried along in a cyclone. Let us then forget out political atlases, with their
different colors and well-marked boundaries, and think not of the inanimate
adjunct of a nation, the soil on which it happens to dwell, but of the nation
as the men of whom it is made up. The earliest things we discern are those
vortices set up in the midst of a homogeneous people, an attractive power
somewhere in the midst of them which draws them into closer fellowship. Jt acts
like the attractive power of a crystal in selecting from any of the surrounding
matters the fragments most suited to its proper formation. Thus the earliest
traditions of a people are generally the history of some individual tribe from
which the whole nation feigns itself descended; either because of its actual
pre-eminence from the beginning, the power it had of drawing other tribes to
share its fortunes, or because, out of many tribes drawn together by some
common interest or sen�timent, the bards of later days selected this one tribe
from among the others, and adopted its traditions for their own. If we remember
this, much that would otherwise appear a hopeless mass of contradiction and
ambiguity is capable of receiving a definite meaning.
The first rays of
European history shine upon the island-dotted sea and bounding coasts of the
.iEgean. Here sprang into life the Greek people, who have left behind so
splendid a legacy of art and philosophy. These, as has been already said, made
their entry into Europe traversing the southern shores of the Euxine, along
which passed, still as one people, the ancestors of the Greeks and the
Italians. The former, at all events, seem to have delayed long upon their
route, and it was upon these shores, or perhaps rather in the table�land of
ancient Phrygia, that first began the separation of two races who reunited to
form the Greek nation. Some, the older race, the Pelasgi, made their way to the
Hellespont, and by that route into European Greece; the others, the Ionians as
they subsequently became, passed onward to the sea-shore of Asia Minor, and,
tempted no doubt by the facilities of the voy�age, crossed from this mainland
to the neighboring islands, which lie so thickly scattered over the .dSgean
that the mari�ner passing from shore to shore of Asiatic and European Greece
need never on his voyage lose sight of land. They did not, however, find these
islands deserted, or occupied by savages only. The Phoenicians had been there
beforehand, as they were beforehand upon almost every coast in Europe, and had
made mercantile stations and established small colonies for the purposes of
trading with the Pelasgi of Greece. The adven�turous Ionians were thus brought
early into contact with the advanced civilization of Asia, and from this source
gained in all probability a knowledge of navigation, letters, and some of the
Semitic mythical legends. Thus while the mainland Greeks had altered little of
the primitive culture, the germs of a Hellenic civilization, of a Hellenic
life, were being fos�tered in the islands of the ^Egean. We see this reflected
in many Greek myths; in the legend, for example, of Minos and his early Cretan
kingdom, in the myth of Aphrodite springing from the sea by Cythera, and in the
worship of Phoebus Apollo which sprang up in Delos. Legend spoke of two Minoi,
one, the legislator of Crete, representative of all that was most ancient in
national polity, and for that reason transferred to be the judge of souls in
Hell; the second, he who made war against the Athenians, and compelled them to
pay their dreadful yearly tribute of seven youths and seven maidens to be
devoured of the Minotaur in the Cretan labyrinth. Until Theseus came. No doubt
the two Minoi are but amplifications of one being, who, whether mythical or
historical, is an echo in the memory of Greeks of the still older Cretan
kingdom. In both tales Minos has a dreadful aspect; perhaps because this
"Lord of the Isles" had been inimical to the early growing
communities of the mainland.
The myths of
Aphrodite and Apollo have been already commented upon as enfolding within them
the history of their origin. Aphrodite is essentially an Asiatic divinity; she
springs to life in a Phoenician colony. But Phoebus Apollo is before all things
the god of the Ionian Greeks; and as their first national life begins in the
islands, his birth too takes place in one of these, the central one of all,
Delos. In Homer, Delos, or Ortygia, is feigned to be the central spot of the
earth.
Thus the Greeks were
from the beginning a commercial people. Before their history began, there is
proof that they had established a colony in the Delta of the Nile; and the
frequent use of the word Javan in the Bible�which here stands for Ionians�shows how familiar was their name to
the dwellers in Asia. Wherever these mariners came in contact with their
brethren of the continent they excited in them the love of adventure, and
planted the germs of a new life, so that it was under their paramount influence
that these primitive Greeks began to coalesce from mutually hostile tribes into
nations. In northern Greece it was that the gathering together of tribes and
cities first began. These confederations were always based primarily upon
religious union, the protection of a common deity, a union to protect and
support a common shrine. They were called Amphicty-onies, confederations of
neighbors, a name which lived long in the history of Greece. These
amphictyonies seem first to have arisen in the north. Here too the words
Hellenic, Hellenes, first spring up as national epithets. Hellas never extended
farther north than the north of Thessaly, and was naturally marked off from
foreign countries by Olympia and Pierus. But the term spread southwards till it
embraced all Greek-speaking lands to the extremity of the peninsula, and over
the islands of the Aegean, and the coast of Asia Minor, on to the countless
colonies 'which issued from Greek shores; for Hellas was not a geographical
term, it included all the peoples of true Hellenic speech, and distinguished
them from the barbaroi, the " babblers," of other lands.
The two great nations
of the Gneco-Italic family kept up some knowledge of each other after they had
forgotten the days of their common life, and, strange to say, in days before
either of the two races had come to regard itself as a distinct people, each
was so regarded by the other. The Italians classed the Greeks in the common
name of Graeci or Graii, and the Greeks bestowed the name of "Oirucos upon
the nation of the Italians. It is curious to reflect upon the different
destinies which lay ahead of these two .races, who came under such similar
conditions into their new homes. Whether it were through some peculiarity in
their national character, or a too rapid civilization, or the too great
influences of a changeful character and adventurous life, the Greeks never
welded properly together the units of their race; the Italians through a much
slower process of integration lived to weld their scattered fragments into the
most powerful nation the world has ever seen.
This second half,
then, of the Graeco-Italic family, crossing the Hellespont like (or with) the
first dwellers in Greece proper, proceeded onwards until, skirting the shores
of the Adriatic, they found ont a second peninsula, whose fertile plains
tempted them to dispute the possession of the land with the older inhabitants.
Who were these older inhabi�tants ? In part they must have been those
lake-dwellers of northern Italy to whom reference was made in our second
chapter, and who were evidently closely allied to the stone-age men of
Switzerland: but besides these we have almost no trace of the men who were
dispossessed by the Italic tribes, and these last who pushed to the farthest
extremity of the peninsula must have completely absorbed, or completely
exterminated, the aborigines. The process by which the Italians spread over the
land is altogether hidden from us. Doubtless their several seats were not
assigned to the different branches at once, or without bloodshed. Though still
no more than separate tribes, we are able to divide the primitive Italicans
into stocks of which the southern most resembled the ancient type of the Pelasgic
family; those in the centre formed the Latin group; while north of these lay
the Etrus�cans, the most civilized of all the three. At this time the tribes
seem to have acknowledged no common bond, nothing corresponding to the word
Hellenic had sprung up to unite their interests: existence was as yet to the
strongest only. And while the laud was in this chaotic state, one tribe, or
small confederacy of tribes, among the Latin people began to assert its
pre-eminence. We see them dimly looming through a cloud of fable, daring,
warlike, unscrupulous in their dealings with their neighbors, firm in their
allegiance to each other. This tribe gradually increased in strength and
proportions till, from being a mere band of robbers defending themselves within
their rude fortifications, they grew in the traditions of their descendants,
and of the other tribes whom in course of time they either subdued or absorbed,
to be regarded as the founders of Rome. They did not accomplish their high
destiny without trials and reverses. More power�ful neighboring kingdoms looked
on askance during the days of their rise, and found opportunity more than once
to over�throw their city and all but subdue their state. Their former brethren,
the Kelts,who had been beforehand of all the Aryan races in entering Europe, and now
formed the most powerful people in this quarter of the globe, several times
swept down upon them like a devastating storm. But after each reverse the
infant colony arose with renewed Antaean vigor.
Thus in Italy, the
development from the tribal to the na�tional state was internal. No precocious
maritime race awoke in many different centres the seeds of nationality; rather
this nationality was a gradual growth from one root, the slow response to a central
attractive force. The energy of Rome did not g-o out in sea
adventure, or in the colonization of distant lands; but it was firmly bound to
absorb the different people of her own peninsula, people of like blood with
herself, but in every early stage of culture from an almost nomadic condition
to one of considerable advancement in the arts of peace.
When from the Greeks
and Romans we turn to the Kelts and Teutons, we must descend much lower in the
records of his�tory before we can get any clear glimpse at these. The Kelts,
who were probably the first Aryans in Europe, seem gradually
to have been forced
farther and farther west by the incur�sions of other peoples. At one time,
however, we have evidence that they extended eastward, at least as far as the
Rhine, and over all that northern portion of Italy�now Lombardy and part of
Sardinia�which to the Romans went by the name of Cisalpine GauL The long period
of subjec�tion to the Roman rule which Gaul experienced, obliterated in that
country all traces of its early Keltic manners, and we are reduced for our
information concerning these to the pages of Roman historians, or to the
remains of Keltic laws and customs preserved in the western homes of the race.
The last have only lately received a proper attention. The most primitive Irish
code�the Brehon laws�has been searched for traces of the primitive Keltic life.
From both our sources we gather that the Kelts were divided into tribes
regarded as members of one family. These clans were ruled over by chiefs, whose
offices were hereditary, or very early became so. They were thus but slightly
advanced out of the most primi�tive conditions,�they cannot be described as a
nation. Had they been so, extensive and warlike as they were, they would have
been capable of subduing all the other infant nationalities of Aryan folk. As
it was, as mere combinations of tribes under some powerful chieftain (Caesar
describes just such), they gave trouble to the Roman armies even under a
Caesar, and were in early days the most dreadful enemies of the Republic. Under
Brennus, they besieged and took Rome, sacked the city, and were only induced to
retire on the payment of a heavy ransom. A hundredyears later, under another
Brennus, they made their way into Thrace, ravaged the whole country, and from
Nicomedes, King of Bithynia, obtained a settlement in Asia Minor in the
district which from them received the name of Galatia. The occurrence of those
two names Brennus shows us that this could hardly have been a mere personal
name. It is undoubtedly the Celtic Brain, a king or chieftain, the same from
which we get the mythic Bran,and in all pro�bability the Irish O'Brien. The recognition of the Celtic
fighting capacity in the ancient world is illustrated by another circumstance,
and this is more especially interesting to us of the
modern world, whose army is so largely made up of Kelts from Ireland and
Scotland (Highlanders). Hieron I., the powerful tyrant of Syracuse, founded his
despotism, as he afterwards confessed, chiefly upon the 30,000 Gaulish mer�cenaries
whom he kept in pay.
For the rest, we know
little of the internal Keltic life and of the extent of its culture. Probably
this differed con�siderably in different parts, in Gaul for instance, and in
Ireland. The slight notices of Gaulish religion which Csesar gives refer
chiefly to its external belongings, to the hereditary sacerdotal class, who
seem also to have been the bardic class; of its myths and of their real
significance we know little more than what can be gathered by analogy of other
nations. We may assert that their nature-worship approached most nearly to the
Teutonic form among those of all the Aryan peoples.
Peculiarly
interesting to us are such traces as can be gleaned of the Teutonic race. The
first time that they show themselves upon the stage of History is in company
with the Kelts, if indeed the Teutones, who in company with the Cimbri, the
Tigurini and the Ambrones were defeated by Marius (b.c. 101) were really Teutons. The second of these four names is the same with the still extant Cymri (pro�nounced
Cumri), the native name of the Welsh, who are of course Kelts; so that, if this
be the first appearance of Germans, we find them in company with the Kelts.
What branch of the German family (if any) the Teutones were, is quite
uncertain. Again, in the pages of Caesar we meet with several names of tribes
evidently of German origin. The Treviri, the Marcornanni (Mark men, men of the
march or boundary), Allemanni (all-men, or men of the great or the mixed nation), the Suevi (Suabians), the Cherusci�men of the sword, perhaps the same
as iSa.vons, whose name has the same meaning.
It is not till after
the death of Theodosius at the end of the fourth century of our era that the Germans
fill a conspicuous place on the historical canvas. By this time they had come
to be divided into a number of different nations, similar in most of the
elements of their civilization and barbarism, closely allied in languages, but
politically unconnected, or even opposed.
Most of these
Teutonic peoples grew into mighty nations and deeply influenced the future of
European history. It is there�fore right that we pass them rapidly in review.
1. The Goths had beeu long settled in the region of the Lower Danube, chiefly
in the country called Mcesia, where Ulfilas, a Gothic prince who had been
converted to Christianity, returned to preach to his countrymen, became a
bishop among them, and by his translation of the Bible into their tongue, the
Mceso-Gothic, has left a perpetual memorial of the language. During the reign
of Honorius, the son of Theodosius, a portion of this nation, the West- or
Visi-goths, quitted their home and undertook under Alaric (All-king) their
march into Italy, thrice besieged and finally took Rome. Then turning aside,
they founded a powerful kingdom in the south of Gaul and in Spain. A century
later the East-Goths (Ostro-Goths), under the great Theodoric (People's-king)
again invaded Italy and founded an Ostrogothic kingdom upon the ruins of the
Western Empire. 2, 3, 4,5. The
Suevi, Alani, Burgundians, and Vandals crossed the Rhine in 405, and entered
Roman territory never again to return to whence they came. The Burgundians
(City-men) fixed their abode in east-central Gaul (Burgundy and Switzerland),
where their kingdom lasted till it was subdued by the Franks; but the other
three passed on into Spain, and the Vandals (Wends) from Spain
into Africa, where they founded a kingdom. 6. The Franks, (Free-men) having
been for nearly a century settled between the Meuse and the Scheldt, began
under Clovis (Chlodvig, BQudwig, Lewis,) (480 a.d.) their career of victory, from which
they did not rest until the whole of Gaul owned the sway of Merovingian kings.
7. The Longobardi (Long-beards, or men of the long horde, long stretch of
alluvial land), who after the Ostrogoths had been driven out of Italy by the
Emperor of the East, founded in defiance of his power a second Teutonic kingdom
in that country, a kingdom which lasted till the days of Charlemagne. 8. And
last, but we may safely say not least, the Saxons (Sword-men, from seava, a
sword) who invaded Britain, and under the name of Angles founded the nation to
which we belong, the longest lived of all those which rose upon the ruins of
the Roman Empire.
CONCLUSION.
The condition of the
German people, even so late as the time when they began their invasion of the
Roman territory, was far behind that of the majority of their Aryan fellows, It
is likely that they were little more civilized than the Greeks and Romans were,
in days when they lived together as one people. For the moment when we catch
sight of these�the Greeks and Romans�in
their new homes, we see them settled agriculturists, with no trace left of
their wandering habits. It was not so with the Teutons : they knew agriculture
cer�tainly, they had known it before they separated from the other peoples of
the European family (for the Greek and Latin words for plough reappear in
Teutonic speech), but they had
not altogether bid adieu to their migratory life; we see them still flowing in
their nebulous condition into the Roman lands. Even the Tartars of our day�the
very picture of a nomadic people�practise some form of agriculture. They plant
buckwheat, which, growing up in a few months, allows them to reap the fruits of
their industry without tying them long to a par�ticular spot. The Teutons were
more stationary than the Tartars, but doubtless they too were constantly
shifting their homes�choosing fresh homesteads, as Tacitus says they did,
wherever any spot or grove or stream attracted them. The condition of society
called the village community, which has been described in a former chapter,
though long abandoned by the cultivated Greeks and Romans, was still suitable
to the exigencies of their life; but these exigencies imposed upon it
some fresh conditions. Their situation, the situation of those who made their
way into the western countries of Europe, was essentially that of conquerors ;
for they must keep in sub�jection the original inhabitants, whether Romans or
Celts ; and so all their social arrangements bent before the primary necessity
of an effective war footing. Age and wisdom were of less value to the community
than youthful vigor. The patriarchal chief, chosen for his reputation for
wisdom and swaying by his mature counsels the free assemblies of the states,
gives place with them to the leader, famous for his valor and fortunes in the
field, by virtue of which he exacts a more implicit obedience than would be
accorded in unwarlike times, until by degrees his office becomes hereditary ;
the partition of the conquered soil among the victors, and the holding of it upon
conditions of military service, conditions which led so easily to the assertion
of a principle of primogeniture, and thence, by slow but natural stages, to
the conditions of tenure known as feudal; these are the marks of the
early Teutonic society.
Such germs of
literary life as they had were enshrined in the ballads, such as all nations
possess in some form. The re-echoes of these have come down to us in the
earliest known poems by men of Teutonic race, all of which are unfortunately
of very recent date. All are distinguished by the principle of versifying which
is essentially Teutonic; the trusting of the cadence, not to an exact
measurement of syllables or quantities, but to the pauses or beats of the voice
in repetition, the effect of these beats being heightened by the use of
alliteration. Poems of this true Teutonic character are the elder (or
Scemund's) "Edda" in the Icelandic, our Saxon poem " Beowulf
" and the " Bard's Tale," and one or two Low German ballads, the
most celebrated of which, though one of the latest, is the "Nibelungen
lied." These poems repeat the old mythic legends which had for centuries
been handed down from father to son, and display the mythology and religion of
our German ancestors, such as in a former chapter we endeavored to sketch them
out. Slight as they are, they are of inestimable value, in that they help us to
read the mind of heathen Germany, and to weigh the significance of the last
great revolution in Europe's history, a revolution wherein we through our
ancestors have taken and through ourselves are still taking part, and in which
we have therefore so close an interest.
But having carried
the reader down to this point, our task oomes to an end. Even for Europe, the
youngest born as it were in the world's history, when we have passed the epoch
of Teutonic invasion, the star of history sera rubens has definitely
risen. Nations from this time forward emerge more and more into light, and
little or nothing falls to the part of prehistoric study.
AUTHORITIES.
Evans, Stone Implements of Great Britain.
Tylor, Early History of Mankind.
Muller, Lectures on the Science of Language.
Peile, Introduction to Greek and Latin Etymology. .
Bunsen, Egypt�s Place in the world, Legge, Chinese Classics, with Introduction,
Lenormant, Manual of the Ancient History of the East.
�������������������� Five
Great Monarchies
|